\input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
-@c Copyright 1988-1999
+@c Copyright 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,
+@c 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@c
-@c %**start of header
+@c %**start of header
@c makeinfo ignores cmds prev to setfilename, so its arg cannot make use
@c of @set vars. However, you can override filename with makeinfo -o.
@setfilename gdb.info
@finalout
@syncodeindex ky cp
-@c readline appendices use @vindex
+@c readline appendices use @vindex, @findex and @ftable,
+@c annotate.texi and gdbmi use @findex.
@syncodeindex vr cp
+@syncodeindex fn cp
@c !!set GDB manual's edition---not the same as GDB version!
-@set EDITION Seventh
+@set EDITION Ninth
@c !!set GDB manual's revision date
-@set DATE February 1999
+@set DATE December 2001
-@c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
+@c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO 3.12 OR LATER.
-@ifinfo
@c This is a dir.info fragment to support semi-automated addition of
-@c manuals to an info tree. zoo@cygnus.com is developing this facility.
-@format
-START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
+@c manuals to an info tree.
+@dircategory Programming & development tools.
+@direntry
* Gdb: (gdb). The @sc{gnu} debugger.
-END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
-@end format
-@end ifinfo
-@c
-@c
+@end direntry
+
@ifinfo
This file documents the @sc{gnu} debugger @value{GDBN}.
-This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE},
+This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE},
of @cite{Debugging with @value{GDBN}: the @sc{gnu} Source-Level Debugger}
for @value{GDBN} Version @value{GDBVN}.
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-@ignore
-Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
-results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
-notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
-(this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
+Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1998,@*
+ 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-@end ignore
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
+any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
+Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
+Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
+and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+(a) The Free Software Foundation's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have
+freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies
+published by the Free Software Foundation raise funds for GNU
+development.''
@end ifinfo
@titlepage
@sp 1
@subtitle @value{EDITION} Edition, for @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN}
@subtitle @value{DATE}
-@author Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
+@author Richard Stallman, Roland Pesch, Stan Shebs, et al.
@page
@tex
{\parskip=0pt
}
@end tex
-@c ISBN seems to be wrong...
-
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
-Copyright @copyright{} 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
@sp 2
Published by the Free Software Foundation @*
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, @*
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA @*
-Printed copies are available for $20 each. @*
-ISBN 1-882114-11-6 @*
-
-Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
-this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
-are preserved on all copies.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
-manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
-entire resulting derived work is distributed under the terms of a
-permission notice identical to this one.
-
-Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
-into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions.
+ISBN 1-882114-77-9 @*
+
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
+any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with the
+Invariant Sections being ``Free Software'' and ``Free Software Needs
+Free Documentation'', with the Front-Cover Texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
+and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.
+
+(a) The Free Software Foundation's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have
+freedom to copy and modify this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies
+published by the Free Software Foundation raise funds for GNU
+development.''
@end titlepage
@page
@ifinfo
-@node Top
+@node Top, Summary, (dir), (dir)
+
@top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
This file describes @value{GDBN}, the @sc{gnu} symbolic debugger.
-This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE}, for @value{GDBN} Version
+This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE}, for @value{GDBN} Version
@value{GDBVN}.
-Copyright (C) 1988-1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+Copyright (C) 1988-2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
@menu
* Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
* Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
* Stack:: Examining the stack
* Source:: Examining source files
* Data:: Examining data
+* Tracepoints:: Debugging remote targets non-intrusively
+* Overlays:: Debugging programs that use overlays
* Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
* Altering:: Altering execution
* GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
* Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
+* Remote Debugging:: Debugging remote programs
* Configurations:: Configuration-specific information
* Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
* Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
+* TUI:: @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
* Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
+* Annotations:: @value{GDBN}'s annotation interface.
+* GDB/MI:: @value{GDBN}'s Machine Interface.
* GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
* Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print @value{GDBN} documentation
* Command Line Editing:: Command Line Editing
* Using History Interactively:: Using History Interactively
* Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
+* Maintenance Commands:: Maintenance Commands
+* Remove Protocol:: GDB Remote Serial Protocol
+* GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
* Index:: Index
@end menu
@end ifinfo
+@c the replication sucks, but this avoids a texinfo 3.12 lameness
+
+@ifhtml
+@node Top
+
+@top Debugging with @value{GDBN}
+
+This file describes @value{GDBN}, the @sc{gnu} symbolic debugger.
+
+This is the @value{EDITION} Edition, @value{DATE}, for @value{GDBN} Version
+@value{GDBVN}.
+
+Copyright (C) 1988-2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+@menu
+* Summary:: Summary of @value{GDBN}
+* Sample Session:: A sample @value{GDBN} session
+
+* Invocation:: Getting in and out of @value{GDBN}
+* Commands:: @value{GDBN} commands
+* Running:: Running programs under @value{GDBN}
+* Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
+* Stack:: Examining the stack
+* Source:: Examining source files
+* Data:: Examining data
+* Tracepoints:: Debugging remote targets non-intrusively
+* Overlays:: Debugging programs that use overlays
+
+* Languages:: Using @value{GDBN} with different languages
+
+* Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
+* Altering:: Altering execution
+* GDB Files:: @value{GDBN} files
+* Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
+* Remote Debugging:: Debugging remote programs
+* Configurations:: Configuration-specific information
+* Controlling GDB:: Controlling @value{GDBN}
+* Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
+* TUI:: @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
+* Emacs:: Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
+* Annotations:: @value{GDBN}'s annotation interface.
+* GDB/MI:: @value{GDBN}'s Machine Interface.
+
+* GDB Bugs:: Reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
+* Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print @value{GDBN} documentation
+
+* Command Line Editing:: Command Line Editing
+* Using History Interactively:: Using History Interactively
+* Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
+* Maintenance Commands:: Maintenance Commands
+* Remove Protocol:: GDB Remote Serial Protocol
+* GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation
+* Index:: Index
+@end menu
+
+@end ifhtml
+
+@c TeX can handle the contents at the start but makeinfo 3.12 can not
+@iftex
+@contents
+@end iftex
+
@node Summary
@unnumbered Summary of @value{GDBN}
@node Free Software
@unnumberedsec Free software
-@value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the @sc{gnu}
+@value{GDBN} is @dfn{free software}, protected by the @sc{gnu}
General Public License
(GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
from anyone else.
+@unnumberedsec Free Software Needs Free Documentation
+
+The biggest deficiency in the free software community today is not in
+the software---it is the lack of good free documentation that we can
+include with the free software. Many of our most important
+programs do not come with free reference manuals and free introductory
+texts. Documentation is an essential part of any software package;
+when an important free software package does not come with a free
+manual and a free tutorial, that is a major gap. We have many such
+gaps today.
+
+Consider Perl, for instance. The tutorial manuals that people
+normally use are non-free. How did this come about? Because the
+authors of those manuals published them with restrictive terms---no
+copying, no modification, source files not available---which exclude
+them from the free software world.
+
+That wasn't the first time this sort of thing happened, and it was far
+from the last. Many times we have heard a GNU user eagerly describe a
+manual that he is writing, his intended contribution to the community,
+only to learn that he had ruined everything by signing a publication
+contract to make it non-free.
+
+Free documentation, like free software, is a matter of freedom, not
+price. The problem with the non-free manual is not that publishers
+charge a price for printed copies---that in itself is fine. (The Free
+Software Foundation sells printed copies of manuals, too.) The
+problem is the restrictions on the use of the manual. Free manuals
+are available in source code form, and give you permission to copy and
+modify. Non-free manuals do not allow this.
+
+The criteria of freedom for a free manual are roughly the same as for
+free software. Redistribution (including the normal kinds of
+commercial redistribution) must be permitted, so that the manual can
+accompany every copy of the program, both on-line and on paper.
+
+Permission for modification of the technical content is crucial too.
+When people modify the software, adding or changing features, if they
+are conscientious they will change the manual too---so they can
+provide accurate and clear documentation for the modified program. A
+manual that leaves you no choice but to write a new manual to document
+a changed version of the program is not really available to our
+community.
+
+Some kinds of limits on the way modification is handled are
+acceptable. For example, requirements to preserve the original
+author's copyright notice, the distribution terms, or the list of
+authors, are ok. It is also no problem to require modified versions
+to include notice that they were modified. Even entire sections that
+may not be deleted or changed are acceptable, as long as they deal
+with nontechnical topics (like this one). These kinds of restrictions
+are acceptable because they don't obstruct the community's normal use
+of the manual.
+
+However, it must be possible to modify all the @emph{technical}
+content of the manual, and then distribute the result in all the usual
+media, through all the usual channels. Otherwise, the restrictions
+obstruct the use of the manual, it is not free, and we need another
+manual to replace it.
+
+Please spread the word about this issue. Our community continues to
+lose manuals to proprietary publishing. If we spread the word that
+free software needs free reference manuals and free tutorials, perhaps
+the next person who wants to contribute by writing documentation will
+realize, before it is too late, that only free manuals contribute to
+the free software community.
+
+If you are writing documentation, please insist on publishing it under
+the GNU Free Documentation License or another free documentation
+license. Remember that this decision requires your approval---you
+don't have to let the publisher decide. Some commercial publishers
+will use a free license if you insist, but they will not propose the
+option; it is up to you to raise the issue and say firmly that this is
+what you want. If the publisher you are dealing with refuses, please
+try other publishers. If you're not sure whether a proposed license
+is free, write to @email{licensing@@gnu.org}.
+
+You can encourage commercial publishers to sell more free, copylefted
+manuals and tutorials by buying them, and particularly by buying
+copies from the publishers that paid for their writing or for major
+improvements. Meanwhile, try to avoid buying non-free documentation
+at all. Check the distribution terms of a manual before you buy it,
+and insist that whoever seeks your business must respect your freedom.
+Check the history of the book, and try to reward the publishers that
+have paid or pay the authors to work on it.
+
+The Free Software Foundation maintains a list of free documentation
+published by other publishers, at
+@url{http://www.fsf.org/doc/other-free-books.html}.
+
@node Contributors
-@unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
-
-Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other
-@sc{gnu} programs. Many others have contributed to its development.
-This section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues
-of free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
-regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
-@file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution approximates a
+@unnumberedsec Contributors to @value{GDBN}
+
+Richard Stallman was the original author of @value{GDBN}, and of many
+other @sc{gnu} programs. Many others have contributed to its
+development. This section attempts to credit major contributors. One
+of the virtues of free software is that everyone is free to contribute
+to it; with regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The
+file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution approximates a
blow-by-blow account.
Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
So that they may not regard their many labors as thankless, we
particularly thank those who shepherded @value{GDBN} through major
releases:
+Andrew Cagney (releases 5.0 and 5.1);
Jim Blandy (release 4.18);
Jason Molenda (release 4.17);
Stan Shebs (release 4.14);
Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Peter TerMaat, Chris
Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
-Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the @sc{gnu} C++ support in GDB,
-with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
-Clark wrote the @sc{gnu} C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
-TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
+Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} support
+in @value{GDBN}, with significant additional contributions from Per
+Bothner and Daniel Berlin. James Clark wrote the @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
+demangler. Early work on C@t{++} was by Peter TerMaat (who also did
+much general update work leading to release 3.0).
-@value{GDBN} 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
+@value{GDBN} uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
the original support for encapsulated COFF.
-Brent Benson of Harris Computer Systems contributed DWARF 2 support.
+Brent Benson of Harris Computer Systems contributed DWARF2 support.
Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code, the
Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this manual.
-Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
-He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded
+Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4.
+He also enhanced the command-completion support to cover C@t{++} overloaded
symbols.
Hitachi America, Ltd. sponsored the support for H8/300, H8/500, and
Matsushita sponsored the support for the MN10200 and MN10300 processors.
-Fujitsu sponsored the support for SPARClite and FR30 processors
+Fujitsu sponsored the support for SPARClite and FR30 processors.
Kung Hsu, Jeff Law, and Rick Sladkey added support for hardware
watchpoints.
Stu Grossman wrote gdbserver.
Jim Kingdon, Peter Schauer, Ian Taylor, and Stu Grossman made
-nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout GDB.
+nearly innumerable bug fixes and cleanups throughout @value{GDBN}.
The following people at the Hewlett-Packard Company contributed
support for the PA-RISC 2.0 architecture, HP-UX 10.20, 10.30, and 11.0
-(narrow mode), HP's implementation of kernel threads, HP's aC++
+(narrow mode), HP's implementation of kernel threads, HP's aC@t{++}
compiler, and the terminal user interface: Ben Krepp, Richard Title,
John Bishop, Susan Macchia, Kathy Mann, Satish Pai, India Paul, Steve
Rehrauer, and Elena Zannoni. Kim Haase provided HP-specific
information in this manual.
-Cygnus Solutions has sponsored GDB maintenance and much of its
-development since 1991. Cygnus engineers who have worked on GDB
-fulltime include Mark Alexander, Jim Blandy, Per Bothner, Edith Epstein,
-Chris Faylor, Fred Fish, Martin Hunt, Jim Ingham, John Gilmore, Stu
-Grossman, Kung Hsu, Jim Kingdon, John Metzler, Fernando Nasser, Geoffrey
-Noer, Dawn Perchik, Rich Pixley, Zdenek Radouch, Keith Seitz, Stan
-Shebs, David Taylor, and Elena Zannoni. In addition, Dave Brolley, Ian
-Carmichael, Steve Chamberlain, Nick Clifton, JT Conklin, Stan Cox, DJ
-Delorie, Ulrich Drepper, Frank Eigler, Doug Evans, Sean Fagan, David
-Henkel-Wallace, Richard Henderson, Jeff Holcomb, Jeff Law, Jim Lemke,
-Tom Lord, Bob Manson, Michael Meissner, Jason Merrill, Catherine Moore,
-Drew Moseley, Ken Raeburn, Gavin Romig-Koch, Rob Savoye, Jamie Smith,
-Mike Stump, Ian Taylor, Angela Thomas, Michael Tiemann, Tom Tromey, Ron
-Unrau, Jim Wilson, and David Zuhn have made contributions both large
-and small.
+DJ Delorie ported @value{GDBN} to MS-DOS, for the DJGPP project.
+Robert Hoehne made significant contributions to the DJGPP port.
+
+Cygnus Solutions has sponsored @value{GDBN} maintenance and much of its
+development since 1991. Cygnus engineers who have worked on @value{GDBN}
+fulltime include Mark Alexander, Jim Blandy, Per Bothner, Kevin
+Buettner, Edith Epstein, Chris Faylor, Fred Fish, Martin Hunt, Jim
+Ingham, John Gilmore, Stu Grossman, Kung Hsu, Jim Kingdon, John Metzler,
+Fernando Nasser, Geoffrey Noer, Dawn Perchik, Rich Pixley, Zdenek
+Radouch, Keith Seitz, Stan Shebs, David Taylor, and Elena Zannoni. In
+addition, Dave Brolley, Ian Carmichael, Steve Chamberlain, Nick Clifton,
+JT Conklin, Stan Cox, DJ Delorie, Ulrich Drepper, Frank Eigler, Doug
+Evans, Sean Fagan, David Henkel-Wallace, Richard Henderson, Jeff
+Holcomb, Jeff Law, Jim Lemke, Tom Lord, Bob Manson, Michael Meissner,
+Jason Merrill, Catherine Moore, Drew Moseley, Ken Raeburn, Gavin
+Romig-Koch, Rob Savoye, Jamie Smith, Mike Stump, Ian Taylor, Angela
+Thomas, Michael Tiemann, Tom Tromey, Ron Unrau, Jim Wilson, and David
+Zuhn have made contributions both large and small.
@node Sample Session
@c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
@c FIXME... format to come out better.
@value{GDBN} is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
- of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
+ of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
the conditions.
-There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
+There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
for details.
@value{GDBN} @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
@smallexample
@b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
-Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
+Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
at builtin.c:879
879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
@end smallexample
(@value{GDBP}) @b{bt}
#0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
at input.c:530
-#1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
+#1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
at builtin.c:882
#2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
#3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
@chapter Getting In and Out of @value{GDBN}
This chapter discusses how to start @value{GDBN}, and how to get out of it.
-The essentials are:
+The essentials are:
@itemize @bullet
-@item
+@item
type @samp{@value{GDBP}} to start @value{GDBN}.
-@item
+@item
type @kbd{quit} or @kbd{C-d} to exit.
@end itemize
The command-line options described here are designed
to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
-options may effectively be unavailable.
+options may effectively be unavailable.
The most usual way to start @value{GDBN} is with one argument,
specifying an executable program:
named @file{1234}; @value{GDBN} does check for a core file first).
Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
-complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote debugger
-attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
-and there is often no way to get a core dump.
+complete operating system; when you use @value{GDBN} as a remote
+debugger attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of
+``process'', and there is often no way to get a core dump. @value{GDBN}
+will warn you if it is unable to attach or to read core dumps.
+
+You can optionally have @code{@value{GDBP}} pass any arguments after the
+executable file to the inferior using @code{--args}. This option stops
+option processing.
+@example
+gdb --args gcc -O2 -c foo.c
+@end example
+This will cause @code{@value{GDBP}} to debug @code{gcc}, and to set
+@code{gcc}'s command-line arguments (@pxref{Arguments}) to @samp{-O2 -c foo.c}.
-You can run @code{gdb} without printing the front material, which describes
+You can run @code{@value{GDBP}} without printing the front material, which describes
@value{GDBN}'s non-warranty, by specifying @code{-silent}:
@smallexample
@node File Options
@subsection Choosing files
-When @value{GDBN} starts
+When @value{GDBN} starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
-@samp{-c} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the first argument
-that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
-@samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
-that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
-the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
+@samp{-c} (or @samp{-p} options respectively. (@value{GDBN} reads the
+first argument that does not have an associated option flag as
+equivalent to the @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the
+second argument that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as
+equivalent to the @samp{-c}/@samp{-p} option followed by that argument.)
+If the second argument begins with a decimal digit, @value{GDBN} will
+first attempt to attach to it as a process, and if that fails, attempt
+to open it as a corefile. If you have a corefile whose name begins with
+a digit, you can prevent @value{GDBN} from treating it as a pid by
+prefixing it with @file{./}, eg. @file{./12345}.
If @value{GDBN} has not been configured to included core file support,
such as for most embedded targets, then it will complain about a second
(If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
+@c NOTE: the @cindex entries here use double dashes ON PURPOSE. This
+@c way, both those who look for -foo and --foo in the index, will find
+@c it.
+
@table @code
@item -symbols @var{file}
@itemx -s @var{file}
+@cindex @code{--symbols}
+@cindex @code{-s}
Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
@item -exec @var{file}
@itemx -e @var{file}
+@cindex @code{--exec}
+@cindex @code{-e}
Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when appropriate,
and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core dump.
@item -se @var{file}
+@cindex @code{--se}
Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
file.
@item -core @var{file}
@itemx -c @var{file}
-Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
+@cindex @code{--core}
+@cindex @code{-c}
+Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
@item -c @var{number}
-Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command
-(unless there is a file in core-dump format named @var{number}, in which
-case @samp{-c} specifies that file as a core dump to read).
+@item -pid @var{number}
+@itemx -p @var{number}
+@cindex @code{--pid}
+@cindex @code{-p}
+Connect to process ID @var{number}, as with the @code{attach} command.
+If there is no such process, @value{GDBN} will attempt to open a core
+file named @var{number}.
@item -command @var{file}
@itemx -x @var{file}
+@cindex @code{--command}
+@cindex @code{-x}
Execute @value{GDBN} commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command
Files,, Command files}.
@item -directory @var{directory}
@itemx -d @var{directory}
+@cindex @code{--directory}
+@cindex @code{-d}
Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
@item -m
@itemx -mapped
+@cindex @code{--mapped}
+@cindex @code{-m}
@emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
supported on all systems.}@*
If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
-system call, you can use this option
+system call, you can use this option
to have @value{GDBN} write the symbols from your
program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
-called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file is @file{./fred.syms}.
+called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file is @file{/tmp/fred.syms}.
Future @value{GDBN} debugging sessions notice the presence of this file,
and can quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
the symbol table from the executable program.
@item -r
@itemx -readnow
+@cindex @code{--readnow}
+@cindex @code{-r}
Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
@end table
-The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in
+You typically combine the @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options in
order to build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol
-information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for
-information on @file{.syms} files.) A simple @value{GDBN} invocation to do
-nothing but build a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
+information. (@xref{Files,,Commands to specify files}, for information
+on @file{.syms} files.) A simple @value{GDBN} invocation to do nothing
+but build a @file{.syms} file for future use is:
@example
- gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
+gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
@end example
@node Mode Options
@table @code
@item -nx
@itemx -n
-Do not execute commands from any initialization files (normally called
-@file{.gdbinit}, or @file{gdb.ini} on PCs). Normally, the commands in
-these files are executed after all the command options and arguments
-have been processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command files}.
+@cindex @code{--nx}
+@cindex @code{-n}
+Do not execute commands found in any initialization files. Normally,
+@value{GDBN} executes the commands in these files after all the command
+options and arguments have been processed. @xref{Command Files,,Command
+files}.
@item -quiet
+@itemx -silent
@itemx -q
+@cindex @code{--quiet}
+@cindex @code{--silent}
+@cindex @code{-q}
``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
@item -batch
+@cindex @code{--batch}
Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the
command files specified with @samp{-x} (and all commands from
initialization files, if not inhibited with @samp{-n}). Exit with
nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the @value{GDBN} commands
in the command files.
-Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for example to
-download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
-more useful, the message
+Batch mode may be useful for running @value{GDBN} as a filter, for
+example to download and run a program on another computer; in order to
+make this more useful, the message
@example
Program exited normally.
@end example
@noindent
-(which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under @value{GDBN} control
-terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
+(which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under
+@value{GDBN} control terminates) is not issued when running in batch
+mode.
+
+@item -nowindows
+@itemx -nw
+@cindex @code{--nowindows}
+@cindex @code{-nw}
+``No windows''. If @value{GDBN} comes with a graphical user interface
+(GUI) built in, then this option tells @value{GDBN} to only use the command-line
+interface. If no GUI is available, this option has no effect.
+
+@item -windows
+@itemx -w
+@cindex @code{--windows}
+@cindex @code{-w}
+If @value{GDBN} includes a GUI, then this option requires it to be
+used if possible.
@item -cd @var{directory}
+@cindex @code{--cd}
Run @value{GDBN} using @var{directory} as its working directory,
instead of the current directory.
@item -fullname
@itemx -f
+@cindex @code{--fullname}
+@cindex @code{-f}
@sc{gnu} Emacs sets this option when it runs @value{GDBN} as a
subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN} to output the full file name and line
number in a standard, recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is
@samp{\032} characters as a signal to display the source code for the
frame.
-@item -b @var{bps}
+@item -epoch
+@cindex @code{--epoch}
+The Epoch Emacs-@value{GDBN} interface sets this option when it runs
+@value{GDBN} as a subprocess. It tells @value{GDBN} to modify its print
+routines so as to allow Epoch to display values of expressions in a
+separate window.
+
+@item -annotate @var{level}
+@cindex @code{--annotate}
+This option sets the @dfn{annotation level} inside @value{GDBN}. Its
+effect is identical to using @samp{set annotate @var{level}}
+(@pxref{Annotations}).
+Annotation level controls how much information does @value{GDBN} print
+together with its prompt, values of expressions, source lines, and other
+types of output. Level 0 is the normal, level 1 is for use when
+@value{GDBN} is run as a subprocess of @sc{gnu} Emacs, level 2 is the
+maximum annotation suitable for programs that control @value{GDBN}.
+
+@item -async
+@cindex @code{--async}
+Use the asynchronous event loop for the command-line interface.
+@value{GDBN} processes all events, such as user keyboard input, via a
+special event loop. This allows @value{GDBN} to accept and process user
+commands in parallel with the debugged process being
+run@footnote{@value{GDBN} built with @sc{djgpp} tools for
+MS-DOS/MS-Windows supports this mode of operation, but the event loop is
+suspended when the debuggee runs.}, so you don't need to wait for
+control to return to @value{GDBN} before you type the next command.
+(@emph{Note:} as of version 5.1, the target side of the asynchronous
+operation is not yet in place, so @samp{-async} does not work fully
+yet.)
+@c FIXME: when the target side of the event loop is done, the above NOTE
+@c should be removed.
+
+When the standard input is connected to a terminal device, @value{GDBN}
+uses the asynchronous event loop by default, unless disabled by the
+@samp{-noasync} option.
+
+@item -noasync
+@cindex @code{--noasync}
+Disable the asynchronous event loop for the command-line interface.
+
+@item --args
+@cindex @code{--args}
+Change interpretation of command line so that arguments following the
+executable file are passed as command line arguments to the inferior.
+This option stops option processing.
+
+@item -baud @var{bps}
+@itemx -b @var{bps}
+@cindex @code{--baud}
+@cindex @code{-b}
Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
interface used by @value{GDBN} for remote debugging.
@item -tty @var{device}
+@itemx -t @var{device}
+@cindex @code{--tty}
+@cindex @code{-t}
Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
@c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
@c resolve the situation of these eventually
-@c @item -tui
-@c Use a Terminal User Interface. For information, use your Web browser to
-@c read the file @file{TUI.html}, which is usually installed in the
-@c directory @code{/opt/langtools/wdb/doc} on HP-UX systems. Do not use
-@c this option if you run @value{GDBN} from Emacs (see @pxref{Emacs, ,Using
-@c @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}).
+@item -tui
+@cindex @code{--tui}
+Activate the Terminal User Interface when starting.
+The Terminal User Interface manages several text windows on the terminal,
+showing source, assembly, registers and @value{GDBN} command outputs
+(@pxref{TUI, ,@value{GDBN} Text User Interface}).
+Do not use this option if you run @value{GDBN} from Emacs
+(@pxref{Emacs, ,Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs}).
@c @item -xdb
+@c @cindex @code{--xdb}
@c Run in XDB compatibility mode, allowing the use of certain XDB commands.
@c For information, see the file @file{xdb_trans.html}, which is usually
@c installed in the directory @code{/opt/langtools/wdb/doc} on HP-UX
@c systems.
+@item -interpreter @var{interp}
+@cindex @code{--interpreter}
+Use the interpreter @var{interp} for interface with the controlling
+program or device. This option is meant to be set by programs which
+communicate with @value{GDBN} using it as a back end.
+
+@samp{--interpreter=mi} (or @samp{--interpreter=mi1}) causes
+@value{GDBN} to use the @dfn{gdb/mi interface} (@pxref{GDB/MI, , The
+@sc{gdb/mi} Interface}). The older @sc{gdb/mi} interface, included in
+@value{GDBN} version 5.0 can be selected with @samp{--interpreter=mi0}.
+
+@item -write
+@cindex @code{--write}
+Open the executable and core files for both reading and writing. This
+is equivalent to the @samp{set write on} command inside @value{GDBN}
+(@pxref{Patching}).
+
+@item -statistics
+@cindex @code{--statistics}
+This option causes @value{GDBN} to print statistics about time and
+memory usage after it completes each command and returns to the prompt.
+
+@item -version
+@cindex @code{--version}
+This option causes @value{GDBN} to print its version number and
+no-warranty blurb, and exit.
+
@end table
@node Quitting GDB
@table @code
@kindex quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
-@kindex q
-@item quit
-To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or
-type an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}). If you do not supply
-@var{expression}, @value{GDBN} will terminate normally; otherwise it will
-terminate using the result of @var{expression} as the error code.
+@kindex q @r{(@code{quit})}
+@item quit @r{[}@var{expression}@r{]}
+@itemx q
+To exit @value{GDBN}, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated
+@code{q}), or type an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}). If you
+do not supply @var{expression}, @value{GDBN} will terminate normally;
+otherwise it will terminate using the result of @var{expression} as the
+error code.
@end table
@cindex interrupt
arguments whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the
command @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to
step, as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command
-with no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
+with no arguments. Some commands do not allow any arguments.
@cindex abbreviation
@value{GDBN} command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
arguments to the @code{help} command.
@cindex repeating commands
-@kindex RET
+@kindex RET @r{(repeat last command)}
A blank line as input to @value{GDBN} (typing just @key{RET}) means to
-repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
+repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
will not repeat this way; these are commands whose unintentional
repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
repeat.
@key{RET} too many in this situation, @value{GDBN} disables command
repetition after any command that generates this sort of display.
-@kindex #
+@kindex # @r{(a comment)}
@cindex comment
Any text from a @kbd{#} to the end of the line is a comment; it does
nothing. This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command
Files,,Command files}).
+@cindex repeating command sequences
+@kindex C-o @r{(operate-and-get-next)}
+The @kbd{C-o} binding is useful for repeating a complex sequence of
+commands. This command accepts the current line, like @kbd{RET}, and
+then fetches the next line relative to the current line from the history
+for editing.
+
@node Completion
@section Command completion
@example
(@value{GDBP}) b make_ @key{TAB}
@exdent @value{GDBN} sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
-make_a_section_from_file make_environ
-make_abs_section make_function_type
-make_blockvector make_pointer_type
-make_cleanup make_reference_type
+make_a_section_from_file make_environ
+make_abs_section make_function_type
+make_blockvector make_pointer_type
+make_cleanup make_reference_type
make_command make_symbol_completion_list
(@value{GDBP}) b make_
@end example
command.
If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
-can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
+can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this either by holding down a
key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
one) while typing @kbd{?}, or as @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
@value{GDBN} commands.
The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
-name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
-(multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
-type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
-distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
-@code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
-@code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
-facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
-beginning of the function name. This alerts @value{GDBN} that it may need to
-consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
-@kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
+name of a C@t{++} function. This is because C@t{++} allows function
+overloading (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished
+by argument type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you
+may need to distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name}
+that takes an @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version
+that takes a @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the
+word-completion facilities in this situation, type a single quote
+@code{'} at the beginning of the function name. This alerts
+@value{GDBN} that it may need to consider more information than usual
+when you press @key{TAB} or @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
@example
-(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
+(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble( @kbd{M-?}
bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
(@value{GDBP}) b 'bubble(
@end example
completion on an overloaded symbol.
For more information about overloaded functions, see @ref{C plus plus
-expressions, ,C++ expressions}. You can use the command @code{set
+expressions, ,C@t{++} expressions}. You can use the command @code{set
overload-resolution off} to disable overload resolution;
-see @ref{Debugging C plus plus, ,@value{GDBN} features for C++}.
+see @ref{Debugging C plus plus, ,@value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}}.
@node Help
@cindex online documentation
@kindex help
-You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands,
+You can always ask @value{GDBN} itself for information on its commands,
using the command @code{help}.
@table @code
-@kindex h
+@kindex h @r{(@code{help})}
@item help
@itemx h
You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
(@value{GDBP}) help
List of classes of commands:
-running -- Running the program
-stack -- Examining the stack
-data -- Examining data
+aliases -- Aliases of other commands
breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
+data -- Examining data
files -- Specifying and examining files
+internals -- Maintenance commands
+obscure -- Obscure features
+running -- Running the program
+stack -- Examining the stack
status -- Status inquiries
support -- Support facilities
+tracepoints -- Tracing of program execution without@*
+ stopping the program
user-defined -- User-defined commands
-aliases -- Aliases of other commands
-obscure -- Obscure features
-Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
+Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
commands in that class.
-Type "help" followed by command name for full
+Type "help" followed by command name for full
documentation.
Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
(@value{GDBP})
@end smallexample
+@c the above line break eliminates huge line overfull...
@item help @var{class}
Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
@c Line break in "show" line falsifies real output, but needed
@c to fit in smallbook page size.
-show -- Generic command for showing things set
- with "set"
-info -- Generic command for printing status
+info -- Generic command for showing things
+ about the program being debugged
+show -- Generic command for showing things
+ about the debugger
-Type "help" followed by command name for full
+Type "help" followed by command name for full
documentation.
Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
(@value{GDBP})
With a command name as @code{help} argument, @value{GDBN} displays a
short paragraph on how to use that command.
+@kindex apropos
+@item apropos @var{args}
+The @code{apropos @var{args}} command searches through all of the @value{GDBN}
+commands, and their documentation, for the regular expression specified in
+@var{args}. It prints out all matches found. For example:
+
+@smallexample
+apropos reload
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+results in:
+
+@smallexample
+@c @group
+set symbol-reloading -- Set dynamic symbol table reloading
+ multiple times in one run
+show symbol-reloading -- Show dynamic symbol table reloading
+ multiple times in one run
+@c @end group
+@end smallexample
+
@kindex complete
@item complete @var{args}
The @code{complete @var{args}} command lists all the possible completions
@smallexample
@group
+if
+ignore
info
inspect
-ignore
@end group
@end smallexample
@c @group
@table @code
@kindex info
-@kindex i
+@kindex i @r{(@code{info})}
@item info
This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
program. For example, you can list the arguments given to your program
@kindex set
@item set
-You can assign the result of an expression to an environment variable with
+You can assign the result of an expression to an environment variable with
@code{set}. For example, you can set the @value{GDBN} prompt to a $-sign with
@code{set prompt $}.
@kindex show
@item show
-In contrast to @code{info}, @code{show} is for describing the state of
+In contrast to @code{info}, @code{show} is for describing the state of
@value{GDBN} itself.
You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
@cindex version number
@item show version
Show what version of @value{GDBN} is running. You should include this
-information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of @value{GDBN} are in
-use at your site, you may occasionally want to determine which version
-of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new commands are introduced,
-and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
-when you start @value{GDBN}.
+information in @value{GDBN} bug-reports. If multiple versions of
+@value{GDBN} are in use at your site, you may need to determine which
+version of @value{GDBN} you are running; as @value{GDBN} evolves, new
+commands are introduced, and old ones may wither away. Also, many
+system vendors ship variant versions of @value{GDBN}, and there are
+variant versions of @value{GDBN} in @sc{gnu}/Linux distributions as well.
+The version number is the same as the one announced when you start
+@value{GDBN}.
@kindex show copying
@item show copying
@kindex show warranty
@item show warranty
-Display the @sc{gnu} ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
+Display the @sc{gnu} ``NO WARRANTY'' statement, or a warranty,
+if your version of @value{GDBN} comes with one.
+
@end table
@node Running
@table @code
@kindex run
+@kindex r @r{(@code{run})}
@item run
@itemx r
Use the @code{run} command to start your program under @value{GDBN}.
@cindex arguments (to your program)
The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
-@code{run} command.
+@code{run} command.
They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard characters and
performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program. Your
@code{SHELL} environment variable (if it exists) specifies what shell
@code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
@code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
-@kindex set args
@table @code
+@kindex set args
@item set args
Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
@code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} executes your program
@kindex path
@item path @var{directory}
Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
-(the search path for executables), for both @value{GDBN} and your program.
+(the search path for executables) that will be passed to your program.
+The value of @code{PATH} used by @value{GDBN} does not change.
You may specify several directory names, separated by whitespace or by a
system-dependent separator character (@samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on
MS-DOS and MS-Windows). If @var{directory} is already in the path, it
@cindex i/o
@cindex terminal
By default, the program you run under @value{GDBN} does input and output to
-the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal
+the same terminal that @value{GDBN} uses. @value{GDBN} switches the terminal
to its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
running your program.
@item automatic notification of new threads
@item @samp{thread @var{threadno}}, a command to switch among threads
@item @samp{info threads}, a command to inquire about existing threads
-@item @samp{thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{args}},
+@item @samp{thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{args}},
a command to apply a command to a list of threads
@item thread-specific breakpoints
@end itemize
This thread is called the @dfn{current thread}. Debugging commands show
program information from the perspective of the current thread.
-@kindex New @var{systag}
+@cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message
@cindex thread identifier (system)
@c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
@c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
@c program?
@c (2) *Is* there necessarily a first thread always? Or do some
@c multithread systems permit starting a program with multiple
-@c threads ab initio?
+@c threads ab initio?
@cindex thread number
@cindex thread identifier (GDB)
An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
indicates the current thread.
-For example,
+For example,
@end table
@c end table here to get a little more width for example
number---a small integer assigned in thread-creation order---with each
thread in your program.
-@kindex New @var{systag}
-@cindex thread identifier (system)
+@cindex @code{New} @var{systag} message, on HP-UX
+@cindex thread identifier (system), on HP-UX
@c FIXME-implementors!! It would be more helpful if the [New...] message
@c included GDB's numeric thread handle, so you could just go to that
@c thread without first checking `info threads'.
@end example
@noindent
-when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread.
+when @value{GDBN} notices a new thread.
@table @code
@kindex info threads
An asterisk @samp{*} to the left of the @value{GDBN} thread number
indicates the current thread.
-For example,
+For example,
@end table
@c end table here to get a little more width for example
@example
(@value{GDBP}) info threads
- * 3 system thread 26607 worker (wptr=0x7b09c318 "@@") at quicksort.c:137
- 2 system thread 26606 0x7b0030d8 in __ksleep () from /usr/lib/libc.2
- 1 system thread 27905 0x7b003498 in _brk () from /usr/lib/libc.2
+ * 3 system thread 26607 worker (wptr=0x7b09c318 "@@") \@*
+ at quicksort.c:137
+ 2 system thread 26606 0x7b0030d8 in __ksleep () \@*
+ from /usr/lib/libc.2
+ 1 system thread 27905 0x7b003498 in _brk () \@*
+ from /usr/lib/libc.2
@end example
@table @code
@noindent
As with the @samp{[New @dots{}]} message, the form of the text after
@samp{Switching to} depends on your system's conventions for identifying
-threads.
+threads.
@kindex thread apply
@item thread apply [@var{threadno}] [@var{all}] @var{args}
more threads. Specify the numbers of the threads that you want affected
with the command argument @var{threadno}. @var{threadno} is the internal
@value{GDBN} thread number, as shown in the first field of the @samp{info
-threads} display. To apply a command to all threads, use
-@code{thread apply all} @var{args}.
+threads} display. To apply a command to all threads, use
+@code{thread apply all} @var{args}.
@end table
@cindex automatic thread selection
@table @code
@item parent
The original process is debugged after a fork. The child process runs
-unimpeded.
+unimpeded. This is the default.
@item child
The new process is debugged after a fork. The parent process runs
@end table
@item show follow-fork-mode
-Display the current debugger response to a fork or vfork call.
+Display the current debugger response to a @code{fork} or @code{vfork} call.
@end table
If you ask to debug a child process and a @code{vfork} is followed by an
@cindex catchpoints
@cindex breakpoint on events
A @dfn{catchpoint} is another special breakpoint that stops your program
-when a certain kind of event occurs, such as the throwing of a C++
+when a certain kind of event occurs, such as the throwing of a C@t{++}
exception or the loading of a library. As with watchpoints, you use a
different command to set a catchpoint (@pxref{Set Catchpoints, ,Setting
catchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a catchpoint like any
@dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has no effect on your program until you
enable it again.
+@cindex breakpoint ranges
+@cindex ranges of breakpoints
+Some @value{GDBN} commands accept a range of breakpoints on which to
+operate. A breakpoint range is either a single breakpoint number, like
+@samp{5}, or two such numbers, in increasing order, separated by a
+hyphen, like @samp{5-7}. When a breakpoint range is given to a command,
+all breakpoint in that range are operated on.
+
@menu
* Set Breaks:: Setting breakpoints
* Set Watchpoints:: Setting watchpoints
@node Set Breaks
@subsection Setting breakpoints
-@c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
+@c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
@c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
@c
@c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
@kindex break
-@kindex b
-@kindex $bpnum
+@kindex b @r{(@code{break})}
+@vindex $bpnum@r{, convenience variable}
@cindex latest breakpoint
Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
-@code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
-number of the breakpoints you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
+@code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
+number of the breakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
Vars,, Convenience variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
convenience variables.
@table @code
@item break @var{function}
-Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
+Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}.
When using source languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as
-C++, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
+C@t{++}, @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
@xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
@item break +@var{offset}
@itemx break -@var{offset}
Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
at which execution stopped in the currently selected @dfn{stack frame}.
-(@xref{Frames, , Frames}, for a description of stack frames.)
+(@xref{Frames, ,Frames}, for a description of stack frames.)
@item break @var{linenum}
Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
@item thbreak @var{args}
Set a hardware-assisted breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args}
are the same as for the @code{hbreak} command and the breakpoint is set in
-the same way. However, like the @code{tbreak} command,
+the same way. However, like the @code{tbreak} command,
the breakpoint is automatically deleted after the
first time your program stops there. Also, like the @code{hbreak}
-command, the breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware
-may not have this support. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
+command, the breakpoint requires hardware support and some target hardware
+may not have this support. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling breakpoints}.
See also @ref{Conditions, ,Break conditions}.
@kindex rbreak
@cindex regular expression
@item rbreak @var{regex}
-@c FIXME what kind of regexp?
Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
-@var{regex}. This command
-sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
-breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
-just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. You can
-delete them, disable them, or make them conditional the same way as any
-other breakpoint.
-
-When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
+@var{regex}. This command sets an unconditional breakpoint on all
+matches, printing a list of all breakpoints it set. Once these
+breakpoints are set, they are treated just like the breakpoints set with
+the @code{break} command. You can delete them, disable them, or make
+them conditional the same way as any other breakpoint.
+
+The syntax of the regular expression is the standard one used with tools
+like @file{grep}. Note that this is different from the syntax used by
+shells, so for instance @code{foo*} matches all functions that include
+an @code{fo} followed by zero or more @code{o}s. There is an implicit
+@code{.*} leading and trailing the regular expression you supply, so to
+match only functions that begin with @code{foo}, use @code{^foo}.
+
+When debugging C@t{++} programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
classes.
Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
that are not enabled.
@item Address
-Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
+Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address.
@item What
Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
line number.
number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
-listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
+listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}).
@noindent
@code{info break} displays a count of the number of times the breakpoint
@cindex negative breakpoint numbers
@cindex internal @value{GDBN} breakpoints
-@value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
-purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
-These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
-@code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
-
+@value{GDBN} itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for
+special purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C
+programs). These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers,
+starting with @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
You can see these breakpoints with the @value{GDBN} maintenance command
-@samp{maint info breakpoints}.
-
-@table @code
-@kindex maint info breakpoints
-@item maint info breakpoints
-Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
-breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
-internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
-breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
-is shown:
-
-@table @code
-@item breakpoint
-Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
-
-@item watchpoint
-Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
-
-@item longjmp
-Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
-@code{longjmp} calls.
-
-@item longjmp resume
-Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
-
-@item until
-Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
-
-@item finish
-Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
-
-@item shlib events
-Shared library events.
-
-@end table
-
-@end table
+@samp{maint info breakpoints} (@pxref{maint info breakpoints}).
@node Set Watchpoints
this may happen.
Depending on your system, watchpoints may be implemented in software or
-hardware. GDB does software watchpointing by single-stepping your
+hardware. @value{GDBN} does software watchpointing by single-stepping your
program and testing the variable's value each time, which is hundreds of
times slower than normal execution. (But this may still be worth it, to
catch errors where you have no clue what part of your program is the
culprit.)
On some systems, such as HP-UX, Linux and some other x86-based targets,
-GDB includes support for
+@value{GDBN} includes support for
hardware watchpoints, which do not slow down the running of your
program.
@kindex awatch
@item awatch @var{expr}
-Set a watchpoint that will break when @var{args} is either read or written into
+Set a watchpoint that will break when @var{expr} is either read or written into
by the program.
@kindex info watchpoints
Delete or disable unused watchpoint commands before setting new ones.
If you call a function interactively using @code{print} or @code{call},
-any watchpoints you have set will be inactive until GDB reaches another
+any watchpoints you have set will be inactive until @value{GDBN} reaches another
kind of breakpoint or the call completes.
@value{GDBN} automatically deletes watchpoints that watch local
@cindex event handling
You can use @dfn{catchpoints} to cause the debugger to stop for certain
-kinds of program events, such as C++ exceptions or the loading of a
+kinds of program events, such as C@t{++} exceptions or the loading of a
shared library. Use the @code{catch} command to set a catchpoint.
@table @code
@table @code
@item throw
@kindex catch throw
-The throwing of a C++ exception.
+The throwing of a C@t{++} exception.
@item catch
@kindex catch catch
-The catching of a C++ exception.
+The catching of a C@t{++} exception.
@item exec
@kindex catch exec
Use the @code{info break} command to list the current catchpoints.
-There are currently some limitations to C++ exception handling
+There are currently some limitations to C@t{++} exception handling
(@code{catch throw} and @code{catch catch}) in @value{GDBN}:
@itemize @bullet
out where the exception was raised.
To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
-knowledge of the implementation. In the case of @sc{gnu} C++, exceptions are
+knowledge of the implementation. In the case of @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, exceptions are
raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
which has the following ANSI C interface:
@cindex delete breakpoints
@kindex delete
-@kindex d
-@item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
-Delete the breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints of the numbers
-specified as arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all
+@kindex d @r{(@code{delete})}
+@item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
+Delete the breakpoints, watchpoints, or catchpoints of the breakpoint
+ranges specified as arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all
breakpoints (@value{GDBN} asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set
confirm off}). You can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
@end table
@table @code
@kindex disable breakpoints
@kindex disable
-@kindex dis
-@item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
+@kindex dis @r{(@code{disable})}
+@item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
@kindex enable breakpoints
@kindex enable
-@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
+@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{range}@dots{}@r{]}
Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
become effective once again in stopping your program.
-@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
+@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{range}@dots{}
Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. @value{GDBN} disables any
of these breakpoints immediately after stopping your program.
-@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
+@item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{range}@dots{}
Enable the specified breakpoints to work once, then die. @value{GDBN}
deletes any of these breakpoints as soon as your program stops there.
@end table
@cindex breakpoint conditions
@c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
-@c in particular for a watchpoint?
+@c in particular for a watchpoint?
The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
@cindex overloading
@cindex symbol overloading
-Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
+Some programming languages (notably C@t{++}) permit a single function name
to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
@samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell @value{GDBN} where you want
@c
Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
any other process is running that program. In this situation,
-attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes
+attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes
@value{GDBN} to print an error message:
@example
Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
@item
-Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new
+Suspend @value{GDBN}, and copy the file containing your program to a new
name. Resume @value{GDBN} and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify
-that @value{GDBN} should run your program under that name.
+that @value{GDBN} should run your program under that name.
Then start your program again.
@item
@table @code
@kindex continue
-@kindex c
-@kindex fg
+@kindex c @r{(@code{continue})}
+@kindex fg @r{(resume foreground execution)}
@item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
@itemx c @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
@itemx fg @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
@table @code
@kindex step
-@kindex s
+@kindex s @r{(@code{step})}
@item step
Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
line, then stop it and return control to @value{GDBN}. This command is
below.
@end quotation
-The @code{step} command only stops at the first instruction of a
-source line. This prevents the multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
-switch statements, for loops, etc. @code{step} continues to stop if a
-function that has debugging information is called within the line.
-In other words, @code{step} @emph{steps inside} any functions called
-within the line.
+The @code{step} command only stops at the first instruction of a source
+line. This prevents the multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
+@code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc. @code{step} continues
+to stop if a function that has debugging information is called within
+the line. In other words, @code{step} @emph{steps inside} any functions
+called within the line.
Also, the @code{step} command only enters a function if there is line
number information for the function. Otherwise it acts like the
-@code{next} command. This avoids problems when using @code{cc -gl}
+@code{next} command. This avoids problems when using @code{cc -gl}
on MIPS machines. Previously, @code{step} entered subroutines if there
-was any debugging information about the routine.
+was any debugging information about the routine.
@item step @var{count}
Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
@var{count} steps, stepping stops right away.
@kindex next
-@kindex n
+@kindex n @r{(@code{next})}
@item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
This is similar to @code{step}, but function calls that appear within
The @code{next} command only stops at the first instruction of a
source line. This prevents multiple stops that could otherwise occur in
-switch statements, for loops, etc.
+@code{switch} statements, @code{for} loops, etc.
+
+@kindex set step-mode
+@item set step-mode
+@cindex functions without line info, and stepping
+@cindex stepping into functions with no line info
+@itemx set step-mode on
+The @code{set step-mode on} command causes the @code{step} command to
+stop at the first instruction of a function which contains no debug line
+information rather than stepping over it.
+
+This is useful in cases where you may be interested in inspecting the
+machine instructions of a function which has no symbolic info and do not
+want @value{GDBN} to automatically skip over this function.
+
+@item set step-mode off
+Causes the @code{step} command to step over any functions which contains no
+debug information. This is the default.
@kindex finish
@item finish
,Returning from a function}).
@kindex until
-@kindex u
+@kindex u @r{(@code{until})}
@item until
@itemx u
Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
@kindex stepi
-@kindex si
+@kindex si @r{(@code{stepi})}
@item stepi
+@itemx stepi @var{arg}
@itemx si
Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
@need 750
@kindex nexti
-@kindex ni
+@kindex ni @r{(@code{nexti})}
@item nexti
+@itemx nexti @var{arg}
@itemx ni
Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
proceed until the function returns.
signal.
@cindex handling signals
-Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
-(so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
+Normally, @value{GDBN} is set up to let the non-erroneous signals like
+@code{SIGALRM} be silently passed to your program
+(so as not to interfere with their role in the program's functioning)
but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
@table @code
@kindex info signals
@item info signals
+@itemx info handle
Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how @value{GDBN} has been told to
handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
the defined types of signals.
@kindex handle
@item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
-Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can
-be the number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
-beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
+Change the way @value{GDBN} handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal}
+can be the number of a signal or its name (with or without the
+@samp{SIG} at the beginning); a list of signal numbers of the form
+@samp{@var{low}-@var{high}}; or the word @samp{all}, meaning all the
+known signals. The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
@end table
@c @group
implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
@item pass
+@itemx noignore
@value{GDBN} should allow your program to see this signal; your program
can handle the signal, or else it may terminate if the signal is fatal
-and not handled.
+and not handled. @code{pass} and @code{noignore} are synonyms.
@item nopass
+@itemx ignore
@value{GDBN} should not allow your program to see this signal.
+@code{nopass} and @code{ignore} are synonyms.
@end table
@c @end group
command with @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether your
program sees that signal when you continue.
+The default is set to @code{nostop}, @code{noprint}, @code{pass} for
+non-erroneous signals such as @code{SIGALRM}, @code{SIGWINCH} and
+@code{SIGCHLD}, and to @code{stop}, @code{print}, @code{pass} for the
+erroneous signals.
+
You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
-program a signal}.
+program a signal}.
@node Thread Stops
@section Stopping and starting multi-thread programs
breakpoint condition, like this:
@smallexample
-(gdb) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
+(@value{GDBP}) break frik.c:13 thread 28 if bartab > lim
@end smallexample
@end table
@cindex threads, continuing
Conversely, whenever you restart the program, @emph{all} threads start
executing. @emph{This is true even when single-stepping} with commands
-like @code{step} or @code{next}.
+like @code{step} or @code{next}.
In particular, @value{GDBN} cannot single-step all threads in lockstep.
Since thread scheduling is up to your debugging target's operating
function call, and they are completely free to run when you use commands
like @samp{continue}, @samp{until}, or @samp{finish}. However, unless another
thread hits a breakpoint during its timeslice, they will never steal the
-GDB prompt away from the thread that you are debugging.
+@value{GDBN} prompt away from the thread that you are debugging.
@item show scheduler-locking
Display the current scheduler locking mode.
stopped and how it got there.
@cindex call stack
-Each time your program performs a function call, information about the call
-is generated.
-That information includes the location of the call in your program,
-the arguments of the call,
+Each time your program performs a function call, information about the call
+is generated.
+That information includes the location of the call in your program,
+the arguments of the call,
and the local variables of the function being called.
-The information is saved in a block of data called a @dfn{stack frame}.
+The information is saved in a block of data called a @dfn{stack frame}.
The stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
stack}.
interested in. @xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
When your program stops, @value{GDBN} automatically selects the
-currently executing frame and describes it briefly, similar to the
+currently executing frame and describes it briefly, similar to the
@code{frame} command (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}).
@menu
they are assigned by @value{GDBN} to give you a way of designating stack
frames in @value{GDBN} commands.
-@c below produces an acceptable overful hbox. --mew 13aug1993
+@c The -fomit-frame-pointer below perennially causes hbox overflow
+@c underflow problems.
@cindex frameless execution
Some compilers provide a way to compile functions so that they operate
-without stack frames. (For example, the @code{@value{GCC}} option
-@samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} generates functions without a frame.)
+without stack frames. (For example, the @value{GCC} option
+@example
+@samp{-fomit-frame-pointer}
+@end example
+generates functions without a frame.)
This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
the frame setup time. @value{GDBN} has limited facilities for dealing
with these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation
@table @code
@kindex frame@r{, command}
+@cindex current stack frame
@item frame @var{args}
-The @code{frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame to another,
+The @code{frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame to another,
and to print the stack frame you select. @var{args} may be either the
-address of the frame or the stack frame number. Without an argument,
-@code{frame} prints the current stack frame.
+address of the frame or the stack frame number. Without an argument,
+@code{frame} prints the current stack frame.
@kindex select-frame
+@cindex selecting frame silently
@item select-frame
The @code{select-frame} command allows you to move from one stack frame
to another without printing the frame. This is the silent version of
@table @code
@kindex backtrace
-@kindex bt
+@kindex bt @r{(@code{backtrace})}
@item backtrace
@itemx bt
Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
@kindex where
@kindex info stack
-@kindex info s
+@kindex info s @r{(@code{info stack})}
The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
@smallexample
@group
-#0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
+#0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
at builtin.c:993
#1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
#2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
@table @code
@kindex frame@r{, selecting}
-@kindex f
+@kindex f @r{(@code{frame})}
@item frame @var{n}
@itemx f @var{n}
Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
@kindex down
-@kindex do
+@kindex do @r{(@code{down})}
@item down @var{n}
Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
-frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
+frame. The second line shows the text of that source line.
@need 1000
For example:
@xref{Selection, ,Selecting a frame}.
@kindex info frame
-@kindex info f
+@kindex info f @r{(@code{info frame})}
@item info frame
@itemx info f
This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
including:
@itemize @bullet
-@item
-the address of the frame
+@item
+the address of the frame
@item
the address of the next frame down (called by this frame)
@item
@section Printing source lines
@kindex list
-@kindex l
+@kindex l @r{(@code{list})}
To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
-(abbreviated @code{l}). By default, ten lines are printed.
+(abbreviated @code{l}). By default, ten lines are printed.
There are several ways to specify what part of the file you want to print.
Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
@itemx search @var{regexp}
The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
-@var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use the
+@var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use the
synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
@code{fo}.
@kindex cdir
@kindex cwd
-@kindex $cdir
-@kindex $cwd
+@vindex $cdir@r{, convenience variable}
+@vindex $cwdr@r{, convenience variable}
@cindex compilation directory
@cindex current directory
@cindex working directory
addresses (and vice versa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
a range of addresses as machine instructions. When run under @sc{gnu} Emacs
mode, the @code{info line} command causes the arrow to point to the
-line specified. Also, @code{info line} prints addresses in symbolic form as
+line specified. Also, @code{info line} prints addresses in symbolic form as
well as hex.
@table @code
@c FIXME: I think this example should also show the addresses in
@c symbolic form, as they usually would be displayed.
@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changecom
+(@value{GDBP}) info line m4_changequote
Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
@end smallexample
@end smallexample
@cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
-@kindex x@r{, and }@code{info line}
+@kindex x@r{(examine), and} info line
After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
* Convenience Vars:: Convenience variables
* Registers:: Registers
* Floating Point Hardware:: Floating point hardware
+* Memory Region Attributes:: Memory region attributes
@end menu
@node Expressions
@value{GDBN} supports array constants in expressions input by
the user. The syntax is @{@var{element}, @var{element}@dots{}@}. For example,
-you can use the command @code{print @{1, 2, 3@}} to build up an array in
+you can use the command @code{print @{1, 2, 3@}} to build up an array in
memory that is @code{malloc}ed in the target program.
Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
global (or file-static)
@end itemize
-@noindent or
+@noindent or
@itemize @bullet
@item
visible according to the scope rules of the
programming language from the point of execution in that frame
-@end itemize
+@end itemize
@noindent This means that in the function
@cindex colon-colon, context for variables/functions
@iftex
@c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
-@kindex ::
+@cindex @code{::}, context for variables/functions
@end iftex
@example
@var{file}::@var{variable}
(@value{GDBP}) p 'f2.c'::x
@end example
-@cindex C++ scope resolution
+@cindex C@t{++} scope resolution
This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
-use of the same notation in C++. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C++
+use of the same notation in C@t{++}. @value{GDBN} also supports use of the C@t{++}
scope resolution operator in @value{GDBN} expressions.
@c FIXME: Um, so what happens in one of those rare cases where it's in
@c conflict?? --mew
To solve such problems, either recompile without optimizations, or use a
different debug info format, if the compiler supports several such
-formats. For example, @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C/C++ compiler usually
+formats. For example, @value{NGCC}, the @sc{gnu} C/C@t{++} compiler usually
supports the @samp{-gstabs} option. @samp{-gstabs} produces debug info
in a format that is superior to formats such as COFF. You may be able
-to use DWARF-2 (@samp{-gdwarf-2}), which is also an effective form for
+to use DWARF2 (@samp{-gdwarf-2}), which is also an effective form for
debug info. See @ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your
Program or @sc{gnu} CC, gcc.info, Using @sc{gnu} CC}, for more
information.
@section Artificial arrays
@cindex artificial array
-@kindex @@
+@kindex @@@r{, referencing memory as an array}
It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
@end example
As a convenience, if you leave the array length out (as in
-@samp{(@var{type}[])@var{value}}) gdb calculates the size to fill
+@samp{(@var{type}[])@var{value}}) @value{GDBN} calculates the size to fill
the value (as @samp{sizeof(@var{value})/sizeof(@var{type})}:
@example
(@value{GDBP}) p/x (short[])0x12345678
@item a
@cindex unknown address, locating
+@cindex locate address
Print as an address, both absolute in hexadecimal and as an offset from
the nearest preceding symbol. You can use this format used to discover
where (in what function) an unknown address is located:
$3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>
@end example
+@noindent
+The command @code{info symbol 0x54320} yields similar results.
+@xref{Symbols, info symbol}.
+
@item c
Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
@cindex examining memory
@table @code
-@kindex x
+@kindex x @r{(examine memory)}
@item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
@itemx x @var{addr}
@itemx x
@item set print max-symbolic-offset @var{max-offset}
Tell @value{GDBN} to only display the symbolic form of an address if the
offset between the closest earlier symbol and the address is less than
-@var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which tells @value{GDBN}
+@var{max-offset}. The default is 0, which tells @value{GDBN}
to always print the symbolic form of an address if any symbol precedes it.
@kindex show print max-symbolic-offset
@kindex set print pretty
@item set print pretty on
-Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member
+Cause @value{GDBN} to print structures in an indented format with one member
per line, like this:
@smallexample
@kindex set print union
@item set print union on
-Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This
+Tell @value{GDBN} to print unions which are contained in structures. This
is the default setting.
@item set print union off
@smallexample
typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
-typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
+typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
Bug_forms;
struct thing @{
@need 1000
@noindent
-These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
+These settings are of interest when debugging C@t{++} programs:
@table @code
@cindex demangling
@kindex set print demangle
@item set print demangle
@itemx set print demangle on
-Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the encoded
+Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than in the encoded
(``mangled'') form passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe
linkage. The default is on.
@kindex show print demangle
@item show print demangle
-Show whether C++ names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
+Show whether C@t{++} names are printed in mangled or demangled form.
@kindex set print asm-demangle
@item set print asm-demangle
@itemx set print asm-demangle on
-Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
+Print C@t{++} names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
The default is off.
@kindex show print asm-demangle
@item show print asm-demangle
-Show whether C++ names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
+Show whether C@t{++} names in assembly listings are printed in mangled
or demangled form.
@kindex set demangle-style
-@cindex C++ symbol decoding style
-@cindex symbol decoding style, C++
+@cindex C@t{++} symbol decoding style
+@cindex symbol decoding style, C@t{++}
@item set demangle-style @var{style}
Choose among several encoding schemes used by different compilers to
-represent C++ names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
+represent C@t{++} names. The choices for @var{style} are currently:
@table @code
@item auto
Allow @value{GDBN} to choose a decoding style by inspecting your program.
@item gnu
-Decode based on the @sc{gnu} C++ compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
+Decode based on the @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler (@code{g++}) encoding algorithm.
This is the default.
@item hp
-Decode based on the HP ANSI C++ (@code{aCC}) encoding algorithm.
+Decode based on the HP ANSI C@t{++} (@code{aCC}) encoding algorithm.
@item lucid
-Decode based on the Lucid C++ compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
+Decode based on the Lucid C@t{++} compiler (@code{lcc}) encoding algorithm.
@item arm
-Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C++ Annotated Reference Manual}.
+Decode using the algorithm in the @cite{C@t{++} Annotated Reference Manual}.
@strong{Warning:} this setting alone is not sufficient to allow
debugging @code{cfront}-generated executables. @value{GDBN} would
require further enhancement to permit that.
@kindex show demangle-style
@item show demangle-style
-Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C++ symbols.
+Display the encoding style currently in use for decoding C@t{++} symbols.
@kindex set print object
@item set print object
@kindex set print static-members
@item set print static-members
@itemx set print static-members on
-Print static members when displaying a C++ object. The default is on.
+Print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object. The default is on.
@item set print static-members off
-Do not print static members when displaying a C++ object.
+Do not print static members when displaying a C@t{++} object.
@kindex show print static-members
@item show print static-members
-Show whether C++ static members are printed, or not.
+Show whether C@t{++} static members are printed, or not.
@c These don't work with HP ANSI C++ yet.
@kindex set print vtbl
@item set print vtbl
@itemx set print vtbl on
-Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
+Pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables. The default is off.
(The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
-ANSI C++ compiler (@code{aCC}).)
+ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
@item set print vtbl off
-Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
+Do not pretty print C@t{++} virtual function tables.
@kindex show print vtbl
@item show print vtbl
-Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
+Show whether C@t{++} virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
@end table
@node Value History
@section Value history
@cindex value history
-Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN}
-@dfn{value history}. This allows you to refer to them in other expressions.
-Values are kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded
-(for example with the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands).
-When the symbol table changes, the value history is discarded,
-since the values may contain pointers back to the types defined in the
+Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in the @value{GDBN}
+@dfn{value history}. This allows you to refer to them in other expressions.
+Values are kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded
+(for example with the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands).
+When the symbol table changes, the value history is discarded,
+since the values may contain pointers back to the types defined in the
symbol table.
@cindex @code{$}
values likely to be useful.
@table @code
-@kindex $_
+@vindex $_@r{, convenience variable}
@item $_
The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining memory}). Other
except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
to the type of @code{$__}.
-@kindex $__
+@vindex $__@r{, convenience variable}
@item $__
The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
to match the format in which the data was printed.
@item $_exitcode
-@kindex $_exitcode
+@vindex $_exitcode@r{, convenience variable}
The variable @code{$_exitcode} is automatically set to the exit code when
the program being debugged terminates.
@end table
@item info registers @var{regname} @dots{}
Print the @dfn{relativized} value of each specified register @var{regname}.
-As discussed in detail below, register values are normally relative to
-the selected stack frame. @var{regname} may be any register name valid on
+As discussed in detail below, register values are normally relative to
+the selected stack frame. @var{regname} may be any register name valid on
the machine you are using, with or without the initial @samp{$}.
@end table
sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
-cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format
+cases, @value{GDBN} normally works with the virtual format only (the format
that makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
prints the data in both formats.
the ARM and x86 machines.
@end table
-@node Languages
-@chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
-@cindex languages
+@node Memory Region Attributes
+@section Memory Region Attributes
+@cindex memory region attributes
-Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
-rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
-dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
-Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
-represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C appear as
-@samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
+@dfn{Memory region attributes} allow you to describe special handling
+required by regions of your target's memory. @value{GDBN} uses attributes
+to determine whether to allow certain types of memory accesses; whether to
+use specific width accesses; and whether to cache target memory.
-@cindex working language
-Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
-allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
-native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
-consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
-language you use to build expressions is called the @dfn{working
-language}.
+Defined memory regions can be individually enabled and disabled. When a
+memory region is disabled, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when
+accessing memory in that region. Similarly, if no memory regions have
+been defined, @value{GDBN} uses the default attributes when accessing
+all memory.
-@menu
-* Setting:: Switching between source languages
-* Show:: Displaying the language
-* Checks:: Type and range checks
-* Support:: Supported languages
-@end menu
+When a memory region is defined, it is given a number to identify it;
+to enable, disable, or remove a memory region, you specify that number.
-@node Setting
-@section Switching between source languages
+@table @code
+@kindex mem
+@item mem @var{address1} @var{address1} @var{attributes}@dots{}
+Define memory region bounded by @var{address1} and @var{address2}
+with attributes @var{attributes}@dots{}.
-There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
-set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
-@code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
-defaults to setting the language automatically. The working language is
-used to determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values
-are printed, etc.
+@kindex delete mem
+@item delete mem @var{nums}@dots{}
+Remove memory region numbers @var{nums}.
-In addition to the working language, every source file that
-@value{GDBN} knows about has its own working language. For some object
-file formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular
-source file is in. However, most of the time @value{GDBN} infers the
-language from the name of the file. The language of a source file
-controls whether C++ names are demangled---this way @code{backtrace} can
-show each frame appropriately for its own language. There is no way to
-set the language of a source file from within @value{GDBN}, but you can
-set the language associated with a filename extension. @xref{Show, ,
-Displaying the language}.
+@kindex disable mem
+@item disable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
+Disable memory region numbers @var{nums}.
+A disabled memory region is not forgotten.
+It may be enabled again later.
-This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such
-as @code{cfront} or @code{f2c}, that generates C but is written in
-another language. In that case, make the
-program use @code{#line} directives in its C output; that way
-@value{GDBN} will know the correct language of the source code of the original
-program, and will display that source code, not the generated C code.
+@kindex enable mem
+@item enable mem @var{nums}@dots{}
+Enable memory region numbers @var{nums}.
-@menu
-* Filenames:: Filename extensions and languages.
-* Manually:: Setting the working language manually
-* Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
-@end menu
+@kindex info mem
+@item info mem
+Print a table of all defined memory regions, with the following columns
+for each region.
-@node Filenames
-@subsection List of filename extensions and languages
+@table @emph
+@item Memory Region Number
+@item Enabled or Disabled.
+Enabled memory regions are marked with @samp{y}.
+Disabled memory regions are marked with @samp{n}.
-If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then
-@value{GDBN} infers that its language is the one indicated.
+@item Lo Address
+The address defining the inclusive lower bound of the memory region.
-@table @file
+@item Hi Address
+The address defining the exclusive upper bound of the memory region.
-@item .c
-C source file
+@item Attributes
+The list of attributes set for this memory region.
+@end table
+@end table
-@item .C
-@itemx .cc
-@itemx .cp
-@itemx .cpp
-@itemx .cxx
-@itemx .c++
-C++ source file
-@item .f
-@itemx .F
-Fortran source file
+@subsection Attributes
-@item .ch
-@itemx .c186
-@itemx .c286
-CHILL source file.
+@subsubsection Memory Access Mode
+The access mode attributes set whether @value{GDBN} may make read or
+write accesses to a memory region.
-@item .mod
-Modula-2 source file
+While these attributes prevent @value{GDBN} from performing invalid
+memory accesses, they do nothing to prevent the target system, I/O DMA,
+etc. from accessing memory.
-@item .s
-@itemx .S
-Assembler source file. This actually behaves almost like C, but
-@value{GDBN} does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
+@table @code
+@item ro
+Memory is read only.
+@item wo
+Memory is write only.
+@item rw
+Memory is read/write (default).
@end table
-In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
-extension. @xref{Show, , Displaying the language}.
-
-@node Manually
-@subsection Setting the working language
+@subsubsection Memory Access Size
+The acccess size attributes tells @value{GDBN} to use specific sized
+accesses in the memory region. Often memory mapped device registers
+require specific sized accesses. If no access size attribute is
+specified, @value{GDBN} may use accesses of any size.
-If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
-expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
-your program.
+@table @code
+@item 8
+Use 8 bit memory accesses.
+@item 16
+Use 16 bit memory accesses.
+@item 32
+Use 32 bit memory accesses.
+@item 64
+Use 64 bit memory accesses.
+@end table
-@kindex set language
-If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
-command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
-a language, such as
-@code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
-For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
+@c @subsubsection Hardware/Software Breakpoints
+@c The hardware/software breakpoint attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
+@c will use hardware or software breakpoints for the internal breakpoints
+@c used by the step, next, finish, until, etc. commands.
+@c
+@c @table @code
+@c @item hwbreak
+@c Always use hardware breakpoints
+@c @item swbreak (default)
+@c @end table
+
+@subsubsection Data Cache
+The data cache attributes set whether @value{GDBN} will cache target
+memory. While this generally improves performance by reducing debug
+protocol overhead, it can lead to incorrect results because @value{GDBN}
+does not know about volatile variables or memory mapped device
+registers.
-Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
-language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
-to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
-source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
-languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
-source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
-command such as:
+@table @code
+@item cache
+Enable @value{GDBN} to cache target memory.
+@item nocache (default)
+Disable @value{GDBN} from caching target memory.
+@end table
-@example
-print a = b + c
-@end example
+@c @subsubsection Memory Write Verification
+@c The memory write verification attributes set whether @value{GDBN}
+@c will re-reads data after each write to verify the write was successful.
+@c
+@c @table @code
+@c @item verify
+@c @item noverify (default)
+@c @end table
+
+@node Tracepoints
+@chapter Tracepoints
+@c This chapter is based on the documentation written by Michael
+@c Snyder, David Taylor, Jim Blandy, and Elena Zannoni.
+
+@cindex tracepoints
+In some applications, it is not feasible for the debugger to interrupt
+the program's execution long enough for the developer to learn
+anything helpful about its behavior. If the program's correctness
+depends on its real-time behavior, delays introduced by a debugger
+might cause the program to change its behavior drastically, or perhaps
+fail, even when the code itself is correct. It is useful to be able
+to observe the program's behavior without interrupting it.
+
+Using @value{GDBN}'s @code{trace} and @code{collect} commands, you can
+specify locations in the program, called @dfn{tracepoints}, and
+arbitrary expressions to evaluate when those tracepoints are reached.
+Later, using the @code{tfind} command, you can examine the values
+those expressions had when the program hit the tracepoints. The
+expressions may also denote objects in memory---structures or arrays,
+for example---whose values @value{GDBN} should record; while visiting
+a particular tracepoint, you may inspect those objects as if they were
+in memory at that moment. However, because @value{GDBN} records these
+values without interacting with you, it can do so quickly and
+unobtrusively, hopefully not disturbing the program's behavior.
+
+The tracepoint facility is currently available only for remote
+targets. @xref{Targets}. In addition, your remote target must know how
+to collect trace data. This functionality is implemented in the remote
+stub; however, none of the stubs distributed with @value{GDBN} support
+tracepoints as of this writing.
+
+This chapter describes the tracepoint commands and features.
-@noindent
-might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
-@code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
-printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
-@code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
+@menu
+* Set Tracepoints::
+* Analyze Collected Data::
+* Tracepoint Variables::
+@end menu
-@node Automatically
-@subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
+@node Set Tracepoints
+@section Commands to Set Tracepoints
-To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use
-@samp{set language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN}
-then infers the working language. That is, when your program stops in a
-frame (usually by encountering a breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the
-working language to the language recorded for the function in that
-frame. If the language for a frame is unknown (that is, if the function
-or block corresponding to the frame was defined in a source file that
-does not have a recognized extension), the current working language is
-not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
+Before running such a @dfn{trace experiment}, an arbitrary number of
+tracepoints can be set. Like a breakpoint (@pxref{Set Breaks}), a
+tracepoint has a number assigned to it by @value{GDBN}. Like with
+breakpoints, tracepoint numbers are successive integers starting from
+one. Many of the commands associated with tracepoints take the
+tracepoint number as their argument, to identify which tracepoint to
+work on.
-This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
-entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
-written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
-a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
-case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
+For each tracepoint, you can specify, in advance, some arbitrary set
+of data that you want the target to collect in the trace buffer when
+it hits that tracepoint. The collected data can include registers,
+local variables, or global data. Later, you can use @value{GDBN}
+commands to examine the values these data had at the time the
+tracepoint was hit.
-@node Show
-@section Displaying the language
+This section describes commands to set tracepoints and associated
+conditions and actions.
-The following commands help you find out which language is the
-working language, and also what language source files were written in.
+@menu
+* Create and Delete Tracepoints::
+* Enable and Disable Tracepoints::
+* Tracepoint Passcounts::
+* Tracepoint Actions::
+* Listing Tracepoints::
+* Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment::
+@end menu
+
+@node Create and Delete Tracepoints
+@subsection Create and Delete Tracepoints
-@kindex show language
-@kindex info frame@r{, show the source language}
-@kindex info source@r{, show the source language}
@table @code
-@item show language
-Display the current working language. This is the
-language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
-build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
+@cindex set tracepoint
+@kindex trace
+@item trace
+The @code{trace} command is very similar to the @code{break} command.
+Its argument can be a source line, a function name, or an address in
+the target program. @xref{Set Breaks}. The @code{trace} command
+defines a tracepoint, which is a point in the target program where the
+debugger will briefly stop, collect some data, and then allow the
+program to continue. Setting a tracepoint or changing its commands
+doesn't take effect until the next @code{tstart} command; thus, you
+cannot change the tracepoint attributes once a trace experiment is
+running.
-@item info frame
-Display the source language for this frame. This language becomes the
-working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
-@xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}, to identify the other
-information listed here.
+Here are some examples of using the @code{trace} command:
-@item info source
-Display the source language of this source file.
-@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}, to identify the other
-information listed here.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo.c:121} // a source file and line number
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace +2} // 2 lines forward
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace my_function} // first source line of function
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *my_function} // EXACT start address of function
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace *0x2117c4} // an address
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+You can abbreviate @code{trace} as @code{tr}.
+
+@vindex $tpnum
+@cindex last tracepoint number
+@cindex recent tracepoint number
+@cindex tracepoint number
+The convenience variable @code{$tpnum} records the tracepoint number
+of the most recently set tracepoint.
+
+@kindex delete tracepoint
+@cindex tracepoint deletion
+@item delete tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
+Permanently delete one or more tracepoints. With no argument, the
+default is to delete all tracepoints.
+
+Examples:
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace 1 2 3} // remove three tracepoints
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{delete trace} // remove all tracepoints
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+You can abbreviate this command as @code{del tr}.
@end table
-In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
-not in the standard list. You can then set the extension associated
-with a language explicitly:
+@node Enable and Disable Tracepoints
+@subsection Enable and Disable Tracepoints
-@kindex set extension-language
-@kindex info extensions
@table @code
-@item set extension-language @var{.ext} @var{language}
-Set source files with extension @var{.ext} to be assumed to be in
-the source language @var{language}.
+@kindex disable tracepoint
+@item disable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
+Disable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints if no argument
+@var{num} is given. A disabled tracepoint will have no effect during
+the next trace experiment, but it is not forgotten. You can re-enable
+a disabled tracepoint using the @code{enable tracepoint} command.
-@item info extensions
-List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.
+@kindex enable tracepoint
+@item enable tracepoint @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
+Enable tracepoint @var{num}, or all tracepoints. The enabled
+tracepoints will become effective the next time a trace experiment is
+run.
@end table
-@node Checks
-@section Type and range checking
+@node Tracepoint Passcounts
+@subsection Tracepoint Passcounts
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
-checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
-section documents the intended facilities.
-@end quotation
-@c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
+@table @code
+@kindex passcount
+@cindex tracepoint pass count
+@item passcount @r{[}@var{n} @r{[}@var{num}@r{]]}
+Set the @dfn{passcount} of a tracepoint. The passcount is a way to
+automatically stop a trace experiment. If a tracepoint's passcount is
+@var{n}, then the trace experiment will be automatically stopped on
+the @var{n}'th time that tracepoint is hit. If the tracepoint number
+@var{num} is not specified, the @code{passcount} command sets the
+passcount of the most recently defined tracepoint. If no passcount is
+given, the trace experiment will run until stopped explicitly by the
+user.
-Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
-errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
-checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
-sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
-these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
-by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
-errors when your program is running.
+Examples:
-@value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
-Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program, it
-can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
-the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
-@value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
-your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
-for the default settings of supported languages.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 5 2} // Stop on the 5th execution of
+@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// tracepoint 2}
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{passcount 12} // Stop on the 12th execution of the
+@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// most recently defined tracepoint.}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 3}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace bar}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 2}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace baz}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{pass 1} // Stop tracing when foo has been
+@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// executed 3 times OR when bar has}
+@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// been executed 2 times}
+@exdent @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @code{// OR when baz has been executed 1 time.}
+@end smallexample
+@end table
-@menu
-* Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
-* Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
-@end menu
+@node Tracepoint Actions
+@subsection Tracepoint Action Lists
-@cindex type checking
-@cindex checks, type
-@node Type Checking
-@subsection An overview of type checking
+@table @code
+@kindex actions
+@cindex tracepoint actions
+@item actions @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
+This command will prompt for a list of actions to be taken when the
+tracepoint is hit. If the tracepoint number @var{num} is not
+specified, this command sets the actions for the one that was most
+recently defined (so that you can define a tracepoint and then say
+@code{actions} without bothering about its number). You specify the
+actions themselves on the following lines, one action at a time, and
+terminate the actions list with a line containing just @code{end}. So
+far, the only defined actions are @code{collect} and
+@code{while-stepping}.
-Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
-arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
-otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
-errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
+@cindex remove actions from a tracepoint
+To remove all actions from a tracepoint, type @samp{actions @var{num}}
+and follow it immediately with @samp{end}.
@smallexample
-1 + 2 @result{} 3
-@exdent but
-@error{} 1 + 2.3
-@end smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{collect @var{data}} // collect some data
-The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
-type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{while-stepping 5} // single-step 5 times, collect data
-For the expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the
-@value{GDBN} type checker to skip checking;
-to treat any mismatches as errors and abandon the expression;
-or to only issue warnings when type mismatches occur,
-but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
-these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
-also issues a warning.
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{end} // signals the end of actions.
+@end smallexample
-Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
-related to type that prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression.
-For instance, @value{GDBN} does not know how to add an @code{int} and
-a @code{struct foo}. These particular type errors have nothing to do
-with the language in use, and usually arise from expressions, such as
-the one described above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.
+In the following example, the action list begins with @code{collect}
+commands indicating the things to be collected when the tracepoint is
+hit. Then, in order to single-step and collect additional data
+following the tracepoint, a @code{while-stepping} command is used,
+followed by the list of things to be collected while stepping. The
+@code{while-stepping} command is terminated by its own separate
+@code{end} command. Lastly, the action list is terminated by an
+@code{end} command.
-Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
-instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
-operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
-represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
-operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
-details on specific languages.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace foo}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
+Enter actions for tracepoint 1, one per line:
+> collect bar,baz
+> collect $regs
+> while-stepping 12
+ > collect $fp, $sp
+ > end
+end
+@end smallexample
-@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
+@kindex collect @r{(tracepoints)}
+@item collect @var{expr1}, @var{expr2}, @dots{}
+Collect values of the given expressions when the tracepoint is hit.
+This command accepts a comma-separated list of any valid expressions.
+In addition to global, static, or local variables, the following
+special arguments are supported:
-@kindex set check@r{, type}
-@kindex set check type
-@kindex show check type
@table @code
-@item set check type auto
-Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
-@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
-each language.
-
-@item set check type on
-@itemx set check type off
-Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
-current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
-match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
-evaluating an expression while type checking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
-message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
+@item $regs
+collect all registers
-@item set check type warn
-Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
-evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
-be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
-numbers and structures.
+@item $args
+collect all function arguments
-@item show type
-Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN}
-is setting it automatically.
+@item $locals
+collect all local variables.
@end table
-@cindex range checking
-@cindex checks, range
-@node Range Checking
-@subsection An overview of range checking
-
-In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
-bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
-checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
-computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
-not exceed the bounds of the array.
+You can give several consecutive @code{collect} commands, each one
+with a single argument, or one @code{collect} command with several
+arguments separated by commas: the effect is the same.
-For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
-@value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
-always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
-warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
+The command @code{info scope} (@pxref{Symbols, info scope}) is
+particularly useful for figuring out what data to collect.
-A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
-array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
-of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
-error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
-result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
-the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
+@kindex while-stepping @r{(tracepoints)}
+@item while-stepping @var{n}
+Perform @var{n} single-step traces after the tracepoint, collecting
+new data at each step. The @code{while-stepping} command is
+followed by the list of what to collect while stepping (followed by
+its own @code{end} command):
-@example
-@var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
-@end example
+@smallexample
+> while-stepping 12
+ > collect $regs, myglobal
+ > end
+>
+@end smallexample
-This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
-specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
-Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
+@noindent
+You may abbreviate @code{while-stepping} as @code{ws} or
+@code{stepping}.
+@end table
-@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
+@node Listing Tracepoints
+@subsection Listing Tracepoints
-@kindex set check@r{, range}
-@kindex set check range
-@kindex show check range
@table @code
-@item set check range auto
-Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
-@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
-each language.
+@kindex info tracepoints
+@cindex information about tracepoints
+@item info tracepoints @r{[}@var{num}@r{]}
+Display information about the tracepoint @var{num}. If you don't specify
+a tracepoint number, displays information about all the tracepoints
+defined so far. For each tracepoint, the following information is
+shown:
-@item set check range on
-@itemx set check range off
-Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
-current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
-match the language default. If a range error occurs, then a message
-is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+its number
+@item
+whether it is enabled or disabled
+@item
+its address
+@item
+its passcount as given by the @code{passcount @var{n}} command
+@item
+its step count as given by the @code{while-stepping @var{n}} command
+@item
+where in the source files is the tracepoint set
+@item
+its action list as given by the @code{actions} command
+@end itemize
-@item set check range warn
-Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
-but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
-expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
-memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
-systems).
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{info trace}
+Num Enb Address PassC StepC What
+1 y 0x002117c4 0 0 <gdb_asm>
+2 y 0x0020dc64 0 0 in g_test at g_test.c:1375
+3 y 0x0020b1f4 0 0 in get_data at ../foo.c:41
+(@value{GDBP})
+@end smallexample
-@item show range
-Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
-being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
+@noindent
+This command can be abbreviated @code{info tp}.
@end table
-@node Support
-@section Supported languages
+@node Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment
+@subsection Starting and Stopping Trace Experiment
-@value{GDBN} supports C, C++, Fortran, Java, Chill, assembly, and Modula-2.
-@c This is false ...
-Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
-language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
-and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
-,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
-language.
+@table @code
+@kindex tstart
+@cindex start a new trace experiment
+@cindex collected data discarded
+@item tstart
+This command takes no arguments. It starts the trace experiment, and
+begins collecting data. This has the side effect of discarding all
+the data collected in the trace buffer during the previous trace
+experiment.
-The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
-supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
-tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
-@value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
-formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
-books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
-language reference or tutorial.
+@kindex tstop
+@cindex stop a running trace experiment
+@item tstop
+This command takes no arguments. It ends the trace experiment, and
+stops collecting data.
-@menu
-* C:: C and C++
-* Modula-2:: Modula-2
-* Chill:: Chill
-@end menu
+@strong{Note:} a trace experiment and data collection may stop
+automatically if any tracepoint's passcount is reached
+(@pxref{Tracepoint Passcounts}), or if the trace buffer becomes full.
-@node C
-@subsection C and C++
+@kindex tstatus
+@cindex status of trace data collection
+@cindex trace experiment, status of
+@item tstatus
+This command displays the status of the current trace data
+collection.
+@end table
-@cindex C and C++
-@cindex expressions in C or C++
+Here is an example of the commands we described so far:
-Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
-to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
-together.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace gdb_c_test}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
+Enter actions for tracepoint #1, one per line.
+> collect $regs,$locals,$args
+> while-stepping 11
+ > collect $regs
+ > end
+> end
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
+ [time passes @dots{}]
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstop}
+@end smallexample
-@cindex C++
-@kindex g++
-@cindex @sc{gnu} C++
-The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C++
-compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C++ code
-effectively, you must compile your C++ programs with a supported
-C++ compiler, such as @sc{gnu} @code{g++}, or the HP ANSI C++
-compiler (@code{aCC}).
-For best results when using @sc{gnu} C++, use the stabs debugging
-format. You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
-command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}. See
-@ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or @sc{gnu}
-CC, gcc.info, Using @sc{gnu} CC}, for more information.
+@node Analyze Collected Data
+@section Using the collected data
+
+After the tracepoint experiment ends, you use @value{GDBN} commands
+for examining the trace data. The basic idea is that each tracepoint
+collects a trace @dfn{snapshot} every time it is hit and another
+snapshot every time it single-steps. All these snapshots are
+consecutively numbered from zero and go into a buffer, and you can
+examine them later. The way you examine them is to @dfn{focus} on a
+specific trace snapshot. When the remote stub is focused on a trace
+snapshot, it will respond to all @value{GDBN} requests for memory and
+registers by reading from the buffer which belongs to that snapshot,
+rather than from @emph{real} memory or registers of the program being
+debugged. This means that @strong{all} @value{GDBN} commands
+(@code{print}, @code{info registers}, @code{backtrace}, etc.) will
+behave as if we were currently debugging the program state as it was
+when the tracepoint occurred. Any requests for data that are not in
+the buffer will fail.
@menu
-* C Operators:: C and C++ operators
-* C Constants:: C and C++ constants
-* C plus plus expressions:: C++ expressions
-* C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
-* C Checks:: C and C++ type and range checks
-* Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
-* Debugging C plus plus:: @value{GDBN} features for C++
+* tfind:: How to select a trace snapshot
+* tdump:: How to display all data for a snapshot
+* save-tracepoints:: How to save tracepoints for a future run
@end menu
-@node C Operators
-@subsubsection C and C++ operators
+@node tfind
+@subsection @code{tfind @var{n}}
+
+@kindex tfind
+@cindex select trace snapshot
+@cindex find trace snapshot
+The basic command for selecting a trace snapshot from the buffer is
+@code{tfind @var{n}}, which finds trace snapshot number @var{n},
+counting from zero. If no argument @var{n} is given, the next
+snapshot is selected.
+
+Here are the various forms of using the @code{tfind} command.
+
+@table @code
+@item tfind start
+Find the first snapshot in the buffer. This is a synonym for
+@code{tfind 0} (since 0 is the number of the first snapshot).
+
+@item tfind none
+Stop debugging trace snapshots, resume @emph{live} debugging.
+
+@item tfind end
+Same as @samp{tfind none}.
+
+@item tfind
+No argument means find the next trace snapshot.
+
+@item tfind -
+Find the previous trace snapshot before the current one. This permits
+retracing earlier steps.
+
+@item tfind tracepoint @var{num}
+Find the next snapshot associated with tracepoint @var{num}. Search
+proceeds forward from the last examined trace snapshot. If no
+argument @var{num} is given, it means find the next snapshot collected
+for the same tracepoint as the current snapshot.
+
+@item tfind pc @var{addr}
+Find the next snapshot associated with the value @var{addr} of the
+program counter. Search proceeds forward from the last examined trace
+snapshot. If no argument @var{addr} is given, it means find the next
+snapshot with the same value of PC as the current snapshot.
+
+@item tfind outside @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
+Find the next snapshot whose PC is outside the given range of
+addresses.
+
+@item tfind range @var{addr1}, @var{addr2}
+Find the next snapshot whose PC is between @var{addr1} and
+@var{addr2}. @c FIXME: Is the range inclusive or exclusive?
+
+@item tfind line @r{[}@var{file}:@r{]}@var{n}
+Find the next snapshot associated with the source line @var{n}. If
+the optional argument @var{file} is given, refer to line @var{n} in
+that source file. Search proceeds forward from the last examined
+trace snapshot. If no argument @var{n} is given, it means find the
+next line other than the one currently being examined; thus saying
+@code{tfind line} repeatedly can appear to have the same effect as
+stepping from line to line in a @emph{live} debugging session.
+@end table
+
+The default arguments for the @code{tfind} commands are specifically
+designed to make it easy to scan through the trace buffer. For
+instance, @code{tfind} with no argument selects the next trace
+snapshot, and @code{tfind -} with no argument selects the previous
+trace snapshot. So, by giving one @code{tfind} command, and then
+simply hitting @key{RET} repeatedly you can examine all the trace
+snapshots in order. Or, by saying @code{tfind -} and then hitting
+@key{RET} repeatedly you can examine the snapshots in reverse order.
+The @code{tfind line} command with no argument selects the snapshot
+for the next source line executed. The @code{tfind pc} command with
+no argument selects the next snapshot with the same program counter
+(PC) as the current frame. The @code{tfind tracepoint} command with
+no argument selects the next trace snapshot collected by the same
+tracepoint as the current one.
+
+In addition to letting you scan through the trace buffer manually,
+these commands make it easy to construct @value{GDBN} scripts that
+scan through the trace buffer and print out whatever collected data
+you are interested in. Thus, if we want to examine the PC, FP, and SP
+registers from each trace frame in the buffer, we can say this:
-@cindex C and C++ operators
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
+> printf "Frame %d, PC = %08X, SP = %08X, FP = %08X\n", \
+ $trace_frame, $pc, $sp, $fp
+> tfind
+> end
+
+Frame 0, PC = 0020DC64, SP = 0030BF3C, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 1, PC = 0020DC6C, SP = 0030BF38, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 2, PC = 0020DC70, SP = 0030BF34, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 3, PC = 0020DC74, SP = 0030BF30, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 4, PC = 0020DC78, SP = 0030BF2C, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 5, PC = 0020DC7C, SP = 0030BF28, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 6, PC = 0020DC80, SP = 0030BF24, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 7, PC = 0020DC84, SP = 0030BF20, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 8, PC = 0020DC88, SP = 0030BF1C, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 9, PC = 0020DC8E, SP = 0030BF18, FP = 0030BF44
+Frame 10, PC = 00203F6C, SP = 0030BE3C, FP = 0030BF14
+@end smallexample
-Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
-@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
-often defined on groups of types.
+Or, if we want to examine the variable @code{X} at each source line in
+the buffer:
-For the purposes of C and C++, the following definitions hold:
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{while ($trace_frame != -1)}
+> printf "Frame %d, X == %d\n", $trace_frame, X
+> tfind line
+> end
+
+Frame 0, X = 1
+Frame 7, X = 2
+Frame 13, X = 255
+@end smallexample
-@itemize @bullet
+@node tdump
+@subsection @code{tdump}
+@kindex tdump
+@cindex dump all data collected at tracepoint
+@cindex tracepoint data, display
-@item
-@emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
-specifiers; @code{char}; @code{enum}; and, for C++, @code{bool}.
+This command takes no arguments. It prints all the data collected at
+the current trace snapshot.
-@item
-@emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float}, @code{double}, and
-@code{long double} (if supported by the target platform).
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{trace 444}
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{actions}
+Enter actions for tracepoint #2, one per line:
+> collect $regs, $locals, $args, gdb_long_test
+> end
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tstart}
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind line 444}
+#0 gdb_test (p1=0x11, p2=0x22, p3=0x33, p4=0x44, p5=0x55, p6=0x66)
+at gdb_test.c:444
+444 printp( "%s: arguments = 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X 0x%X\n", )
+
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tdump}
+Data collected at tracepoint 2, trace frame 1:
+d0 0xc4aa0085 -995491707
+d1 0x18 24
+d2 0x80 128
+d3 0x33 51
+d4 0x71aea3d 119204413
+d5 0x22 34
+d6 0xe0 224
+d7 0x380035 3670069
+a0 0x19e24a 1696330
+a1 0x3000668 50333288
+a2 0x100 256
+a3 0x322000 3284992
+a4 0x3000698 50333336
+a5 0x1ad3cc 1758156
+fp 0x30bf3c 0x30bf3c
+sp 0x30bf34 0x30bf34
+ps 0x0 0
+pc 0x20b2c8 0x20b2c8
+fpcontrol 0x0 0
+fpstatus 0x0 0
+fpiaddr 0x0 0
+p = 0x20e5b4 "gdb-test"
+p1 = (void *) 0x11
+p2 = (void *) 0x22
+p3 = (void *) 0x33
+p4 = (void *) 0x44
+p5 = (void *) 0x55
+p6 = (void *) 0x66
+gdb_long_test = 17 '\021'
-@item
-@emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type} *)}.
+(@value{GDBP})
+@end smallexample
-@item
-@emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
+@node save-tracepoints
+@subsection @code{save-tracepoints @var{filename}}
+@kindex save-tracepoints
+@cindex save tracepoints for future sessions
-@end itemize
+This command saves all current tracepoint definitions together with
+their actions and passcounts, into a file @file{@var{filename}}
+suitable for use in a later debugging session. To read the saved
+tracepoint definitions, use the @code{source} command (@pxref{Command
+Files}).
-@noindent
-The following operators are supported. They are listed here
-in order of increasing precedence:
+@node Tracepoint Variables
+@section Convenience Variables for Tracepoints
+@cindex tracepoint variables
+@cindex convenience variables for tracepoints
@table @code
-@item ,
-The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
-are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
-expression being the last expression evaluated.
+@vindex $trace_frame
+@item (int) $trace_frame
+The current trace snapshot (a.k.a.@: @dfn{frame}) number, or -1 if no
+snapshot is selected.
-@item =
-Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
-assigned. Defined on scalar types.
+@vindex $tracepoint
+@item (int) $tracepoint
+The tracepoint for the current trace snapshot.
-@item @var{op}=
-Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
-and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
-@w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precedence.
-@var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
-@code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
+@vindex $trace_line
+@item (int) $trace_line
+The line number for the current trace snapshot.
-@item ?:
-The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
-of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
-integral type.
+@vindex $trace_file
+@item (char []) $trace_file
+The source file for the current trace snapshot.
-@item ||
-Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
+@vindex $trace_func
+@item (char []) $trace_func
+The name of the function containing @code{$tracepoint}.
+@end table
-@item &&
-Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
+Note: @code{$trace_file} is not suitable for use in @code{printf},
+use @code{output} instead.
-@item |
-Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
+Here's a simple example of using these convenience variables for
+stepping through all the trace snapshots and printing some of their
+data.
-@item ^
-Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{tfind start}
-@item &
-Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{while $trace_frame != -1}
+> output $trace_file
+> printf ", line %d (tracepoint #%d)\n", $trace_line, $tracepoint
+> tfind
+> end
+@end smallexample
-@item ==@r{, }!=
-Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
-expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
+@node Overlays
+@chapter Debugging Programs That Use Overlays
+@cindex overlays
-@item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
-Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
-Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
-and non-zero for true.
+If your program is too large to fit completely in your target system's
+memory, you can sometimes use @dfn{overlays} to work around this
+problem. @value{GDBN} provides some support for debugging programs that
+use overlays.
-@item <<@r{, }>>
-left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
+@menu
+* How Overlays Work:: A general explanation of overlays.
+* Overlay Commands:: Managing overlays in @value{GDBN}.
+* Automatic Overlay Debugging:: @value{GDBN} can find out which overlays are
+ mapped by asking the inferior.
+* Overlay Sample Program:: A sample program using overlays.
+@end menu
-@item @@
-The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
+@node How Overlays Work
+@section How Overlays Work
+@cindex mapped overlays
+@cindex unmapped overlays
+@cindex load address, overlay's
+@cindex mapped address
+@cindex overlay area
+
+Suppose you have a computer whose instruction address space is only 64
+kilobytes long, but which has much more memory which can be accessed by
+other means: special instructions, segment registers, or memory
+management hardware, for example. Suppose further that you want to
+adapt a program which is larger than 64 kilobytes to run on this system.
+
+One solution is to identify modules of your program which are relatively
+independent, and need not call each other directly; call these modules
+@dfn{overlays}. Separate the overlays from the main program, and place
+their machine code in the larger memory. Place your main program in
+instruction memory, but leave at least enough space there to hold the
+largest overlay as well.
+
+Now, to call a function located in an overlay, you must first copy that
+overlay's machine code from the large memory into the space set aside
+for it in the instruction memory, and then jump to its entry point
+there.
-@item +@r{, }-
-Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
-pointer types.
+@example
+@group
+ Data Instruction Larger
+Address Space Address Space Address Space
++-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+
+| | | | | |
++-----------+ +-----------+ +-----------+<-- overlay 1
+| program | | main | | | load address
+| variables | | program | | overlay 1 |
+| and heap | | | ,---| |
++-----------+ | | | | |
+| | +-----------+ | +-----------+
++-----------+ | | | | |
+ mapped --->+-----------+ / +-----------+<-- overlay 2
+ address | overlay | <-' | overlay 2 | load address
+ | area | <-----| |
+ | | <---. +-----------+
+ | | | | |
+ +-----------+ | | |
+ | | | +-----------+<-- overlay 3
+ +-----------+ `--| | load address
+ | overlay 3 |
+ | |
+ +-----------+
+ | |
+ +-----------+
+
+ To map an overlay, copy its code from the larger address space
+ to the instruction address space. Since the overlays shown here
+ all use the same mapped address, only one may be mapped at a time.
+@end group
+@end example
-@item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
-Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
-defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
-integral types.
+This diagram shows a system with separate data and instruction address
+spaces. For a system with a single address space for data and
+instructions, the diagram would be similar, except that the program
+variables and heap would share an address space with the main program
+and the overlay area.
-@item ++@r{, }--
-Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
-operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
-when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
-operation takes place.
+An overlay loaded into instruction memory and ready for use is called a
+@dfn{mapped} overlay; its @dfn{mapped address} is its address in the
+instruction memory. An overlay not present (or only partially present)
+in instruction memory is called @dfn{unmapped}; its @dfn{load address}
+is its address in the larger memory. The mapped address is also called
+the @dfn{virtual memory address}, or @dfn{VMA}; the load address is also
+called the @dfn{load memory address}, or @dfn{LMA}.
-@item *
-Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
-@code{++}.
+Unfortunately, overlays are not a completely transparent way to adapt a
+program to limited instruction memory. They introduce a new set of
+global constraints you must keep in mind as you design your program:
-@item &
-Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
+@itemize @bullet
-For debugging C++, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
-allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
-(or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
-where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
-stored.
+@item
+Before calling or returning to a function in an overlay, your program
+must make sure that overlay is actually mapped. Otherwise, the call or
+return will transfer control to the right address, but in the wrong
+overlay, and your program will probably crash.
-@item -
-Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
-precedence as @code{++}.
+@item
+If the process of mapping an overlay is expensive on your system, you
+will need to choose your overlays carefully to minimize their effect on
+your program's performance.
-@item !
-Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
-@code{++}.
+@item
+The executable file you load onto your system must contain each
+overlay's instructions, appearing at the overlay's load address, not its
+mapped address. However, each overlay's instructions must be relocated
+and its symbols defined as if the overlay were at its mapped address.
+You can use GNU linker scripts to specify different load and relocation
+addresses for pieces of your program; see @ref{Overlay Description,,,
+ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}.
-@item ~
-Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
-@code{++}.
+@item
+The procedure for loading executable files onto your system must be able
+to load their contents into the larger address space as well as the
+instruction and data spaces.
+@end itemize
-@item .@r{, }->
-Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
-@value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
-pointer based on the stored type information.
-Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
+The overlay system described above is rather simple, and could be
+improved in many ways:
-@item .*@r{, }->*
-Dereferences of pointers to members.
+@itemize @bullet
-@item []
-Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
-@code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
+@item
+If your system has suitable bank switch registers or memory management
+hardware, you could use those facilities to make an overlay's load area
+contents simply appear at their mapped address in instruction space.
+This would probably be faster than copying the overlay to its mapped
+area in the usual way.
-@item ()
-Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
+@item
+If your overlays are small enough, you could set aside more than one
+overlay area, and have more than one overlay mapped at a time.
-@item ::
-C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on @code{struct}, @code{union},
-and @code{class} types.
+@item
+You can use overlays to manage data, as well as instructions. In
+general, data overlays are even less transparent to your design than
+code overlays: whereas code overlays only require care when you call or
+return to functions, data overlays require care every time you access
+the data. Also, if you change the contents of a data overlay, you
+must copy its contents back out to its load address before you can copy a
+different data overlay into the same mapped area.
-@item ::
-Doubled colons also represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator
-(@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). Same precedence as @code{::},
-above.
-@end table
+@end itemize
-If an operator is redefined in the user code, @value{GDBN} usually
-attempts to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
-predefined meaning.
-@menu
-* C Constants::
-@end menu
+@node Overlay Commands
+@section Overlay Commands
+
+To use @value{GDBN}'s overlay support, each overlay in your program must
+correspond to a separate section of the executable file. The section's
+virtual memory address and load memory address must be the overlay's
+mapped and load addresses. Identifying overlays with sections allows
+@value{GDBN} to determine the appropriate address of a function or
+variable, depending on whether the overlay is mapped or not.
+
+@value{GDBN}'s overlay commands all start with the word @code{overlay};
+you can abbreviate this as @code{ov} or @code{ovly}. The commands are:
+
+@table @code
+@item overlay off
+@kindex overlay off
+Disable @value{GDBN}'s overlay support. When overlay support is
+disabled, @value{GDBN} assumes that all functions and variables are
+always present at their mapped addresses. By default, @value{GDBN}'s
+overlay support is disabled.
+
+@item overlay manual
+@kindex overlay manual
+@cindex manual overlay debugging
+Enable @dfn{manual} overlay debugging. In this mode, @value{GDBN}
+relies on you to tell it which overlays are mapped, and which are not,
+using the @code{overlay map-overlay} and @code{overlay unmap-overlay}
+commands described below.
+
+@item overlay map-overlay @var{overlay}
+@itemx overlay map @var{overlay}
+@kindex overlay map-overlay
+@cindex map an overlay
+Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is now mapped; @var{overlay} must
+be the name of the object file section containing the overlay. When an
+overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the overlay's
+functions and variables at their mapped addresses. @value{GDBN} assumes
+that any other overlays whose mapped ranges overlap that of
+@var{overlay} are now unmapped.
+
+@item overlay unmap-overlay @var{overlay}
+@itemx overlay unmap @var{overlay}
+@kindex overlay unmap-overlay
+@cindex unmap an overlay
+Tell @value{GDBN} that @var{overlay} is no longer mapped; @var{overlay}
+must be the name of the object file section containing the overlay.
+When an overlay is unmapped, @value{GDBN} assumes it can find the
+overlay's functions and variables at their load addresses.
+
+@item overlay auto
+@kindex overlay auto
+Enable @dfn{automatic} overlay debugging. In this mode, @value{GDBN}
+consults a data structure the overlay manager maintains in the inferior
+to see which overlays are mapped. For details, see @ref{Automatic
+Overlay Debugging}.
+
+@item overlay load-target
+@itemx overlay load
+@kindex overlay load-target
+@cindex reloading the overlay table
+Re-read the overlay table from the inferior. Normally, @value{GDBN}
+re-reads the table @value{GDBN} automatically each time the inferior
+stops, so this command should only be necessary if you have changed the
+overlay mapping yourself using @value{GDBN}. This command is only
+useful when using automatic overlay debugging.
+
+@item overlay list-overlays
+@itemx overlay list
+@cindex listing mapped overlays
+Display a list of the overlays currently mapped, along with their mapped
+addresses, load addresses, and sizes.
+
+@end table
+
+Normally, when @value{GDBN} prints a code address, it includes the name
+of the function the address falls in:
-@node C Constants
-@subsubsection C and C++ constants
+@example
+(gdb) print main
+$3 = @{int ()@} 0x11a0 <main>
+@end example
+@noindent
+When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} recognizes code in
+unmapped overlays, and prints the names of unmapped functions with
+asterisks around them. For example, if @code{foo} is a function in an
+unmapped overlay, @value{GDBN} prints it this way:
-@cindex C and C++ constants
+@example
+(gdb) overlay list
+No sections are mapped.
+(gdb) print foo
+$5 = @{int (int)@} 0x100000 <*foo*>
+@end example
+@noindent
+When @code{foo}'s overlay is mapped, @value{GDBN} prints the function's
+name normally:
-@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
-following ways:
+@example
+(gdb) overlay list
+Section .ov.foo.text, loaded at 0x100000 - 0x100034,
+ mapped at 0x1016 - 0x104a
+(gdb) print foo
+$6 = @{int (int)@} 0x1016 <foo>
+@end example
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
-specified by a leading @samp{0} (i.e. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
-a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
-@samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
-@code{long} value.
+When overlay debugging is enabled, @value{GDBN} can find the correct
+address for functions and variables in an overlay, whether or not the
+overlay is mapped. This allows most @value{GDBN} commands, like
+@code{break} and @code{disassemble}, to work normally, even on unmapped
+code. However, @value{GDBN}'s breakpoint support has some limitations:
+@itemize @bullet
@item
-Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
-point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
-exponent. An exponent is of the form:
-@samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
-sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
-A floating-point constant may also end with a letter @samp{f} or
-@samp{F}, specifying that the constant should be treated as being of
-the @code{float} (as opposed to the default @code{double}) type; or with
-a letter @samp{l} or @samp{L}, which specifies a @code{long double}
-constant.
-
+@cindex breakpoints in overlays
+@cindex overlays, setting breakpoints in
+You can set breakpoints in functions in unmapped overlays, as long as
+@value{GDBN} can write to the overlay at its load address.
@item
-Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
-integral equivalents.
+@value{GDBN} can not set hardware or simulator-based breakpoints in
+unmapped overlays. However, if you set a breakpoint at the end of your
+overlay manager (and tell @value{GDBN} which overlays are now mapped, if
+you are using manual overlay management), @value{GDBN} will re-set its
+breakpoints properly.
+@end itemize
-@item
-Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
-(@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
-(usually its @sc{ascii} value). Within quotes, the single character may
-be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
-the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
-of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
-@samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
-@samp{\n} for newline.
-@item
-String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
-by double quotes (@code{"}).
+@node Automatic Overlay Debugging
+@section Automatic Overlay Debugging
+@cindex automatic overlay debugging
-@item
-Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
-to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
+@value{GDBN} can automatically track which overlays are mapped and which
+are not, given some simple co-operation from the overlay manager in the
+inferior. If you enable automatic overlay debugging with the
+@code{overlay auto} command (@pxref{Overlay Commands}), @value{GDBN}
+looks in the inferior's memory for certain variables describing the
+current state of the overlays.
-@item
-Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
-and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
-integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
-and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
-@end itemize
+Here are the variables your overlay manager must define to support
+@value{GDBN}'s automatic overlay debugging:
-@menu
-* C plus plus expressions::
-* C Defaults::
-* C Checks::
+@table @asis
-* Debugging C::
-@end menu
+@item @code{_ovly_table}:
+This variable must be an array of the following structures:
-@node C plus plus expressions
-@subsubsection C++ expressions
-
-@cindex expressions in C++
-@value{GDBN} expression handling can interpret most C++ expressions.
-
-@cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
-@cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
-@cindex C++ and object formats
-@cindex object formats and C++
-@cindex a.out and C++
-@cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
-@cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
-@cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
-@cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
-@c FIXME!! GDB may eventually be able to debug C++ using DWARF; check
-@c periodically whether this has happened...
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C++ code if you use the
-proper compiler. Typically, C++ debugging depends on the use of
-additional debugging information in the symbol table, and thus requires
-special support. In particular, if your compiler generates a.out, MIPS
-@sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or @sc{elf} with stabs extensions to the
-symbol table, these facilities are all available. (With @sc{gnu} CC,
-you can use the @samp{-gstabs} option to request stabs debugging
-extensions explicitly.) Where the object code format is standard
-@sc{coff} or @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, on the other hand, most of the C++
-support in @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} work.
-@end quotation
+@example
+struct
+@{
+ /* The overlay's mapped address. */
+ unsigned long vma;
-@enumerate
+ /* The size of the overlay, in bytes. */
+ unsigned long size;
-@cindex member functions
-@item
-Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
+ /* The overlay's load address. */
+ unsigned long lma;
-@example
-count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
+ /* Non-zero if the overlay is currently mapped;
+ zero otherwise. */
+ unsigned long mapped;
+@}
@end example
-@kindex this
-@cindex namespace in C++
-@item
-While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
-expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
-that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
-pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
+@item @code{_novlys}:
+This variable must be a four-byte signed integer, holding the total
+number of elements in @code{_ovly_table}.
-@cindex call overloaded functions
-@cindex overloaded functions, calling
-@cindex type conversions in C++
-@item
-You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
-call to the right definition, with some restrictions. @value{GDBN} does not
-perform overload resolution involving user-defined type conversions,
-calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates that do not exist
-in the program. It also cannot handle ellipsis argument lists or
-default arguments.
+@end table
-It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
-promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions, conversions of
-class objects to base classes, and standard conversions such as those of
-functions or arrays to pointers; it requires an exact match on the
-number of function arguments.
+To decide whether a particular overlay is mapped or not, @value{GDBN}
+looks for an entry in @w{@code{_ovly_table}} whose @code{vma} and
+@code{lma} members equal the VMA and LMA of the overlay's section in the
+executable file. When @value{GDBN} finds a matching entry, it consults
+the entry's @code{mapped} member to determine whether the overlay is
+currently mapped.
-Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
-@code{set overload-resolution off}. @xref{Debugging C plus plus,
-,@value{GDBN} features for C++}.
-You must specify @code{set overload-resolution off} in order to use an
-explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
-@smallexample
-p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)
-@end smallexample
+@node Overlay Sample Program
+@section Overlay Sample Program
+@cindex overlay example program
-The @value{GDBN} command-completion facility can simplify this;
-see @ref{Completion, ,Command completion}.
+When linking a program which uses overlays, you must place the overlays
+at their load addresses, while relocating them to run at their mapped
+addresses. To do this, you must write a linker script (@pxref{Overlay
+Description,,, ld.info, Using ld: the GNU linker}). Unfortunately,
+since linker scripts are specific to a particular host system, target
+architecture, and target memory layout, this manual cannot provide
+portable sample code demonstrating @value{GDBN}'s overlay support.
-@cindex reference declarations
-@item
-@value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use
-them in expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
-dereferenced.
+However, the @value{GDBN} source distribution does contain an overlaid
+program, with linker scripts for a few systems, as part of its test
+suite. The program consists of the following files from
+@file{gdb/testsuite/gdb.base}:
-In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
-reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
-avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
-The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
-you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
+@table @file
+@item overlays.c
+The main program file.
+@item ovlymgr.c
+A simple overlay manager, used by @file{overlays.c}.
+@item foo.c
+@itemx bar.c
+@itemx baz.c
+@itemx grbx.c
+Overlay modules, loaded and used by @file{overlays.c}.
+@item d10v.ld
+@itemx m32r.ld
+Linker scripts for linking the test program on the @code{d10v-elf}
+and @code{m32r-elf} targets.
+@end table
+
+You can build the test program using the @code{d10v-elf} GCC
+cross-compiler like this:
-@item
-@value{GDBN} supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
-expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
-one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
-necessary, for example in an expression like
-@samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
-resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
-debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
-@end enumerate
+@example
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c overlays.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c ovlymgr.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c foo.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c bar.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c baz.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g -c grbx.c
+$ d10v-elf-gcc -g overlays.o ovlymgr.o foo.o bar.o \
+ baz.o grbx.o -Wl,-Td10v.ld -o overlays
+@end example
-In addition, when used with HP's C++ compiler, @value{GDBN} supports
-calling virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of
-objects, calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and
-invoking user-defined operators.
+The build process is identical for any other architecture, except that
+you must substitute the appropriate compiler and linker script for the
+target system for @code{d10v-elf-gcc} and @code{d10v.ld}.
-@node C Defaults
-@subsubsection C and C++ defaults
-@cindex C and C++ defaults
+@node Languages
+@chapter Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages
+@cindex languages
-If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
-both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
-C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
-selects the working language.
+Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
+rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
+dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
+Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
+represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C appear as
+@samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
-If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it
-recognizes source files whose names end with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or
-@file{.cc}, etc, and when @value{GDBN} enters code compiled from one of
-these files, it sets the working language to C or C++.
-@xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language},
-for further details.
+@cindex working language
+Language-specific information is built into @value{GDBN} for some languages,
+allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
+native language, and allowing @value{GDBN} to output values in a manner
+consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
+language you use to build expressions is called the @dfn{working
+language}.
-@c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
-@c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
-@c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. roland 16jul93.
+@menu
+* Setting:: Switching between source languages
+* Show:: Displaying the language
+* Checks:: Type and range checks
+* Support:: Supported languages
+@end menu
-@node C Checks
-@subsubsection C and C++ type and range checks
+@node Setting
+@section Switching between source languages
-@cindex C and C++ checks
+There are two ways to control the working language---either have @value{GDBN}
+set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
+@code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, @value{GDBN}
+defaults to setting the language automatically. The working language is
+used to determine how expressions you type are interpreted, how values
+are printed, etc.
-By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
-is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
-considers two variables type equivalent if:
+In addition to the working language, every source file that
+@value{GDBN} knows about has its own working language. For some object
+file formats, the compiler might indicate which language a particular
+source file is in. However, most of the time @value{GDBN} infers the
+language from the name of the file. The language of a source file
+controls whether C@t{++} names are demangled---this way @code{backtrace} can
+show each frame appropriately for its own language. There is no way to
+set the language of a source file from within @value{GDBN}, but you can
+set the language associated with a filename extension. @xref{Show, ,
+Displaying the language}.
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
-enumerated tag.
+This is most commonly a problem when you use a program, such
+as @code{cfront} or @code{f2c}, that generates C but is written in
+another language. In that case, make the
+program use @code{#line} directives in its C output; that way
+@value{GDBN} will know the correct language of the source code of the original
+program, and will display that source code, not the generated C code.
-@item
-The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
-declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
+@menu
+* Filenames:: Filename extensions and languages.
+* Manually:: Setting the working language manually
+* Automatically:: Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
+@end menu
-@ignore
-@c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
-@c FIXME--beers?
-@item
-The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
-declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
-compilers.)
-@end ignore
-@end itemize
+@node Filenames
+@subsection List of filename extensions and languages
-Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
-indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
-that is not itself an array.
+If a source file name ends in one of the following extensions, then
+@value{GDBN} infers that its language is the one indicated.
-@node Debugging C
-@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
+@table @file
-The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
-the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
-inside a @code{struct} or @code{class} is also printed. Otherwise, it
-appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
+@item .c
+C source file
-The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
-with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
-,Expressions}.
+@item .C
+@itemx .cc
+@itemx .cp
+@itemx .cpp
+@itemx .cxx
+@itemx .c++
+C@t{++} source file
-@menu
-* Debugging C plus plus::
-@end menu
+@item .f
+@itemx .F
+Fortran source file
-@node Debugging C plus plus
-@subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C++
+@item .ch
+@itemx .c186
+@itemx .c286
+CHILL source file
-@cindex commands for C++
+@item .mod
+Modula-2 source file
-Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
-designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
+@item .s
+@itemx .S
+Assembler source file. This actually behaves almost like C, but
+@value{GDBN} does not skip over function prologues when stepping.
+@end table
-@table @code
-@cindex break in overloaded functions
-@item @r{breakpoint menus}
-When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
-@value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
-you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
+In addition, you may set the language associated with a filename
+extension. @xref{Show, , Displaying the language}.
-@cindex overloading in C++
-@item rbreak @var{regex}
-Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
-breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
-classes.
-@xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
+@node Manually
+@subsection Setting the working language
-@cindex C++ exception handling
-@item catch throw
-@itemx catch catch
-Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Set
-Catchpoints, , Setting catchpoints}.
+If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically,
+expressions are interpreted the same way in your debugging session and
+your program.
-@cindex inheritance
-@item ptype @var{typename}
-Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
-@var{typename}.
-@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
+@kindex set language
+If you wish, you may set the language manually. To do this, issue the
+command @samp{set language @var{lang}}, where @var{lang} is the name of
+a language, such as
+@code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
+For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
-@cindex C++ symbol display
-@item set print demangle
-@itemx show print demangle
-@itemx set print asm-demangle
-@itemx show print asm-demangle
-Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
-displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
-@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
+Setting the language manually prevents @value{GDBN} from updating the working
+language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
+to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
+source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
+languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
+source file were written in C, and @value{GDBN} was parsing Modula-2, a
+command such as:
-@item set print object
-@itemx show print object
-Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
-@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
+@example
+print a = b + c
+@end example
-@item set print vtbl
-@itemx show print vtbl
-Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
-@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
-(The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
-ANSI C++ compiler (@code{aCC}).)
+@noindent
+might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
+@code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
+printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
+@code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
-@kindex set overload-resolution
-@cindex overloaded functions, overload resolution
-@item set overload-resolution on
-Enable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation. The default
-is on. For overloaded functions, @value{GDBN} evaluates the arguments
-and searches for a function whose signature matches the argument types,
-using the standard C++ conversion rules (see @ref{C plus plus expressions, ,C++
-expressions}, for details). If it cannot find a match, it emits a
-message.
+@node Automatically
+@subsection Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language
-@item set overload-resolution off
-Disable overload resolution for C++ expression evaluation. For
-overloaded functions that are not class member functions, @value{GDBN}
-chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in the
-symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct type. For
-overloaded functions that are class member functions, @value{GDBN}
-searches for a function whose signature @emph{exactly} matches the
-argument types.
+To have @value{GDBN} set the working language automatically, use
+@samp{set language local} or @samp{set language auto}. @value{GDBN}
+then infers the working language. That is, when your program stops in a
+frame (usually by encountering a breakpoint), @value{GDBN} sets the
+working language to the language recorded for the function in that
+frame. If the language for a frame is unknown (that is, if the function
+or block corresponding to the frame was defined in a source file that
+does not have a recognized extension), the current working language is
+not changed, and @value{GDBN} issues a warning.
-@item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
-You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
-the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C++: type
-@code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
-also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
-available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
-@xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
-@end table
+This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
+entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
+written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
+a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
+case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
-@node Modula-2
-@subsection Modula-2
+@node Show
+@section Displaying the language
-@cindex Modula-2, @value{GDBN} support
+The following commands help you find out which language is the
+working language, and also what language source files were written in.
-The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
-output from the @sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
-developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
-attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
-to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
-table.
+@kindex show language
+@kindex info frame@r{, show the source language}
+@kindex info source@r{, show the source language}
+@table @code
+@item show language
+Display the current working language. This is the
+language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
+build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
-@cindex expressions in Modula-2
-@menu
-* M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
-* Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
-* M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
-* M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
-* Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
-* M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
-* M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
-* GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
-@end menu
+@item info frame
+Display the source language for this frame. This language becomes the
+working language if you use an identifier from this frame.
+@xref{Frame Info, ,Information about a frame}, to identify the other
+information listed here.
-@node M2 Operators
-@subsubsection Operators
-@cindex Modula-2 operators
+@item info source
+Display the source language of this source file.
+@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}, to identify the other
+information listed here.
+@end table
-Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
-@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
-often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
-following definitions hold:
+In unusual circumstances, you may have source files with extensions
+not in the standard list. You can then set the extension associated
+with a language explicitly:
-@itemize @bullet
+@kindex set extension-language
+@kindex info extensions
+@table @code
+@item set extension-language @var{.ext} @var{language}
+Set source files with extension @var{.ext} to be assumed to be in
+the source language @var{language}.
-@item
-@emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
-their subranges.
+@item info extensions
+List all the filename extensions and the associated languages.
+@end table
-@item
-@emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
+@node Checks
+@section Type and range checking
-@item
-@emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} In this release, the @value{GDBN} commands for type and range
+checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
+section documents the intended facilities.
+@end quotation
+@c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
-@item
-@emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
-@var{type}}.
+Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
+errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
+checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
+sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
+these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
+by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
+errors when your program is running.
-@item
-@emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
+@value{GDBN} can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
+Although @value{GDBN} does not check the statements in your program, it
+can check expressions entered directly into @value{GDBN} for evaluation via
+the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
+@value{GDBN} can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
+your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages},
+for the default settings of supported languages.
-@item
-@emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
+@menu
+* Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
+* Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
+@end menu
-@item
-@emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
-@end itemize
+@cindex type checking
+@cindex checks, type
+@node Type Checking
+@subsection An overview of type checking
-@noindent
-The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
-increasing precedence:
+Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
+arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
+otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
+errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
-@table @code
-@item ,
-Function argument or array index separator.
+@smallexample
+1 + 2 @result{} 3
+@exdent but
+@error{} 1 + 2.3
+@end smallexample
-@item :=
-Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
-@var{value}.
+The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
+type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
-@item <@r{, }>
-Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
-types.
+For the expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell the
+@value{GDBN} type checker to skip checking;
+to treat any mismatches as errors and abandon the expression;
+or to only issue warnings when type mismatches occur,
+but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
+these, @value{GDBN} evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
+also issues a warning.
-@item <=@r{, }>=
-Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
-on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
-set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
+Even if you turn type checking off, there may be other reasons
+related to type that prevent @value{GDBN} from evaluating an expression.
+For instance, @value{GDBN} does not know how to add an @code{int} and
+a @code{struct foo}. These particular type errors have nothing to do
+with the language in use, and usually arise from expressions, such as
+the one described above, which make little sense to evaluate anyway.
-@item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
-Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
-Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
-available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
-comment character.
+Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
+instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
+operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
+represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
+operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for further
+details on specific languages.
-@item IN
-Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
-Same precedence as @code{<}.
+@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
-@item OR
-Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
+@kindex set check@r{, type}
+@kindex set check type
+@kindex show check type
+@table @code
+@item set check type auto
+Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
+@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
+each language.
-@item AND@r{, }&
-Boolean conjunction. Defined on boolean types.
+@item set check type on
+@itemx set check type off
+Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
+current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
+match the language default. If any type mismatches occur in
+evaluating an expression while type checking is on, @value{GDBN} prints a
+message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
-@item @@
-The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
+@item set check type warn
+Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
+evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
+be impossible for other reasons. For example, @value{GDBN} cannot add
+numbers and structures.
-@item +@r{, }-
-Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
-and difference on set types.
+@item show type
+Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not @value{GDBN}
+is setting it automatically.
+@end table
-@item *
-Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
-on set types.
+@cindex range checking
+@cindex checks, range
+@node Range Checking
+@subsection An overview of range checking
-@item /
-Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
-types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
+In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
+bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
+checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
+computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
+not exceed the bounds of the array.
-@item DIV@r{, }MOD
-Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
-precedence as @code{*}.
+For expressions you use in @value{GDBN} commands, you can tell
+@value{GDBN} to treat range errors in one of three ways: ignore them,
+always treat them as errors and abandon the expression, or issue
+warnings but evaluate the expression anyway.
-@item -
-Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
+A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
+array index bound, or when you type a constant that is not a member
+of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
+error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
+result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
+the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
-@item ^
-Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
+@example
+@var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
+@end example
-@item NOT
-Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
-@code{^}.
+This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
+specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
+Supported languages}, for further details on specific languages.
-@item .
-@code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
-precedence as @code{^}.
+@value{GDBN} provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
-@item []
-Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
+@kindex set check@r{, range}
+@kindex set check range
+@kindex show check range
+@table @code
+@item set check range auto
+Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
+@xref{Support, ,Supported languages}, for the default settings for
+each language.
-@item ()
-Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
-as @code{^}.
+@item set check range on
+@itemx set check range off
+Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
+current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
+match the language default. If a range error occurs and range checking is on,
+then a message is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
-@item ::@r{, }.
-@value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
+@item set check range warn
+Output messages when the @value{GDBN} range checker detects a range error,
+but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
+expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
+memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many Unix
+systems).
+
+@item show range
+Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
+being set automatically by @value{GDBN}.
@end table
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
-treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
-@code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
-@code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
-@end quotation
+@node Support
+@section Supported languages
-@cindex Modula-2 built-ins
-@node Built-In Func/Proc
-@subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
+@value{GDBN} supports C, C@t{++}, Fortran, Java, Chill, assembly, and Modula-2.
+@c This is false ...
+Some @value{GDBN} features may be used in expressions regardless of the
+language you use: the @value{GDBN} @code{@@} and @code{::} operators,
+and the @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions,
+,Expressions}) can be used with the constructs of any supported
+language.
-Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
-In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
+The following sections detail to what degree each source language is
+supported by @value{GDBN}. These sections are not meant to be language
+tutorials or references, but serve only as a reference guide to what the
+@value{GDBN} expression parser accepts, and what input and output
+formats should look like for different languages. There are many good
+books written on each of these languages; please look to these for a
+language reference or tutorial.
-@table @var
+@menu
+* C:: C and C@t{++}
+* Modula-2:: Modula-2
+* Chill:: Chill
+@end menu
-@item a
-represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
+@node C
+@subsection C and C@t{++}
-@item c
-represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
+@cindex C and C@t{++}
+@cindex expressions in C or C@t{++}
-@item i
-represents a variable or constant of integral type.
+Since C and C@t{++} are so closely related, many features of @value{GDBN} apply
+to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss those languages
+together.
-@item m
-represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
-same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
-be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
+@cindex C@t{++}
+@cindex @code{g++}, @sc{gnu} C@t{++} compiler
+@cindex @sc{gnu} C@t{++}
+The C@t{++} debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the C@t{++}
+compiler and @value{GDBN}. Therefore, to debug your C@t{++} code
+effectively, you must compile your C@t{++} programs with a supported
+C@t{++} compiler, such as @sc{gnu} @code{g++}, or the HP ANSI C@t{++}
+compiler (@code{aCC}).
-@item n
-represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
+For best results when using @sc{gnu} C@t{++}, use the stabs debugging
+format. You can select that format explicitly with the @code{g++}
+command-line options @samp{-gstabs} or @samp{-gstabs+}. See
+@ref{Debugging Options,,Options for Debugging Your Program or @sc{gnu}
+CC, gcc.info, Using @sc{gnu} CC}, for more information.
-@item r
-represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
+@menu
+* C Operators:: C and C@t{++} operators
+* C Constants:: C and C@t{++} constants
+* C plus plus expressions:: C@t{++} expressions
+* C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C@t{++}
+* C Checks:: C and C@t{++} type and range checks
+* Debugging C:: @value{GDBN} and C
+* Debugging C plus plus:: @value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}
+@end menu
-@item t
-represents a type.
+@node C Operators
+@subsubsection C and C@t{++} operators
-@item v
-represents a variable.
+@cindex C and C@t{++} operators
-@item x
-represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
-explanation of the function for details.
-@end table
+Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
+@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
+often defined on groups of types.
-All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
+For the purposes of C and C@t{++}, the following definitions hold:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+@emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
+specifiers; @code{char}; @code{enum}; and, for C@t{++}, @code{bool}.
+
+@item
+@emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float}, @code{double}, and
+@code{long double} (if supported by the target platform).
+
+@item
+@emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type} *)}.
+
+@item
+@emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
+
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+The following operators are supported. They are listed here
+in order of increasing precedence:
@table @code
-@item ABS(@var{n})
-Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
+@item ,
+The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
+are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
+expression being the last expression evaluated.
-@item CAP(@var{c})
-If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
-equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
+@item =
+Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
+assigned. Defined on scalar types.
-@item CHR(@var{i})
-Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
+@item @var{op}=
+Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
+and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
+@w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precedence.
+@var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
+@code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
-@item DEC(@var{v})
-Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
+@item ?:
+The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
+of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
+integral type.
-@item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
-Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
-new value.
+@item ||
+Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
-@item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
-Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
-set.
+@item &&
+Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
-@item FLOAT(@var{i})
-Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
+@item |
+Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
-@item HIGH(@var{a})
-Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
+@item ^
+Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
-@item INC(@var{v})
-Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
+@item &
+Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
-@item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
-Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
-new value.
+@item ==@r{, }!=
+Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
+expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
-@item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
-Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
-there. Returns the new set.
+@item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
+Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
+Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
+and non-zero for true.
-@item MAX(@var{t})
-Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
+@item <<@r{, }>>
+left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
-@item MIN(@var{t})
-Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
+@item @@
+The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
-@item ODD(@var{i})
-Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
+@item +@r{, }-
+Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
+pointer types.
-@item ORD(@var{x})
-Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
-value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
-ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
-integral, character and enumerated types.
+@item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
+Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
+defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
+integral types.
-@item SIZE(@var{x})
-Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
+@item ++@r{, }--
+Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
+operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
+when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
+operation takes place.
-@item TRUNC(@var{r})
-Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
+@item *
+Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
+@code{++}.
-@item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
-Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
+@item &
+Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
+
+For debugging C@t{++}, @value{GDBN} implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what is
+allowed in the C@t{++} language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
+(or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}}) to examine the address
+where a C@t{++} reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
+stored.
+
+@item -
+Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
+precedence as @code{++}.
+
+@item !
+Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
+@code{++}.
+
+@item ~
+Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
+@code{++}.
+
+
+@item .@r{, }->
+Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
+@value{GDBN} regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
+pointer based on the stored type information.
+Defined on @code{struct} and @code{union} data.
+
+@item .*@r{, }->*
+Dereferences of pointers to members.
+
+@item []
+Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
+@code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
+
+@item ()
+Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
+
+@item ::
+C@t{++} scope resolution operator. Defined on @code{struct}, @code{union},
+and @code{class} types.
+
+@item ::
+Doubled colons also represent the @value{GDBN} scope operator
+(@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). Same precedence as @code{::},
+above.
@end table
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
-@value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
-an error.
-@end quotation
+If an operator is redefined in the user code, @value{GDBN} usually
+attempts to invoke the redefined version instead of using the operator's
+predefined meaning.
-@cindex Modula-2 constants
-@node M2 Constants
-@subsubsection Constants
+@menu
+* C Constants::
+@end menu
-@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
-ways:
+@node C Constants
+@subsubsection C and C@t{++} constants
-@itemize @bullet
+@cindex C and C@t{++} constants
-@item
-Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
-expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
-rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
-trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
+@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of C and C@t{++} in the
+following ways:
+@itemize @bullet
@item
-Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
-decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
-then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
-@samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
-digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
-digits.
+Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
+specified by a leading @samp{0} (i.e. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
+a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
+@samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
+@code{long} value.
@item
-Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
-like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
-also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
-followed by a @samp{C}.
+Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
+point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
+exponent. An exponent is of the form:
+@samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
+sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
+A floating-point constant may also end with a letter @samp{f} or
+@samp{F}, specifying that the constant should be treated as being of
+the @code{float} (as opposed to the default @code{double}) type; or with
+a letter @samp{l} or @samp{L}, which specifies a @code{long double}
+constant.
@item
-String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
-pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
-Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
-Constants, ,C and C++ constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
-sequences.
+Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
+integral equivalents.
@item
-Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
+Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
+(@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
+(usually its @sc{ascii} value). Within quotes, the single character may
+be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
+the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
+of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
+@samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
+@samp{\n} for newline.
@item
-Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
-@code{FALSE}.
+String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded by
+double quotes (@code{"}). Any valid character constant (as described
+above) may appear. Double quotes within the string must be preceded by
+a backslash, so for instance @samp{"a\"b'c"} is a string of five
+characters.
@item
-Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
+Pointer constants are an integral value. You can also write pointers
+to constants using the C operator @samp{&}.
@item
-Set constants are not yet supported.
+Array constants are comma-separated lists surrounded by braces @samp{@{}
+and @samp{@}}; for example, @samp{@{1,2,3@}} is a three-element array of
+integers, @samp{@{@{1,2@}, @{3,4@}, @{5,6@}@}} is a three-by-two array,
+and @samp{@{&"hi", &"there", &"fred"@}} is a three-element array of pointers.
@end itemize
-@node M2 Defaults
-@subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
-@cindex Modula-2 defaults
+@menu
+* C plus plus expressions::
+* C Defaults::
+* C Checks::
-If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
-both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
-Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
-selected the working language.
-
-If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
-code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
-working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
-the language automatically}, for further details.
+* Debugging C::
+@end menu
-@node Deviations
-@subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
-@cindex Modula-2, deviations from
+@node C plus plus expressions
+@subsubsection C@t{++} expressions
+
+@cindex expressions in C@t{++}
+@value{GDBN} expression handling can interpret most C@t{++} expressions.
+
+@cindex C@t{++} support, not in @sc{coff}
+@cindex @sc{coff} versus C@t{++}
+@cindex C@t{++} and object formats
+@cindex object formats and C@t{++}
+@cindex a.out and C@t{++}
+@cindex @sc{ecoff} and C@t{++}
+@cindex @sc{xcoff} and C@t{++}
+@cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C@t{++}
+@cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C@t{++}
+@c FIXME!! GDB may eventually be able to debug C++ using DWARF; check
+@c periodically whether this has happened...
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} @value{GDBN} can only debug C@t{++} code if you use the
+proper compiler. Typically, C@t{++} debugging depends on the use of
+additional debugging information in the symbol table, and thus requires
+special support. In particular, if your compiler generates a.out, MIPS
+@sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or @sc{elf} with stabs extensions to the
+symbol table, these facilities are all available. (With @sc{gnu} CC,
+you can use the @samp{-gstabs} option to request stabs debugging
+extensions explicitly.) Where the object code format is standard
+@sc{coff} or @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, on the other hand, most of the C@t{++}
+support in @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} work.
+@end quotation
-A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
-This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
+@enumerate
-@itemize @bullet
+@cindex member functions
@item
-Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
-integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
-debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
-pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
-through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
-returned a pointer.)
+Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
-@item
-C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
-non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
-escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
-printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
+@example
+count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
+@end example
+@vindex this@r{, inside C@t{++} member functions}
+@cindex namespace in C@t{++}
@item
-The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
-argument.
+While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
+expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
+that is, @value{GDBN} allows implicit references to the class instance
+pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C@t{++}.
+@cindex call overloaded functions
+@cindex overloaded functions, calling
+@cindex type conversions in C@t{++}
@item
-All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
-@end itemize
+You can call overloaded functions; @value{GDBN} resolves the function
+call to the right definition, with some restrictions. @value{GDBN} does not
+perform overload resolution involving user-defined type conversions,
+calls to constructors, or instantiations of templates that do not exist
+in the program. It also cannot handle ellipsis argument lists or
+default arguments.
-@node M2 Checks
-@subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
-@cindex Modula-2 checks
+It does perform integral conversions and promotions, floating-point
+promotions, arithmetic conversions, pointer conversions, conversions of
+class objects to base classes, and standard conversions such as those of
+functions or arrays to pointers; it requires an exact match on the
+number of function arguments.
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
-range checking.
-@end quotation
-@c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
+Overload resolution is always performed, unless you have specified
+@code{set overload-resolution off}. @xref{Debugging C plus plus,
+,@value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}}.
-@value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
+You must specify @code{set overload-resolution off} in order to use an
+explicit function signature to call an overloaded function, as in
+@smallexample
+p 'foo(char,int)'('x', 13)
+@end smallexample
-@itemize @bullet
+The @value{GDBN} command-completion facility can simplify this;
+see @ref{Completion, ,Command completion}.
+
+@cindex reference declarations
@item
-They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
-@var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
+@value{GDBN} understands variables declared as C@t{++} references; you can use
+them in expressions just as you do in C@t{++} source---they are automatically
+dereferenced.
+
+In the parameter list shown when @value{GDBN} displays a frame, the values of
+reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
+avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
+The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
+you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
@item
-They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
-@sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
-@end itemize
+@value{GDBN} supports the C@t{++} name resolution operator @code{::}---your
+expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
+one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
+necessary, for example in an expression like
+@samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. @value{GDBN} also allows
+resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C@t{++}
+debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program variables}).
+@end enumerate
-As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
-whose types are not equivalent is an error.
+In addition, when used with HP's C@t{++} compiler, @value{GDBN} supports
+calling virtual functions correctly, printing out virtual bases of
+objects, calling functions in a base subobject, casting objects, and
+invoking user-defined operators.
-Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
-index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
+@node C Defaults
+@subsubsection C and C@t{++} defaults
-@node M2 Scope
-@subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
-@cindex scope
-@kindex .
-@cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
-@ifinfo
-@kindex colon-colon@r{, in Modula-2}
-@c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
-@end ifinfo
-@iftex
-@kindex ::
-@end iftex
+@cindex C and C@t{++} defaults
-There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
-(@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
-similar syntax:
+If you allow @value{GDBN} to set type and range checking automatically, they
+both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
+C or C@t{++}. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
+selects the working language.
-@example
+If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, it
+recognizes source files whose names end with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or
+@file{.cc}, etc, and when @value{GDBN} enters code compiled from one of
+these files, it sets the working language to C or C@t{++}.
+@xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} infer the source language},
+for further details.
-@var{module} . @var{id}
-@var{scope} :: @var{id}
-@end example
+@c Type checking is (a) primarily motivated by Modula-2, and (b)
+@c unimplemented. If (b) changes, it might make sense to let this node
+@c appear even if Mod-2 does not, but meanwhile ignore it. roland 16jul93.
-@noindent
-where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
-@var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
-identifier within your program, except another module.
+@node C Checks
+@subsubsection C and C@t{++} type and range checks
-Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
-specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
-found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
-enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
+@cindex C and C@t{++} checks
-Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
-the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
-definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
-an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
-module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
-@var{module}.
+By default, when @value{GDBN} parses C or C@t{++} expressions, type checking
+is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, @value{GDBN}
+considers two variables type equivalent if:
-@node GDB/M2
-@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
+enumerated tag.
-Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
-Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
-specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
-@samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
-apply to C++, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
-analogue in Modula-2.
+@item
+The two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
+declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
-The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
-with any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
-intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
-created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
-address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
-@samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful.
+@ignore
+@c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
+@c FIXME--beers?
+@item
+The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
+declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
+compilers.)
+@end ignore
+@end itemize
-@cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
-In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
-interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
+Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
+indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
+that is not itself an array.
-@node Chill
-@subsection Chill
+@node Debugging C
+@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and C
-The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Chill only support output
-from the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler. Other Chill compilers are not currently
-supported, and attempting to debug executables produced by them is most
-likely to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
-table.
+The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
+the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
+inside a @code{struct} or @code{class} is also printed. Otherwise, it
+appears as @samp{@{...@}}.
-@c This used to say "... following Chill related topics ...", but since
-@c menus are not shown in the printed manual, it would look awkward.
-This section covers the Chill related topics and the features
-of @value{GDBN} which support these topics.
+The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
+with pointers and a memory allocation function. @xref{Expressions,
+,Expressions}.
@menu
-* How modes are displayed:: How modes are displayed
-* Locations:: Locations and their accesses
-* Values and their Operations:: Values and their Operations
-* Chill type and range checks::
-* Chill defaults::
+* Debugging C plus plus::
@end menu
-@node How modes are displayed
-@subsubsection How modes are displayed
+@node Debugging C plus plus
+@subsubsection @value{GDBN} features for C@t{++}
-The Chill Datatype- (Mode) support of @value{GDBN} is directly related
-with the functionality of the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler, and therefore deviates
-slightly from the standard specification of the Chill language. The
-provided modes are:
+@cindex commands for C@t{++}
+
+Some @value{GDBN} commands are particularly useful with C@t{++}, and some are
+designed specifically for use with C@t{++}. Here is a summary:
-@c FIXME: this @table's contents effectively disable @code by using @r
-@c on every @item. So why does it need @code?
@table @code
-@item @r{@emph{Discrete modes:}}
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-@emph{Integer Modes} which are predefined by @code{BYTE, UBYTE, INT,
-UINT, LONG, ULONG},
-@item
-@emph{Boolean Mode} which is predefined by @code{BOOL},
-@item
-@emph{Character Mode} which is predefined by @code{CHAR},
-@item
-@emph{Set Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{SET}.
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
-type = SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
-@end smallexample
-If the type is an unnumbered set the set element values are omitted.
-@item
-@emph{Range Mode} which is displayed by @code{type = <basemode>
-(<lower bound> : <upper bound>)}, where @code{<lower bound>, <upper
-bound>} can be of any discrete literal expression (e.g. set element
-names).
-@end itemize
+@cindex break in overloaded functions
+@item @r{breakpoint menus}
+When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
+@value{GDBN} breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
+you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus,,Breakpoint menus}.
-@item @r{@emph{Powerset Mode:}}
-A Powerset Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{POWERSET} followed by
-the member mode of the powerset. The member mode can be any discrete mode.
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
-type = POWERSET SET (egon, hugo, otto)
-@end smallexample
+@cindex overloading in C@t{++}
+@item rbreak @var{regex}
+Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
+breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
+classes.
+@xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting breakpoints}.
-@item @r{@emph{Reference Modes:}}
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-@emph{Bound Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{REF}
-followed by the mode name to which the reference is bound.
-@item
-@emph{Free Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{PTR}.
-@end itemize
+@cindex C@t{++} exception handling
+@item catch throw
+@itemx catch catch
+Debug C@t{++} exception handling using these commands. @xref{Set
+Catchpoints, , Setting catchpoints}.
-@item @r{@emph{Procedure mode}}
-The procedure mode is displayed by @code{type = PROC(<parameter list>)
-<return mode> EXCEPTIONS (<exception list>)}. The @code{<parameter
-list>} is a list of the parameter modes. @code{<return mode>} indicates
-the mode of the result of the procedure if any. The exceptionlist lists
-all possible exceptions which can be raised by the procedure.
+@cindex inheritance
+@item ptype @var{typename}
+Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
+@var{typename}.
+@xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
-@ignore
-@item @r{@emph{Instance mode}}
-The instance mode is represented by a structure, which has a static
-type, and is therefore not really of interest.
-@end ignore
+@cindex C@t{++} symbol display
+@item set print demangle
+@itemx show print demangle
+@itemx set print asm-demangle
+@itemx show print asm-demangle
+Control whether C@t{++} symbols display in their source form, both when
+displaying code as C@t{++} source and when displaying disassemblies.
+@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
+
+@item set print object
+@itemx show print object
+Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
+@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
+
+@item set print vtbl
+@itemx show print vtbl
+Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
+@xref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}.
+(The @code{vtbl} commands do not work on programs compiled with the HP
+ANSI C@t{++} compiler (@code{aCC}).)
+
+@kindex set overload-resolution
+@cindex overloaded functions, overload resolution
+@item set overload-resolution on
+Enable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation. The default
+is on. For overloaded functions, @value{GDBN} evaluates the arguments
+and searches for a function whose signature matches the argument types,
+using the standard C@t{++} conversion rules (see @ref{C plus plus expressions, ,C@t{++}
+expressions}, for details). If it cannot find a match, it emits a
+message.
+
+@item set overload-resolution off
+Disable overload resolution for C@t{++} expression evaluation. For
+overloaded functions that are not class member functions, @value{GDBN}
+chooses the first function of the specified name that it finds in the
+symbol table, whether or not its arguments are of the correct type. For
+overloaded functions that are class member functions, @value{GDBN}
+searches for a function whose signature @emph{exactly} matches the
+argument types.
+
+@item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
+You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
+the same notation that is used to declare such symbols in C@t{++}: type
+@code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
+also use the @value{GDBN} command-line word completion facilities to list the
+available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
+@xref{Completion,, Command completion}, for details on how to do this.
+@end table
+
+@node Modula-2
+@subsection Modula-2
+
+@cindex Modula-2, @value{GDBN} support
+
+The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Modula-2 only support
+output from the @sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being
+developed). Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and
+attempting to debug executables produced by them is most likely
+to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
+table.
+
+@cindex expressions in Modula-2
+@menu
+* M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
+* Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in functions and procedures
+* M2 Constants:: Modula-2 constants
+* M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
+* Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
+* M2 Checks:: Modula-2 type and range checks
+* M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
+* GDB/M2:: @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
+@end menu
+
+@node M2 Operators
+@subsubsection Operators
+@cindex Modula-2 operators
+
+Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
+@code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
+often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
+following definitions hold:
-@item @r{@emph{Synchronization Modes:}}
@itemize @bullet
+
@item
-@emph{Event Mode} which is displayed by @code{EVENT (<event length>)},
-where @code{(<event length>)} is optional.
+@emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
+their subranges.
+
@item
-@emph{Buffer Mode} which is displayed by @code{BUFFER (<buffer length>)
-<buffer element mode>}, where @code{(<buffer length>)} is optional.
-@end itemize
+@emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
-@item @r{@emph{Timing Modes:}}
-@itemize @bullet
@item
-@emph{Duration Mode} which is predefined by @code{DURATION}
+@emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
+
@item
-@emph{Absolute Time Mode} which is predefined by @code{TIME}
-@end itemize
+@emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
+@var{type}}.
-@item @r{@emph{Real Modes:}}
-Real Modes are predefined with @code{REAL} and @code{LONG_REAL}.
+@item
+@emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
-@item @r{@emph{String Modes:}}
-@itemize @bullet
@item
-@emph{Character String Mode} which is displayed by @code{CHARS(<string
-length>)}, followed by the keyword @code{VARYING} if the String Mode is
-a varying mode
+@emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET} and @code{BITSET} types.
+
@item
-@emph{Bit String Mode} which is displayed by @code{BOOLS(<string
-length>)}.
+@emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
@end itemize
-@item @r{@emph{Array Mode:}}
-The Array Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{ARRAY(<range>)}
-followed by the element mode (which may in turn be an array mode).
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
-type = ARRAY (1:42)
- ARRAY (1:20)
- SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
-@end smallexample
+@noindent
+The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
+increasing precedence:
-@item @r{@emph{Structure Mode}}
-The Structure mode is displayed by the keyword @code{STRUCT(<field
-list>)}. The @code{<field list>} consists of names and modes of fields
-of the structure. Variant structures have the keyword @code{CASE <field>
-OF <variant fields> ESAC} in their field list. Since the current version
-of the GNU Chill compiler doesn't implement tag processing (no runtime
-checks of variant fields, and therefore no debugging info), the output
-always displays all variant fields.
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) ptype str
-type = STRUCT (
- as x,
- bs x,
- CASE bs OF
- (karli):
- cs a
- (ott):
- ds x
- ESAC
-)
-@end smallexample
-@end table
+@table @code
+@item ,
+Function argument or array index separator.
-@node Locations
-@subsubsection Locations and their accesses
+@item :=
+Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
+@var{value}.
-A location in Chill is an object which can contain values.
+@item <@r{, }>
+Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
+types.
-A value of a location is generally accessed by the (declared) name of
-the location. The output conforms to the specification of values in
-Chill programs. How values are specified
-is the topic of the next section, @ref{Values and their Operations}.
+@item <=@r{, }>=
+Less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
+on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
+set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
-The pseudo-location @code{RESULT} (or @code{result}) can be used to
-display or change the result of a currently-active procedure:
+@item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
+Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
+Same precedence as @code{<}. In @value{GDBN} scripts, only @code{<>} is
+available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
+comment character.
-@smallexample
-set result := EXPR
-@end smallexample
+@item IN
+Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
+Same precedence as @code{<}.
-@noindent
-This does the same as the Chill action @code{RESULT EXPR} (which
-is not available in gdb).
+@item OR
+Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
-Values of reference mode locations are printed by @code{PTR(<hex
-value>)} in case of a free reference mode, and by @code{(REF <reference
-mode>) (<hex-value>)} in case of a bound reference. @code{<hex value>}
-represents the address where the reference points to. To access the
-value of the location referenced by the pointer, use the dereference
-operator @samp{->}.
+@item AND@r{, }&
+Boolean conjunction. Defined on boolean types.
-Values of procedure mode locations are displayed by @code{@{ PROC
-(<argument modes> ) <return mode> @} <address> <name of procedure
-location>}. @code{<argument modes>} is a list of modes according to the
-parameter specification of the procedure and @code{<address>} shows the
-address of the entry point.
+@item @@
+The @value{GDBN} ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
-@ignore
-Locations of instance modes are displayed just like a structure with two
-fields specifying the @emph{process type} and the @emph{copy number} of
-the investigated instance location@footnote{This comes from the current
-implementation of instances. They are implemented as a structure (no
-na). The output should be something like @code{[<name of the process>;
-<instance number>]}.}. The field names are @code{__proc_type} and
-@code{__proc_copy}.
+@item +@r{, }-
+Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
+and difference on set types.
-Locations of synchronization modes are displayed like a structure with
-the field name @code{__event_data} in case of a event mode location, and
-like a structure with the field @code{__buffer_data} in case of a buffer
-mode location (refer to previous paragraph).
+@item *
+Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
+on set types.
-Structure Mode locations are printed by @code{[.<field name>: <value>,
-...]}. The @code{<field name>} corresponds to the structure mode
-definition and the layout of @code{<value>} varies depending of the mode
-of the field. If the investigated structure mode location is of variant
-structure mode, the variant parts of the structure are enclosed in curled
-braces (@samp{@{@}}). Fields enclosed by @samp{@{,@}} are residing
-on the same memory location and represent the current values of the
-memory location in their specific modes. Since no tag processing is done
-all variants are displayed. A variant field is printed by
-@code{(<variant name>) = .<field name>: <value>}. (who implements the
-stuff ???)
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) print str1 $4 = [.as: 0, .bs: karli, .<TAG>: { (karli) =
-[.cs: []], (susi) = [.ds: susi]}]
-@end smallexample
-@end ignore
+@item /
+Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
+types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
-Substructures of string mode-, array mode- or structure mode-values
-(e.g. array slices, fields of structure locations) are accessed using
-certain operations which are described in the next section, @ref{Values
-and their Operations}.
+@item DIV@r{, }MOD
+Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
+precedence as @code{*}.
-A location value may be interpreted as having a different mode using the
-location conversion. This mode conversion is written as @code{<mode
-name>(<location>)}. The user has to consider that the sizes of the modes
-have to be equal otherwise an error occurs. Furthermore, no range
-checking of the location against the destination mode is performed, and
-therefore the result can be quite confusing.
+@item -
+Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER} and @code{REAL} data.
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) print int (s(3 up 4)) XXX TO be filled in !! XXX
-@end smallexample
-
-@node Values and their Operations
-@subsubsection Values and their Operations
+@item ^
+Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
-Values are used to alter locations, to investigate complex structures in
-more detail or to filter relevant information out of a large amount of
-data. There are several (mode dependent) operations defined which enable
-such investigations. These operations are not only applicable to
-constant values but also to locations, which can become quite useful
-when debugging complex structures. During parsing the command line
-(e.g. evaluating an expression) @value{GDBN} treats location names as
-the values behind these locations.
+@item NOT
+Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
+@code{^}.
-This section describes how values have to be specified and which
-operations are legal to be used with such values.
+@item .
+@code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD} data. Same
+precedence as @code{^}.
-@table @code
-@item Literal Values
-Literal values are specified in the same manner as in @sc{gnu} Chill programs.
-For detailed specification refer to the @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual
-chapter 1.5.
-@c FIXME: if the Chill Manual is a Texinfo documents, the above should
-@c be converted to a @ref.
+@item []
+Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY} data. Same precedence as @code{^}.
-@ignore
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-@emph{Integer Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
-programs (refer to the Chill Standard z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.2)
-@item
-@emph{Boolean Literals} are defined by @code{TRUE} and @code{FALSE}.
-@item
-@emph{Character Literals} are defined by @code{'<character>'}. (e.g.
-@code{'M'})
-@item
-@emph{Set Literals} are defined by a name which was specified in a set
-mode. The value delivered by a Set Literal is the set value. This is
-comparable to an enumeration in C/C++ language.
-@item
-@emph{Emptiness Literal} is predefined by @code{NULL}. The value of the
-emptiness literal delivers either the empty reference value, the empty
-procedure value or the empty instance value.
+@item ()
+Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE} objects. Same precedence
+as @code{^}.
-@item
-@emph{Character String Literals} are defined by a sequence of characters
-enclosed in single- or double quotes. If a single- or double quote has
-to be part of the string literal it has to be stuffed (specified twice).
-@item
-@emph{Bitstring Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
-programs (refer z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.8).
-@item
-@emph{Floating point literals} are specified in the same manner as in
-(gnu-)Chill programs (refer @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual chapter 1.5).
-@end itemize
-@end ignore
+@item ::@r{, }.
+@value{GDBN} and Modula-2 scope operators.
+@end table
-@item Tuple Values
-A tuple is specified by @code{<mode name>[<tuple>]}, where @code{<mode
-name>} can be omitted if the mode of the tuple is unambiguous. This
-unambiguity is derived from the context of a evaluated expression.
-@code{<tuple>} can be one of the following:
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so @value{GDBN}
+treats the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
+@code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
+@code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
+@end quotation
-@itemize @bullet
-@item @emph{Powerset Tuple}
-@item @emph{Array Tuple}
-@item @emph{Structure Tuple}
-Powerset tuples, array tuples and structure tuples are specified in the
-same manner as in Chill programs refer to z200/88 chpt 5.2.5.
-@end itemize
-@item String Element Value
-A string element value is specified by @code{<string value>(<index>)},
-where @code{<index>} is a integer expression. It delivers a character
-value which is equivalent to the character indexed by @code{<index>} in
-the string.
+@node Built-In Func/Proc
+@subsubsection Built-in functions and procedures
+@cindex Modula-2 built-ins
-@item String Slice Value
-A string slice value is specified by @code{<string value>(<slice
-spec>)}, where @code{<slice spec>} can be either a range of integer
-expressions or specified by @code{<start expr> up <size>}.
-@code{<size>} denotes the number of elements which the slice contains.
-The delivered value is a string value, which is part of the specified
-string.
+Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
+In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
-@item Array Element Values
-An array element value is specified by @code{<array value>(<expr>)} and
-delivers a array element value of the mode of the specified array.
+@table @var
-@item Array Slice Values
-An array slice is specified by @code{<array value>(<slice spec>)}, where
-@code{<slice spec>} can be either a range specified by expressions or by
-@code{<start expr> up <size>}. @code{<size>} denotes the number of
-arrayelements the slice contains. The delivered value is an array value
-which is part of the specified array.
+@item a
+represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
-@item Structure Field Values
-A structure field value is derived by @code{<structure value>.<field
-name>}, where @code{<field name>} indicates the name of a field specified
-in the mode definition of the structure. The mode of the delivered value
-corresponds to this mode definition in the structure definition.
+@item c
+represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
-@item Procedure Call Value
-The procedure call value is derived from the return value of the
-procedure@footnote{If a procedure call is used for instance in an
-expression, then this procedure is called with all its side
-effects. This can lead to confusing results if used carelessly.}.
+@item i
+represents a variable or constant of integral type.
-Values of duration mode locations are represented by @code{ULONG} literals.
+@item m
+represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
+same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
+be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}).
-Values of time mode locations are represented by @code{TIME(<secs>:<nsecs>)}.
+@item n
+represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
-@ignore
-This is not implemented yet:
-@item Built-in Value
-@noindent
-The following built in functions are provided:
+@item r
+represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
-@table @code
-@item @code{ADDR()}
-@item @code{NUM()}
-@item @code{PRED()}
-@item @code{SUCC()}
-@item @code{ABS()}
-@item @code{CARD()}
-@item @code{MAX()}
-@item @code{MIN()}
-@item @code{SIZE()}
-@item @code{UPPER()}
-@item @code{LOWER()}
-@item @code{LENGTH()}
-@item @code{SIN()}
-@item @code{COS()}
-@item @code{TAN()}
-@item @code{ARCSIN()}
-@item @code{ARCCOS()}
-@item @code{ARCTAN()}
-@item @code{EXP()}
-@item @code{LN()}
-@item @code{LOG()}
-@item @code{SQRT()}
-@end table
+@item t
+represents a type.
-For a detailed description refer to the GNU Chill implementation manual
-chapter 1.6.
-@end ignore
+@item v
+represents a variable.
-@item Zero-adic Operator Value
-The zero-adic operator value is derived from the instance value for the
-current active process.
+@item x
+represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
+explanation of the function for details.
+@end table
-@item Expression Values
-The value delivered by an expression is the result of the evaluation of
-the specified expression. If there are error conditions (mode
-incompatibility, etc.) the evaluation of expressions is aborted with a
-corresponding error message. Expressions may be parenthesised which
-causes the evaluation of this expression before any other expression
-which uses the result of the parenthesised expression. The following
-operators are supported by @value{GDBN}:
+All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
@table @code
-@item @code{OR, ORIF, XOR}
-@itemx @code{AND, ANDIF}
-@itemx @code{NOT}
-Logical operators defined over operands of boolean mode.
+@item ABS(@var{n})
+Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
-@item @code{=, /=}
-Equality and inequality operators defined over all modes.
+@item CAP(@var{c})
+If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
+equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument.
-@item @code{>, >=}
-@itemx @code{<, <=}
-Relational operators defined over predefined modes.
+@item CHR(@var{i})
+Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
-@item @code{+, -}
-@itemx @code{*, /, MOD, REM}
-Arithmetic operators defined over predefined modes.
+@item DEC(@var{v})
+Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by one. Returns the new value.
-@item @code{-}
-Change sign operator.
+@item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
+Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
+new value.
-@item @code{//}
-String concatenation operator.
+@item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
+Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
+set.
-@item @code{()}
-String repetition operator.
+@item FLOAT(@var{i})
+Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
-@item @code{->}
-Referenced location operator which can be used either to take the
-address of a location (@code{->loc}), or to dereference a reference
-location (@code{loc->}).
+@item HIGH(@var{a})
+Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
-@item @code{OR, XOR}
-@itemx @code{AND}
-@itemx @code{NOT}
-Powerset and bitstring operators.
+@item INC(@var{v})
+Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by one. Returns the new value.
-@item @code{>, >=}
-@itemx @code{<, <=}
-Powerset inclusion operators.
+@item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
+Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
+new value.
-@item @code{IN}
-Membership operator.
-@end table
-@end table
+@item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
+Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
+there. Returns the new set.
-@node Chill type and range checks
-@subsubsection Chill type and range checks
+@item MAX(@var{t})
+Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
-@value{GDBN} considers two Chill variables mode equivalent if the sizes
-of the two modes are equal. This rule applies recursively to more
-complex datatypes which means that complex modes are treated
-equivalent if all element modes (which also can be complex modes like
-structures, arrays, etc.) have the same size.
+@item MIN(@var{t})
+Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
-Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
-index bounds and all built in procedures.
+@item ODD(@var{i})
+Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
-Strong type checks are forced using the @value{GDBN} command @code{set
-check strong}. This enforces strong type and range checks on all
-operations where Chill constructs are used (expressions, built in
-functions, etc.) in respect to the semantics as defined in the z.200
-language specification.
+@item ORD(@var{x})
+Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
+value of a character is its @sc{ascii} value (on machines supporting the
+@sc{ascii} character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
+integral, character and enumerated types.
-All checks can be disabled by the @value{GDBN} command @code{set check
-off}.
+@item SIZE(@var{x})
+Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
-@ignore
-@c Deviations from the Chill Standard Z200/88
-see last paragraph ?
-@end ignore
+@item TRUNC(@var{r})
+Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
-@node Chill defaults
-@subsubsection Chill defaults
+@item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
+Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
+@end table
+
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
+@value{GDBN} treats the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
+an error.
+@end quotation
+
+@cindex Modula-2 constants
+@node M2 Constants
+@subsubsection Constants
+
+@value{GDBN} allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
+ways:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+
+@item
+Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
+expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
+rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
+trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
+
+@item
+Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
+decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
+then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
+@samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
+digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
+digits.
+
+@item
+Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
+like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
+also be expressed by their ordinal value (their @sc{ascii} value, usually)
+followed by a @samp{C}.
+
+@item
+String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
+pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
+Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
+Constants, ,C and C@t{++} constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
+sequences.
+
+@item
+Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
+
+@item
+Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
+@code{FALSE}.
+
+@item
+Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
+
+@item
+Set constants are not yet supported.
+@end itemize
+
+@node M2 Defaults
+@subsubsection Modula-2 defaults
+@cindex Modula-2 defaults
If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
-Chill. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
+Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
selected the working language.
If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
-code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.ch} sets the
-working language to Chill. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
+code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} sets the
+working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
the language automatically}, for further details.
-@node Symbols
-@chapter Examining the Symbol Table
+@node Deviations
+@subsubsection Deviations from standard Modula-2
+@cindex Modula-2, deviations from
-The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
-symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
-program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
-does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
-program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
-(@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
-file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
+A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
+This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
-@cindex symbol names
-@cindex names of symbols
-@cindex quoting names
-Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
-characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
-most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
-source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
-are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
-ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
-@samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
-@samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
+integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
+debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
+pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
+through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
+returned a pointer.)
-@example
-p 'foo.c'::x
-@end example
+@item
+C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
+non-printable characters. @value{GDBN} prints out strings with these
+escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
+printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
-@noindent
-looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
+@item
+The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
+argument.
-@table @code
-@kindex info address
-@item info address @var{symbol}
-Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
-variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
-local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
-is always stored.
+@item
+All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
+@end itemize
-Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
-at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
-the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
+@node M2 Checks
+@subsubsection Modula-2 type and range checks
+@cindex Modula-2 checks
-@kindex whatis
-@item whatis @var{expr}
-Print the data type of expression @var{expr}. @var{expr} is not
-actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
-assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
-@xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} in this release, @value{GDBN} does not yet perform type or
+range checking.
+@end quotation
+@c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
-@item whatis
-Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
+@value{GDBN} considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
-@kindex ptype
-@item ptype @var{typename}
-Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
-the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form @samp{class
-@var{class-name}}, @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union
-@var{union-tag}} or @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
+@var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
-@item ptype @var{expr}
-@itemx ptype
-Print a description of the type of expression @var{expr}. @code{ptype}
-differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
-of just the name of the type.
+@item
+They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
+@sc{gnu} Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
+@end itemize
-For example, for this variable declaration:
+As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
+whose types are not equivalent is an error.
-@example
-struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
-@end example
+Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
+index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
-@noindent
-the two commands give this output:
+@node M2 Scope
+@subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
+@cindex scope
+@cindex @code{.}, Modula-2 scope operator
+@cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
+@ifinfo
+@vindex colon-colon@r{, in Modula-2}
+@c Info cannot handle :: but TeX can.
+@end ifinfo
+@iftex
+@vindex ::@r{, in Modula-2}
+@end iftex
+
+There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
+(@code{.}) and the @value{GDBN} scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
+similar syntax:
@example
-@group
-(@value{GDBP}) whatis v
-type = struct complex
-(@value{GDBP}) ptype v
-type = struct complex @{
- double real;
- double imag;
-@}
-@end group
+
+@var{module} . @var{id}
+@var{scope} :: @var{id}
@end example
@noindent
-As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
-the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
-
-@kindex info types
-@item info types @var{regexp}
-@itemx info types
-Print a brief description of all types whose names match @var{regexp}
-(or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
-complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
-@samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
-names include the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
-information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
+where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
+@var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
+identifier within your program, except another module.
-This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
-@code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
-lists all source files where a type is defined.
+Using the @code{::} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the scope
+specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
+found in the specified scope, then @value{GDBN} searches all scopes
+enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
-@kindex info source
-@item info source
-Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
-the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
-it was written in.
+Using the @code{.} operator makes @value{GDBN} search the current scope for
+the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
+definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
+an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
+module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
+@var{module}.
-@kindex info sources
-@item info sources
-Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
-debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
-have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
+@node GDB/M2
+@subsubsection @value{GDBN} and Modula-2
+
+Some @value{GDBN} commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
+Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
+specifically to C and C@t{++}: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
+@samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
+apply to C@t{++}, and the last to the C @code{union} type, which has no direct
+analogue in Modula-2.
+
+The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
+with any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
+intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
+created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C@t{++}. However, because an
+address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
+@samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful.
+
+@cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
+In @value{GDBN} scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
+interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
+
+@node Chill
+@subsection Chill
+
+The extensions made to @value{GDBN} to support Chill only support output
+from the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler. Other Chill compilers are not currently
+supported, and attempting to debug executables produced by them is most
+likely to give an error as @value{GDBN} reads in the executable's symbol
+table.
+
+@c This used to say "... following Chill related topics ...", but since
+@c menus are not shown in the printed manual, it would look awkward.
+This section covers the Chill related topics and the features
+of @value{GDBN} which support these topics.
+
+@menu
+* How modes are displayed:: How modes are displayed
+* Locations:: Locations and their accesses
+* Values and their Operations:: Values and their Operations
+* Chill type and range checks::
+* Chill defaults::
+@end menu
+
+@node How modes are displayed
+@subsubsection How modes are displayed
+
+The Chill Datatype- (Mode) support of @value{GDBN} is directly related
+with the functionality of the @sc{gnu} Chill compiler, and therefore deviates
+slightly from the standard specification of the Chill language. The
+provided modes are:
+
+@c FIXME: this @table's contents effectively disable @code by using @r
+@c on every @item. So why does it need @code?
+@table @code
+@item @r{@emph{Discrete modes:}}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Integer Modes} which are predefined by @code{BYTE, UBYTE, INT,
+UINT, LONG, ULONG},
+@item
+@emph{Boolean Mode} which is predefined by @code{BOOL},
+@item
+@emph{Character Mode} which is predefined by @code{CHAR},
+@item
+@emph{Set Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{SET}.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
+type = SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
+@end smallexample
+If the type is an unnumbered set the set element values are omitted.
+@item
+@emph{Range Mode} which is displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{type = <basemode>(<lower bound> : <upper bound>)}
+@end smallexample
+where @code{<lower bound>, <upper bound>} can be of any discrete literal
+expression (e.g. set element names).
+@end itemize
+
+@item @r{@emph{Powerset Mode:}}
+A Powerset Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{POWERSET} followed by
+the member mode of the powerset. The member mode can be any discrete mode.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
+type = POWERSET SET (egon, hugo, otto)
+@end smallexample
+
+@item @r{@emph{Reference Modes:}}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Bound Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{REF}
+followed by the mode name to which the reference is bound.
+@item
+@emph{Free Reference Mode} which is displayed by the keyword @code{PTR}.
+@end itemize
+
+@item @r{@emph{Procedure mode}}
+The procedure mode is displayed by @code{type = PROC(<parameter list>)
+<return mode> EXCEPTIONS (<exception list>)}. The @code{<parameter
+list>} is a list of the parameter modes. @code{<return mode>} indicates
+the mode of the result of the procedure if any. The exceptionlist lists
+all possible exceptions which can be raised by the procedure.
+
+@ignore
+@item @r{@emph{Instance mode}}
+The instance mode is represented by a structure, which has a static
+type, and is therefore not really of interest.
+@end ignore
+
+@item @r{@emph{Synchronization Modes:}}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Event Mode} which is displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{EVENT (<event length>)}
+@end smallexample
+where @code{(<event length>)} is optional.
+@item
+@emph{Buffer Mode} which is displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{BUFFER (<buffer length>)<buffer element mode>}
+@end smallexample
+where @code{(<buffer length>)} is optional.
+@end itemize
+
+@item @r{@emph{Timing Modes:}}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Duration Mode} which is predefined by @code{DURATION}
+@item
+@emph{Absolute Time Mode} which is predefined by @code{TIME}
+@end itemize
+
+@item @r{@emph{Real Modes:}}
+Real Modes are predefined with @code{REAL} and @code{LONG_REAL}.
+
+@item @r{@emph{String Modes:}}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Character String Mode} which is displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{CHARS(<string length>)}
+@end smallexample
+followed by the keyword @code{VARYING} if the String Mode is a varying
+mode
+@item
+@emph{Bit String Mode} which is displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{BOOLS(<string
+length>)}
+@end smallexample
+@end itemize
+
+@item @r{@emph{Array Mode:}}
+The Array Mode is displayed by the keyword @code{ARRAY(<range>)}
+followed by the element mode (which may in turn be an array mode).
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) ptype x
+type = ARRAY (1:42)
+ ARRAY (1:20)
+ SET (karli = 10, susi = 20, fritzi = 100)
+@end smallexample
+
+@item @r{@emph{Structure Mode}}
+The Structure mode is displayed by the keyword @code{STRUCT(<field
+list>)}. The @code{<field list>} consists of names and modes of fields
+of the structure. Variant structures have the keyword @code{CASE <field>
+OF <variant fields> ESAC} in their field list. Since the current version
+of the GNU Chill compiler doesn't implement tag processing (no runtime
+checks of variant fields, and therefore no debugging info), the output
+always displays all variant fields.
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) ptype str
+type = STRUCT (
+ as x,
+ bs x,
+ CASE bs OF
+ (karli):
+ cs a
+ (ott):
+ ds x
+ ESAC
+)
+@end smallexample
+@end table
+
+@node Locations
+@subsubsection Locations and their accesses
+
+A location in Chill is an object which can contain values.
+
+A value of a location is generally accessed by the (declared) name of
+the location. The output conforms to the specification of values in
+Chill programs. How values are specified
+is the topic of the next section, @ref{Values and their Operations}.
+
+The pseudo-location @code{RESULT} (or @code{result}) can be used to
+display or change the result of a currently-active procedure:
+
+@smallexample
+set result := EXPR
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+This does the same as the Chill action @code{RESULT EXPR} (which
+is not available in @value{GDBN}).
+
+Values of reference mode locations are printed by @code{PTR(<hex
+value>)} in case of a free reference mode, and by @code{(REF <reference
+mode>) (<hex-value>)} in case of a bound reference. @code{<hex value>}
+represents the address where the reference points to. To access the
+value of the location referenced by the pointer, use the dereference
+operator @samp{->}.
+
+Values of procedure mode locations are displayed by
+@smallexample
+@code{@{ PROC
+(<argument modes> ) <return mode> @} <address> <name of procedure
+location>}
+@end smallexample
+@code{<argument modes>} is a list of modes according to the parameter
+specification of the procedure and @code{<address>} shows the address of
+the entry point.
+
+@ignore
+Locations of instance modes are displayed just like a structure with two
+fields specifying the @emph{process type} and the @emph{copy number} of
+the investigated instance location@footnote{This comes from the current
+implementation of instances. They are implemented as a structure (no
+na). The output should be something like @code{[<name of the process>;
+<instance number>]}.}. The field names are @code{__proc_type} and
+@code{__proc_copy}.
+
+Locations of synchronization modes are displayed like a structure with
+the field name @code{__event_data} in case of a event mode location, and
+like a structure with the field @code{__buffer_data} in case of a buffer
+mode location (refer to previous paragraph).
+
+Structure Mode locations are printed by @code{[.<field name>: <value>,
+...]}. The @code{<field name>} corresponds to the structure mode
+definition and the layout of @code{<value>} varies depending of the mode
+of the field. If the investigated structure mode location is of variant
+structure mode, the variant parts of the structure are enclosed in curled
+braces (@samp{@{@}}). Fields enclosed by @samp{@{,@}} are residing
+on the same memory location and represent the current values of the
+memory location in their specific modes. Since no tag processing is done
+all variants are displayed. A variant field is printed by
+@code{(<variant name>) = .<field name>: <value>}. (who implements the
+stuff ???)
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) print str1 $4 = [.as: 0, .bs: karli, .<TAG>: { (karli) =
+[.cs: []], (susi) = [.ds: susi]}]
+@end smallexample
+@end ignore
+
+Substructures of string mode-, array mode- or structure mode-values
+(e.g. array slices, fields of structure locations) are accessed using
+certain operations which are described in the next section, @ref{Values
+and their Operations}.
+
+A location value may be interpreted as having a different mode using the
+location conversion. This mode conversion is written as @code{<mode
+name>(<location>)}. The user has to consider that the sizes of the modes
+have to be equal otherwise an error occurs. Furthermore, no range
+checking of the location against the destination mode is performed, and
+therefore the result can be quite confusing.
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) print int (s(3 up 4)) XXX TO be filled in !! XXX
+@end smallexample
+
+@node Values and their Operations
+@subsubsection Values and their Operations
+
+Values are used to alter locations, to investigate complex structures in
+more detail or to filter relevant information out of a large amount of
+data. There are several (mode dependent) operations defined which enable
+such investigations. These operations are not only applicable to
+constant values but also to locations, which can become quite useful
+when debugging complex structures. During parsing the command line
+(e.g. evaluating an expression) @value{GDBN} treats location names as
+the values behind these locations.
+
+This section describes how values have to be specified and which
+operations are legal to be used with such values.
+
+@table @code
+@item Literal Values
+Literal values are specified in the same manner as in @sc{gnu} Chill programs.
+For detailed specification refer to the @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual
+chapter 1.5.
+@c FIXME: if the Chill Manual is a Texinfo documents, the above should
+@c be converted to a @ref.
+
+@ignore
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@emph{Integer Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
+programs (refer to the Chill Standard z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.2)
+@item
+@emph{Boolean Literals} are defined by @code{TRUE} and @code{FALSE}.
+@item
+@emph{Character Literals} are defined by @code{'<character>'}. (e.g.
+@code{'M'})
+@item
+@emph{Set Literals} are defined by a name which was specified in a set
+mode. The value delivered by a Set Literal is the set value. This is
+comparable to an enumeration in C/C@t{++} language.
+@item
+@emph{Emptiness Literal} is predefined by @code{NULL}. The value of the
+emptiness literal delivers either the empty reference value, the empty
+procedure value or the empty instance value.
+
+@item
+@emph{Character String Literals} are defined by a sequence of characters
+enclosed in single- or double quotes. If a single- or double quote has
+to be part of the string literal it has to be stuffed (specified twice).
+@item
+@emph{Bitstring Literals} are specified in the same manner as in Chill
+programs (refer z200/88 chpt 5.2.4.8).
+@item
+@emph{Floating point literals} are specified in the same manner as in
+(gnu-)Chill programs (refer @sc{gnu} Chill implementation Manual chapter 1.5).
+@end itemize
+@end ignore
+
+@item Tuple Values
+A tuple is specified by @code{<mode name>[<tuple>]}, where @code{<mode
+name>} can be omitted if the mode of the tuple is unambiguous. This
+unambiguity is derived from the context of a evaluated expression.
+@code{<tuple>} can be one of the following:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item @emph{Powerset Tuple}
+@item @emph{Array Tuple}
+@item @emph{Structure Tuple}
+Powerset tuples, array tuples and structure tuples are specified in the
+same manner as in Chill programs refer to z200/88 chpt 5.2.5.
+@end itemize
+
+@item String Element Value
+A string element value is specified by
+@smallexample
+@code{<string value>(<index>)}
+@end smallexample
+where @code{<index>} is a integer expression. It delivers a character
+value which is equivalent to the character indexed by @code{<index>} in
+the string.
+
+@item String Slice Value
+A string slice value is specified by @code{<string value>(<slice
+spec>)}, where @code{<slice spec>} can be either a range of integer
+expressions or specified by @code{<start expr> up <size>}.
+@code{<size>} denotes the number of elements which the slice contains.
+The delivered value is a string value, which is part of the specified
+string.
+
+@item Array Element Values
+An array element value is specified by @code{<array value>(<expr>)} and
+delivers a array element value of the mode of the specified array.
+
+@item Array Slice Values
+An array slice is specified by @code{<array value>(<slice spec>)}, where
+@code{<slice spec>} can be either a range specified by expressions or by
+@code{<start expr> up <size>}. @code{<size>} denotes the number of
+arrayelements the slice contains. The delivered value is an array value
+which is part of the specified array.
+
+@item Structure Field Values
+A structure field value is derived by @code{<structure value>.<field
+name>}, where @code{<field name>} indicates the name of a field specified
+in the mode definition of the structure. The mode of the delivered value
+corresponds to this mode definition in the structure definition.
+
+@item Procedure Call Value
+The procedure call value is derived from the return value of the
+procedure@footnote{If a procedure call is used for instance in an
+expression, then this procedure is called with all its side
+effects. This can lead to confusing results if used carelessly.}.
+
+Values of duration mode locations are represented by @code{ULONG} literals.
+
+Values of time mode locations appear as
+@smallexample
+@code{TIME(<secs>:<nsecs>)}
+@end smallexample
+
+
+@ignore
+This is not implemented yet:
+@item Built-in Value
+@noindent
+The following built in functions are provided:
+
+@table @code
+@item @code{ADDR()}
+@item @code{NUM()}
+@item @code{PRED()}
+@item @code{SUCC()}
+@item @code{ABS()}
+@item @code{CARD()}
+@item @code{MAX()}
+@item @code{MIN()}
+@item @code{SIZE()}
+@item @code{UPPER()}
+@item @code{LOWER()}
+@item @code{LENGTH()}
+@item @code{SIN()}
+@item @code{COS()}
+@item @code{TAN()}
+@item @code{ARCSIN()}
+@item @code{ARCCOS()}
+@item @code{ARCTAN()}
+@item @code{EXP()}
+@item @code{LN()}
+@item @code{LOG()}
+@item @code{SQRT()}
+@end table
+
+For a detailed description refer to the GNU Chill implementation manual
+chapter 1.6.
+@end ignore
+
+@item Zero-adic Operator Value
+The zero-adic operator value is derived from the instance value for the
+current active process.
+
+@item Expression Values
+The value delivered by an expression is the result of the evaluation of
+the specified expression. If there are error conditions (mode
+incompatibility, etc.) the evaluation of expressions is aborted with a
+corresponding error message. Expressions may be parenthesised which
+causes the evaluation of this expression before any other expression
+which uses the result of the parenthesised expression. The following
+operators are supported by @value{GDBN}:
+
+@table @code
+@item @code{OR, ORIF, XOR}
+@itemx @code{AND, ANDIF}
+@itemx @code{NOT}
+Logical operators defined over operands of boolean mode.
+
+@item @code{=, /=}
+Equality and inequality operators defined over all modes.
+
+@item @code{>, >=}
+@itemx @code{<, <=}
+Relational operators defined over predefined modes.
+
+@item @code{+, -}
+@itemx @code{*, /, MOD, REM}
+Arithmetic operators defined over predefined modes.
+
+@item @code{-}
+Change sign operator.
+
+@item @code{//}
+String concatenation operator.
+
+@item @code{()}
+String repetition operator.
+
+@item @code{->}
+Referenced location operator which can be used either to take the
+address of a location (@code{->loc}), or to dereference a reference
+location (@code{loc->}).
+
+@item @code{OR, XOR}
+@itemx @code{AND}
+@itemx @code{NOT}
+Powerset and bitstring operators.
+
+@item @code{>, >=}
+@itemx @code{<, <=}
+Powerset inclusion operators.
+
+@item @code{IN}
+Membership operator.
+@end table
+@end table
+
+@node Chill type and range checks
+@subsubsection Chill type and range checks
+
+@value{GDBN} considers two Chill variables mode equivalent if the sizes
+of the two modes are equal. This rule applies recursively to more
+complex datatypes which means that complex modes are treated
+equivalent if all element modes (which also can be complex modes like
+structures, arrays, etc.) have the same size.
+
+Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
+index bounds and all built in procedures.
+
+Strong type checks are forced using the @value{GDBN} command @code{set
+check strong}. This enforces strong type and range checks on all
+operations where Chill constructs are used (expressions, built in
+functions, etc.) in respect to the semantics as defined in the z.200
+language specification.
+
+All checks can be disabled by the @value{GDBN} command @code{set check
+off}.
+
+@ignore
+@c Deviations from the Chill Standard Z200/88
+see last paragraph ?
+@end ignore
+
+@node Chill defaults
+@subsubsection Chill defaults
+
+If type and range checking are set automatically by @value{GDBN}, they
+both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
+Chill. This happens regardless of whether you or @value{GDBN}
+selected the working language.
+
+If you allow @value{GDBN} to set the language automatically, then entering
+code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.ch} sets the
+working language to Chill. @xref{Automatically, ,Having @value{GDBN} set
+the language automatically}, for further details.
+
+@node Symbols
+@chapter Examining the Symbol Table
+
+The commands described in this chapter allow you to inquire about the
+symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
+program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
+does not change as your program executes. @value{GDBN} finds it in your
+program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started @value{GDBN}
+(@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing files}), or by one of the
+file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}).
+
+@cindex symbol names
+@cindex names of symbols
+@cindex quoting names
+Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
+characters, which @value{GDBN} ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
+most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
+source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program variables}). File names
+are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but @value{GDBN} would
+ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
+@samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow @value{GDBN} to recognize
+@samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
+
+@example
+p 'foo.c'::x
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
+
+@table @code
+@kindex info address
+@cindex address of a symbol
+@item info address @var{symbol}
+Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
+variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
+local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
+is always stored.
+
+Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
+at all for a register variable, and for a stack local variable prints
+the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
+
+@kindex info symbol
+@cindex symbol from address
+@item info symbol @var{addr}
+Print the name of a symbol which is stored at the address @var{addr}.
+If no symbol is stored exactly at @var{addr}, @value{GDBN} prints the
+nearest symbol and an offset from it:
+
+@example
+(@value{GDBP}) info symbol 0x54320
+_initialize_vx + 396 in section .text
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+This is the opposite of the @code{info address} command. You can use
+it to find out the name of a variable or a function given its address.
+
+@kindex whatis
+@item whatis @var{expr}
+Print the data type of expression @var{expr}. @var{expr} is not
+actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
+assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
+@xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
+
+@item whatis
+Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
+
+@kindex ptype
+@item ptype @var{typename}
+Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
+the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form @samp{class
+@var{class-name}}, @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union
+@var{union-tag}} or @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
+
+@item ptype @var{expr}
+@itemx ptype
+Print a description of the type of expression @var{expr}. @code{ptype}
+differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
+of just the name of the type.
+
+For example, for this variable declaration:
+
+@example
+struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+the two commands give this output:
+
+@example
+@group
+(@value{GDBP}) whatis v
+type = struct complex
+(@value{GDBP}) ptype v
+type = struct complex @{
+ double real;
+ double imag;
+@}
+@end group
+@end example
+
+@noindent
+As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
+the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
+
+@kindex info types
+@item info types @var{regexp}
+@itemx info types
+Print a brief description of all types whose names match @var{regexp}
+(or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
+complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
+@samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
+names include the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
+information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
+
+This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
+@code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
+lists all source files where a type is defined.
+
+@kindex info scope
+@cindex local variables
+@item info scope @var{addr}
+List all the variables local to a particular scope. This command
+accepts a location---a function name, a source line, or an address
+preceded by a @samp{*}, and prints all the variables local to the
+scope defined by that location. For example:
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) @b{info scope command_line_handler}
+Scope for command_line_handler:
+Symbol rl is an argument at stack/frame offset 8, length 4.
+Symbol linebuffer is in static storage at address 0x150a18, length 4.
+Symbol linelength is in static storage at address 0x150a1c, length 4.
+Symbol p is a local variable in register $esi, length 4.
+Symbol p1 is a local variable in register $ebx, length 4.
+Symbol nline is a local variable in register $edx, length 4.
+Symbol repeat is a local variable at frame offset -8, length 4.
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+This command is especially useful for determining what data to collect
+during a @dfn{trace experiment}, see @ref{Tracepoint Actions,
+collect}.
+
+@kindex info source
+@item info source
+Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
+the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
+it was written in.
+
+@kindex info sources
+@item info sources
+Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
+debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
+have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
@kindex info functions
@item info functions
whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
-start with @code{step}.
+start with @code{step}. If a function name contains characters
+that conflict with the regular expression language (eg.
+@samp{operator*()}), they may be quoted with a backslash.
@kindex info variables
@item info variables
@item info methods
@itemx info methods @var{regexp}
The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
-methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
-specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
-C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
+methods within C@t{++} program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
+specific set of methods found in the various C@t{++} classes. Many
+C@t{++} classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
@code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
object file with a particular name is seen again.
@item set symbol-reloading off
-Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
-the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
-system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
-@code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN} may discard symbols
-when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
-different directories or libraries) with the same name.
+Do not replace symbol definitions when encountering object files of the
+same name more than once. This is the default state; if you are not
+running on a system that permits automatic relinking of modules, you
+should leave @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise @value{GDBN}
+may discard symbols when linking large programs, that may contain
+several modules (from different directories or libraries) with the same
+name.
@kindex show symbol-reloading
@item show symbol-reloading
@noindent
stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
-value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
+value of the assignment expression (which is 4).
@xref{Languages, ,Using @value{GDBN} with Different Languages}, for more
information on operators in supported languages.
(@value{GDBP}) p g
$1 = 1
(@value{GDBP}) set g=4
-(gdb) p g
+(@value{GDBP}) p g
$2 = 1
(@value{GDBP}) r
The program being debugged has been started already.
Start it from the beginning? (y or n) y
Starting program: /home/smith/cc_progs/a.out
-"/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols: Invalid bfd target.
+"/home/smith/cc_progs/a.out": can't open to read symbols:
+ Invalid bfd target.
(@value{GDBP}) show g
The current BFD target is "=4".
@end group
You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
-with @code{void} returned values. If the result is not void, it
-is printed and saved in the value history.
+with @code{void} returned values. If the result is not void, it
+is printed and saved in the value history.
-For the A29K, a user-controlled variable @code{call_scratch_address},
-specifies the location of a scratch area to be used when @value{GDBN}
-calls a function in the target. This is necessary because the usual
-method of putting the scratch area on the stack does not work in systems
-that have separate instruction and data spaces.
+@c OBSOLETE For the A29K, a user-controlled variable @code{call_scratch_address},
+@c OBSOLETE specifies the location of a scratch area to be used when @value{GDBN}
+@c OBSOLETE calls a function in the target. This is necessary because the usual
+@c OBSOLETE method of putting the scratch area on the stack does not work in systems
+@c OBSOLETE that have separate instruction and data spaces.
@node Patching
@section Patching programs
Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
-directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory,
-@value{GDBN} uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of
-directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a program
-to run. You can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN}
+directory and the file is not found in the @value{GDBN} working directory,
+@value{GDBN} uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of
+directories to search, just as the shell does when looking for a program
+to run. You can change the value of this variable, for both @value{GDBN}
and your program, using the @code{path} command.
-On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary file
+On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary file named
@file{@var{filename}.syms} may hold symbol table information for
@var{filename}. If so, @value{GDBN} maps in the symbol table from
@file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
descriptions of the file options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow}
(available on the command line, and with the commands @code{file},
-@code{symbol-file}, or @code{add-symbol-file}, described below),
+@code{symbol-file}, or @code{add-symbol-file}, described below),
for more information.
@item file
@code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out @value{GDBN} information on your
program's symbol table.
-The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents
+The @code{symbol-file} command causes @value{GDBN} to forget the contents
of its convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
You can override the @value{GDBN} two-stage strategy for reading symbol
tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
load symbol table information, if you want to be sure @value{GDBN} has the
-entire symbol table available.
+entire symbol table available.
If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
@code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
@cindex dynamic linking
@item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
@itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
-The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
-from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
-has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
-is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
-file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure this out for itself.
-You can specify @var{address} as an expression.
+@itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @r{-s}@var{section} @var{address} @dots{}
+The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table
+information from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command
+when @var{filename} has been dynamically loaded (by some other means)
+into the program that is running. @var{address} should be the memory
+address at which the file has been loaded; @value{GDBN} cannot figure
+this out for itself. You can additionally specify an arbitrary number
+of @samp{@r{-s}@var{section} @var{address}} pairs, to give an explicit
+section name and base address for that section. You can specify any
+@var{address} as an expression.
The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
-@code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
-read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
-use the @code{symbol-file} command.
+@code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data
+thus read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data
+instead, use the @code{symbol-file} command without any arguments.
+
+@cindex relocatable object files, reading symbols from
+@cindex object files, relocatable, reading symbols from
+@cindex reading symbols from relocatable object files
+@cindex symbols, reading from relocatable object files
+@cindex @file{.o} files, reading symbols from
+Although @var{filename} is typically a shared library file, an
+executable file, or some other object file which has been fully
+relocated for loading into a process, you can also load symbolic
+information from relocatable @file{.o} files, as long as:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+the file's symbolic information refers only to linker symbols defined in
+that file, not to symbols defined by other object files,
+@item
+every section the file's symbolic information refers to has actually
+been loaded into the inferior, as it appears in the file, and
+@item
+you can determine the address at which every section was loaded, and
+provide these to the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
+@end itemize
+
+@noindent
+Some embedded operating systems, like Sun Chorus and VxWorks, can load
+relocatable files into an already running program; such systems
+typically make the requirements above easy to meet. However, it's
+important to recognize that many native systems use complex link
+procedures (@code{.linkonce} section factoring and C++ constructor table
+assembly, for example) that make the requirements difficult to meet. In
+general, one cannot assume that using @code{add-symbol-file} to read a
+relocatable object file's symbolic information will have the same effect
+as linking the relocatable object file into the program in the normal
+way.
@code{add-symbol-file} does not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
@kindex add-shared-symbol-file
@item add-shared-symbol-file
The @code{add-shared-symbol-file} command can be used only under Harris' CXUX
-operating system for the Motorola 88k. @value{GDBN} automatically looks for
-shared libraries, however if @value{GDBN} does not find yours, you can run
+operating system for the Motorola 88k. @value{GDBN} automatically looks for
+shared libraries, however if @value{GDBN} does not find yours, you can run
@code{add-shared-symbol-file}. It takes no arguments.
@kindex section
@item section
-The @code{section} command changes the base address of section SECTION of
-the exec file to ADDR. This can be used if the exec file does not contain
-section addresses, (such as in the a.out format), or when the addresses
-specified in the file itself are wrong. Each section must be changed
+The @code{section} command changes the base address of section SECTION of
+the exec file to ADDR. This can be used if the exec file does not contain
+section addresses, (such as in the a.out format), or when the addresses
+specified in the file itself are wrong. Each section must be changed
separately. The @code{info files} command, described below, lists all
the sections and their addresses.
command @code{help target} lists all possible targets rather than
current ones.
+@kindex maint info sections
+@item maint info sections
+Another command that can give you extra information about program sections
+is @code{maint info sections}. In addition to the section information
+displayed by @code{info files}, this command displays the flags and file
+offset of each section in the executable and core dump files. In addition,
+@code{maint info sections} provides the following command options (which
+may be arbitrarily combined):
+
+@table @code
+@item ALLOBJ
+Display sections for all loaded object files, including shared libraries.
+@item @var{sections}
+Display info only for named @var{sections}.
+@item @var{section-flags}
+Display info only for sections for which @var{section-flags} are true.
+The section flags that @value{GDBN} currently knows about are:
+@table @code
+@item ALLOC
+Section will have space allocated in the process when loaded.
+Set for all sections except those containing debug information.
+@item LOAD
+Section will be loaded from the file into the child process memory.
+Set for pre-initialized code and data, clear for @code{.bss} sections.
+@item RELOC
+Section needs to be relocated before loading.
+@item READONLY
+Section cannot be modified by the child process.
+@item CODE
+Section contains executable code only.
+@item DATA
+Section contains data only (no executable code).
+@item ROM
+Section will reside in ROM.
+@item CONSTRUCTOR
+Section contains data for constructor/destructor lists.
+@item HAS_CONTENTS
+Section is not empty.
+@item NEVER_LOAD
+An instruction to the linker to not output the section.
+@item COFF_SHARED_LIBRARY
+A notification to the linker that the section contains
+COFF shared library information.
+@item IS_COMMON
+Section contains common symbols.
+@end table
+@end table
@end table
All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
@c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared
@c FIXME...lib; check this from time to time when updating manual
+There are times, however, when you may wish to not automatically load
+symbol definitions from shared libraries, such as when they are
+particularly large or there are many of them.
+
+To control the automatic loading of shared library symbols, use the
+commands:
+
+@table @code
+@kindex set auto-solib-add
+@item set auto-solib-add @var{mode}
+If @var{mode} is @code{on}, symbols from all shared object libraries
+will be loaded automatically when the inferior begins execution, you
+attach to an independently started inferior, or when the dynamic linker
+informs @value{GDBN} that a new library has been loaded. If @var{mode}
+is @code{off}, symbols must be loaded manually, using the
+@code{sharedlibrary} command. The default value is @code{on}.
+
+@kindex show auto-solib-add
+@item show auto-solib-add
+Display the current autoloading mode.
+@end table
+
+To explicitly load shared library symbols, use the @code{sharedlibrary}
+command:
+
@table @code
@kindex info sharedlibrary
@kindex info share
loaded.
@end table
-On HP-UX systems, @value{GDBN} detects the loading of a shared library
-and automatically reads in symbols from the newly loaded library, up to
-a threshold that is initially set but that you can modify if you wish.
+On some systems, such as HP-UX systems, @value{GDBN} supports
+autoloading shared library symbols until a limiting threshold size is
+reached. This provides the benefit of allowing autoloading to remain on
+by default, but avoids autoloading excessively large shared libraries,
+up to a threshold that is initially set, but which you can modify if you
+wish.
Beyond that threshold, symbols from shared libraries must be explicitly
loaded. To load these symbols, use the command @code{sharedlibrary
To display or set the threshold, use the commands:
@table @code
-@kindex set auto-solib-add
-@item set auto-solib-add @var{threshold}
-Set the autoloading size threshold, in megabytes. If @var{threshold} is
-nonzero, symbols from all shared object libraries will be loaded
-automatically when the inferior begins execution or when the dynamic
-linker informs @value{GDBN} that a new library has been loaded, until
-the symbol table of the program and libraries exceeds this threshold.
+@kindex set auto-solib-limit
+@item set auto-solib-limit @var{threshold}
+Set the autoloading size threshold, in an integral number of megabytes.
+If @var{threshold} is nonzero and shared library autoloading is enabled,
+symbols from all shared object libraries will be loaded until the total
+size of the loaded shared library symbols exceeds this threshold.
Otherwise, symbols must be loaded manually, using the
-@code{sharedlibrary} command. The default threshold is 100 megabytes.
+@code{sharedlibrary} command. The default threshold is 100 (i.e. 100
+Mb).
-@kindex show auto-solib-add
-@item show auto-solib-add
+@kindex show auto-solib-limit
+@item show auto-solib-limit
Display the current autoloading size threshold, in megabytes.
@end table
@value{GDBN} could not find the full definition for a struct or class.
@item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
-The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
+The symbol information for a C@t{++} member function is missing some
information that recent versions of the compiler should have output for
it.
@kindex set gnutarget
@item set gnutarget @var{args}
-@value{GDBN} uses its own library BFD to read your files. @value{GDBN}
+@value{GDBN} uses its own library BFD to read your files. @value{GDBN}
knows whether it is reading an @dfn{executable},
-a @dfn{core}, or a @dfn{.o} file; however, you can specify the file format
-with the @code{set gnutarget} command. Unlike most @code{target} commands,
+a @dfn{core}, or a @dfn{.o} file; however, you can specify the file format
+with the @code{set gnutarget} command. Unlike most @code{target} commands,
with @code{gnutarget} the @code{target} refers to a program, not a machine.
@quotation
@noindent
@xref{Files, , Commands to specify files}.
-@kindex show gnutarget
+@kindex show gnutarget
@item show gnutarget
Use the @code{show gnutarget} command to display what file format
@code{gnutarget} is set to read. If you have not set @code{gnutarget},
@kindex target sim
@item target sim
-Builtin CPU simulator. GDB includes simulators for most architectures.
+Builtin CPU simulator. @value{GDBN} includes simulators for most architectures.
In general,
@example
target sim
@end table
-Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN};
+Different targets are available on different configurations of @value{GDBN};
your configuration may have more or fewer targets.
Many remote targets require you to download the executable's code
@cindex choosing target byte order
@cindex target byte order
-@kindex set endian big
-@kindex set endian little
-@kindex set endian auto
-@kindex show endian
Some types of processors, such as the MIPS, PowerPC, and Hitachi SH,
offer the ability to run either big-endian or little-endian byte
@cindex remote debugging
If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
-@value{GDBN} in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
-For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel,
+@value{GDBN} in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging.
+For example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel,
or on a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
Some configurations of @value{GDBN} have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
-@value{GDBN} comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to @value{GDBN},
+@value{GDBN} comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to @value{GDBN},
but not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
write the remote stubs---the code that runs on the remote system to
communicate with @value{GDBN}.
-Other remote targets may be available in your
-configuration of @value{GDBN}; use @code{help target} to list them.
+Other remote targets may be available in your
+configuration of @value{GDBN}; use @code{help target} to list them.
+
+@node KOD
+@section Kernel Object Display
+
+@cindex kernel object display
+@cindex kernel object
+@cindex KOD
+
+Some targets support kernel object display. Using this facility,
+@value{GDBN} communicates specially with the underlying operating system
+and can display information about operating system-level objects such as
+mutexes and other synchronization objects. Exactly which objects can be
+displayed is determined on a per-OS basis.
+
+Use the @code{set os} command to set the operating system. This tells
+@value{GDBN} which kernel object display module to initialize:
+
+@example
+(@value{GDBP}) set os cisco
+@end example
+
+If @code{set os} succeeds, @value{GDBN} will display some information
+about the operating system, and will create a new @code{info} command
+which can be used to query the target. The @code{info} command is named
+after the operating system:
+
+@example
+(@value{GDBP}) info cisco
+List of Cisco Kernel Objects
+Object Description
+any Any and all objects
+@end example
+
+Further subcommands can be used to query about particular objects known
+by the kernel.
+
+There is currently no way to determine whether a given operating system
+is supported other than to try it.
+
+
+@node Remote Debugging
+@chapter Debugging remote programs
+
+@menu
+* Server:: Using the gdbserver program
+* NetWare:: Using the gdbserve.nlm program
+* remote stub:: Implementing a remote stub
+@end menu
+
+@node Server
+@section Using the @code{gdbserver} program
+
+@kindex gdbserver
+@cindex remote connection without stubs
+@code{gdbserver} is a control program for Unix-like systems, which
+allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
+@code{target remote}---but without linking in the usual debugging stub.
+
+@code{gdbserver} is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
+because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
+that @value{GDBN} itself does. In fact, a system that can run
+@code{gdbserver} to connect to a remote @value{GDBN} could also run
+@value{GDBN} locally! @code{gdbserver} is sometimes useful nevertheless,
+because it is a much smaller program than @value{GDBN} itself. It is
+also easier to port than all of @value{GDBN}, so you may be able to get
+started more quickly on a new system by using @code{gdbserver}.
+Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you may find that
+the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it more convenient to
+do as much development work as possible on another system, for example
+by cross-compiling. You can use @code{gdbserver} to make a similar
+choice for debugging.
+
+@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserver} communicate via either a serial line
+or a TCP connection, using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial
+protocol.
+
+@table @emph
+@item On the target machine,
+you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
+@code{gdbserver} does not need your program's symbol table, so you can
+strip the program if necessary to save space. @value{GDBN} on the host
+system does all the symbol handling.
+
+To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with @value{GDBN};
+the name of your program; and the arguments for your program. The
+syntax is:
+
+@smallexample
+target> gdbserver @var{comm} @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
+@end smallexample
+
+@var{comm} is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
+hostname and portnumber. For example, to debug Emacs with the argument
+@samp{foo.txt} and communicate with @value{GDBN} over the serial port
+@file{/dev/com1}:
+
+@smallexample
+target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt
+@end smallexample
+
+@code{gdbserver} waits passively for the host @value{GDBN} to communicate
+with it.
+
+To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:
+
+@smallexample
+target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt
+@end smallexample
+
+The only difference from the previous example is the first argument,
+specifying that you are communicating with the host @value{GDBN} via
+TCP. The @samp{host:2345} argument means that @code{gdbserver} is to
+expect a TCP connection from machine @samp{host} to local TCP port 2345.
+(Currently, the @samp{host} part is ignored.) You can choose any number
+you want for the port number as long as it does not conflict with any
+TCP ports already in use on the target system (for example, @code{23} is
+reserved for @code{telnet}).@footnote{If you choose a port number that
+conflicts with another service, @code{gdbserver} prints an error message
+and exits.} You must use the same port number with the host @value{GDBN}
+@code{target remote} command.
+
+@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
+you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
+symbols and debugging information. Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
+using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
+(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
+running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}.) After that, use @code{target
+remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserver}. Its argument
+is either a device name (usually a serial device, like
+@file{/dev/ttyb}), or a TCP port descriptor in the form
+@code{@var{host}:@var{PORT}}. For example:
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+communicates with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}, and
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) target remote the-target:2345
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+communicates via a TCP connection to port 2345 on host @w{@file{the-target}}.
+For TCP connections, you must start up @code{gdbserver} prior to using
+the @code{target remote} command. Otherwise you may get an error whose
+text depends on the host system, but which usually looks something like
+@samp{Connection refused}.
+@end table
+
+@node NetWare
+@section Using the @code{gdbserve.nlm} program
+
+@kindex gdbserve.nlm
+@code{gdbserve.nlm} is a control program for NetWare systems, which
+allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
+@code{target remote}.
+
+@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserve.nlm} communicate via a serial line,
+using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol.
+
+@table @emph
+@item On the target machine,
+you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
+@code{gdbserve.nlm} does not need your program's symbol table, so you
+can strip the program if necessary to save space. @value{GDBN} on the
+host system does all the symbol handling.
+
+To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with
+@value{GDBN}; the name of your program; and the arguments for your
+program. The syntax is:
+
+@smallexample
+load gdbserve [ BOARD=@var{board} ] [ PORT=@var{port} ]
+ [ BAUD=@var{baud} ] @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
+@end smallexample
+
+@var{board} and @var{port} specify the serial line; @var{baud} specifies
+the baud rate used by the connection. @var{port} and @var{node} default
+to 0, @var{baud} defaults to 9600@dmn{bps}.
+
+For example, to debug Emacs with the argument @samp{foo.txt}and
+communicate with @value{GDBN} over serial port number 2 or board 1
+using a 19200@dmn{bps} connection:
+
+@smallexample
+load gdbserve BOARD=1 PORT=2 BAUD=19200 emacs foo.txt
+@end smallexample
+
+@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
+you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
+symbols and debugging information. Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
+using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
+(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
+running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}. After that, use @code{target
+remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserve.nlm}. Its
+argument is a device name (usually a serial device, like
+@file{/dev/ttyb}). For example:
+
+@smallexample
+(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
+@end smallexample
-@menu
-* Remote Serial:: @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
-@end menu
+@noindent
+communications with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}.
+@end table
-@node Remote Serial
-@subsection The @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol
+@node remote stub
+@section Implementing a remote stub
+
+@cindex debugging stub, example
+@cindex remote stub, example
+@cindex stub example, remote debugging
+The stub files provided with @value{GDBN} implement the target side of the
+communication protocol, and the @value{GDBN} side is implemented in the
+@value{GDBN} source file @file{remote.c}. Normally, you can simply allow
+these subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details. (If you're
+implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
+with one of the existing stub files. @file{sparc-stub.c} is the best
+organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)
@cindex remote serial debugging, overview
To debug a program running on another machine (the debugging
have a name like @file{crt0}. The startup routine may be supplied by
your hardware supplier, or you may have to write your own.
-@item
+@item
A C subroutine library to support your program's
subroutine calls, notably managing input and output.
@table @code
@item i386-stub.c
-@kindex i386-stub.c
+@cindex @file{i386-stub.c}
@cindex Intel
@cindex i386
For Intel 386 and compatible architectures.
@item m68k-stub.c
-@kindex m68k-stub.c
+@cindex @file{m68k-stub.c}
@cindex Motorola 680x0
@cindex m680x0
For Motorola 680x0 architectures.
@item sh-stub.c
-@kindex sh-stub.c
+@cindex @file{sh-stub.c}
@cindex Hitachi
@cindex SH
For Hitachi SH architectures.
@item sparc-stub.c
-@kindex sparc-stub.c
+@cindex @file{sparc-stub.c}
@cindex Sparc
For @sc{sparc} architectures.
@item sparcl-stub.c
-@kindex sparcl-stub.c
+@cindex @file{sparcl-stub.c}
@cindex Fujitsu
@cindex SparcLite
For Fujitsu @sc{sparclite} architectures.
* Stub Contents:: What the stub can do for you
* Bootstrapping:: What you must do for the stub
* Debug Session:: Putting it all together
-* Protocol:: Definition of the communication protocol
-* Server:: Using the `gdbserver' program
-* NetWare:: Using the `gdbserve.nlm' program
@end menu
@node Stub Contents
-@subsubsection What the stub can do for you
+@subsection What the stub can do for you
@cindex remote serial stub
The debugging stub for your architecture supplies these three
retrieving and transmitting any information @value{GDBN} needs, until you
execute a @value{GDBN} command that makes your program resume; at that point,
@code{handle_exception} returns control to your own code on the target
-machine.
+machine.
@item breakpoint
@cindex @code{breakpoint} subroutine, remote
simply receiving characters on the serial port may also trigger a trap;
again, in that situation, you don't need to call @code{breakpoint} from
your own program---simply running @samp{target remote} from the host
-@value{GDBN} session gets control.
+@value{GDBN} session gets control.
Call @code{breakpoint} if none of these is true, or if you simply want
to make certain your program stops at a predetermined point for the
@end table
@node Bootstrapping
-@subsubsection What you must do for the stub
+@subsection What you must do for the stub
@cindex remote stub, support routines
The debugging stubs that come with @value{GDBN} are set up for a particular
@item void putDebugChar(int)
@kindex putDebugChar
Write this subroutine to write a single character to the serial port.
-It may be identical to @code{putchar} for your target system; a
+It may be identical to @code{putchar} for your target system; a
different name is used to allow you to distinguish the two if you wish.
@end table
@node Debug Session
-@subsubsection Putting it all together
+@subsection Putting it all together
@cindex remote serial debugging summary
In summary, when your program is ready to debug, you must follow these
@enumerate
@item
-Make sure you have the supporting low-level routines
+Make sure you have defined the supporting low-level routines
(@pxref{Bootstrapping,,What you must do for the stub}):
@display
@code{getDebugChar}, @code{putDebugChar},
@noindent
but if before calling @code{set_debug_traps}, you set it to point to a
-function in your program; that function is called when
+function in your program, that function is called when
@code{@value{GDBN}} continues after stopping on a trap (for example, bus
error). The function indicated by @code{exceptionHook} is called with
one parameter: an @code{int} which is the exception number.
@example
target remote manyfarms:2828
@end example
+
+If your remote target is actually running on the same machine as
+your debugger session (e.g.@: a simulator of your target running on
+the same host), you can omit the hostname. For example, to connect
+to port 1234 on your local machine:
+
+@example
+target remote :1234
+@end example
+@noindent
+
+Note that the colon is still required here.
@end enumerate
Now you can use all the usual commands to examine and change data and to
remote} again to connect once more.) If you type @kbd{n}, @value{GDBN}
goes back to waiting.
-@node Protocol
-@subsubsection Communication protocol
-@cindex debugging stub, example
-@cindex remote stub, example
-@cindex stub example, remote debugging
-The stub files provided with @value{GDBN} implement the target side of the
-communication protocol, and the @value{GDBN} side is implemented in the
-@value{GDBN} source file @file{remote.c}. Normally, you can simply allow
-these subroutines to communicate, and ignore the details. (If you're
-implementing your own stub file, you can still ignore the details: start
-with one of the existing stub files. @file{sparc-stub.c} is the best
-organized, and therefore the easiest to read.)
+@node Configurations
+@chapter Configuration-Specific Information
-However, there may be occasions when you need to know something about
-the protocol---for example, if there is only one serial port to your
-target machine, you might want your program to do something special if
-it recognizes a packet meant for @value{GDBN}.
+While nearly all @value{GDBN} commands are available for all native and
+cross versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions. This chapter
+describes things that are only available in certain configurations.
-In the examples below, @samp{<-} and @samp{->} are used to indicate
-transmitted and received data respectfully.
+There are three major categories of configurations: native
+configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
+operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
+different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
+are quite different from each other.
-@cindex protocol, @value{GDBN} remote serial
-@cindex serial protocol, @value{GDBN} remote
-@cindex remote serial protocol
-All @value{GDBN} commands and responses (other than acknowledgments)
-are sent as a @var{packet}. A @var{packet} is introduced with the
-character @samp{$}, this is followed by an optional two-digit
-@var{sequence-id} and the character @samp{:}, the actual
-@var{packet-data}, and the terminating character @samp{#} followed by a
-two-digit @var{checksum}:
+@menu
+* Native::
+* Embedded OS::
+* Embedded Processors::
+* Architectures::
+@end menu
-@example
-@code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
-@end example
-@noindent
-or, with the optional @var{sequence-id}:
-@example
-@code{$}@var{sequence-id}@code{:}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
-@end example
+@node Native
+@section Native
+
+This section describes details specific to particular native
+configurations.
+
+@menu
+* HP-UX:: HP-UX
+* SVR4 Process Information:: SVR4 process information
+* DJGPP Native:: Features specific to the DJGPP port
+@end menu
+
+@node HP-UX
+@subsection HP-UX
+
+On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
+begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
+name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
+
+@node SVR4 Process Information
+@subsection SVR4 process information
+
+@kindex /proc
+@cindex process image
+
+Many versions of SVR4 provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can be
+used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
+subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with
+this facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on
+several kinds of information about the process running your program.
+@code{info proc} works only on SVR4 systems that include the
+@code{procfs} code. This includes OSF/1 (Digital Unix), Solaris, Irix,
+and Unixware, but not HP-UX or Linux, for example.
+
+@table @code
+@kindex info proc
+@item info proc
+Summarize available information about the process.
+
+@kindex info proc mappings
+@item info proc mappings
+Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
+on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
+@ignore
+@comment These sub-options of 'info proc' were not included when
+@comment procfs.c was re-written. Keep their descriptions around
+@comment against the day when someone finds the time to put them back in.
+@kindex info proc times
+@item info proc times
+Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
+its children.
+
+@kindex info proc id
+@item info proc id
+Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
+the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
+
+@kindex info proc status
+@item info proc status
+General information on the state of the process. If the process is
+stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
+received.
+
+@item info proc all
+Show all the above information about the process.
+@end ignore
+@end table
+
+@node DJGPP Native
+@subsection Features for Debugging @sc{djgpp} Programs
+@cindex @sc{djgpp} debugging
+@cindex native @sc{djgpp} debugging
+@cindex MS-DOS-specific commands
+
+@sc{djgpp} is the port of @sc{gnu} development tools to MS-DOS and
+MS-Windows. @sc{djgpp} programs are 32-bit protected-mode programs
+that use the @dfn{DPMI} (DOS Protected-Mode Interface) API to run on
+top of real-mode DOS systems and their emulations.
+
+@value{GDBN} supports native debugging of @sc{djgpp} programs, and
+defines a few commands specific to the @sc{djgpp} port. This
+subsection describes those commands.
+
+@table @code
+@kindex info dos
+@item info dos
+This is a prefix of @sc{djgpp}-specific commands which print
+information about the target system and important OS structures.
+
+@kindex sysinfo
+@cindex MS-DOS system info
+@cindex free memory information (MS-DOS)
+@item info dos sysinfo
+This command displays assorted information about the underlying
+platform: the CPU type and features, the OS version and flavor, the
+DPMI version, and the available conventional and DPMI memory.
+
+@cindex GDT
+@cindex LDT
+@cindex IDT
+@cindex segment descriptor tables
+@cindex descriptor tables display
+@item info dos gdt
+@itemx info dos ldt
+@itemx info dos idt
+These 3 commands display entries from, respectively, Global, Local,
+and Interrupt Descriptor Tables (GDT, LDT, and IDT). The descriptor
+tables are data structures which store a descriptor for each segment
+that is currently in use. The segment's selector is an index into a
+descriptor table; the table entry for that index holds the
+descriptor's base address and limit, and its attributes and access
+rights.
+
+A typical @sc{djgpp} program uses 3 segments: a code segment, a data
+segment (used for both data and the stack), and a DOS segment (which
+allows access to DOS/BIOS data structures and absolute addresses in
+conventional memory). However, the DPMI host will usually define
+additional segments in order to support the DPMI environment.
+
+@cindex garbled pointers
+These commands allow to display entries from the descriptor tables.
+Without an argument, all entries from the specified table are
+displayed. An argument, which should be an integer expression, means
+display a single entry whose index is given by the argument. For
+example, here's a convenient way to display information about the
+debugged program's data segment:
+
+@smallexample
+@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos ldt $ds}
+@exdent @code{0x13f: base=0x11970000 limit=0x0009ffff 32-Bit Data (Read/Write, Exp-up)}
+@end smallexample
-@cindex checksum, for @value{GDBN} remote
@noindent
-The two-digit @var{checksum} is computed as the modulo 256 sum of all
-characters between the leading @samp{$} and the trailing @samp{#} (that
-consisting of both the optional @var{sequence-id}@code{:} and the actual
-@var{packet-data}) (an eight bit unsigned checksum).
+This comes in handy when you want to see whether a pointer is outside
+the data segment's limit (i.e.@: @dfn{garbled}).
+
+@cindex page tables display (MS-DOS)
+@item info dos pde
+@itemx info dos pte
+These two commands display entries from, respectively, the Page
+Directory and the Page Tables. Page Directories and Page Tables are
+data structures which control how virtual memory addresses are mapped
+into physical addresses. A Page Table includes an entry for every
+page of memory that is mapped into the program's address space; there
+may be several Page Tables, each one holding up to 4096 entries. A
+Page Directory has up to 4096 entries, one each for every Page Table
+that is currently in use.
+
+Without an argument, @kbd{info dos pde} displays the entire Page
+Directory, and @kbd{info dos pte} displays all the entries in all of
+the Page Tables. An argument, an integer expression, given to the
+@kbd{info dos pde} command means display only that entry from the Page
+Directory table. An argument given to the @kbd{info dos pte} command
+means display entries from a single Page Table, the one pointed to by
+the specified entry in the Page Directory.
+
+@cindex direct memory access (DMA) on MS-DOS
+These commands are useful when your program uses @dfn{DMA} (Direct
+Memory Access), which needs physical addresses to program the DMA
+controller.
+
+These commands are supported only with some DPMI servers.
+
+@cindex physical address from linear address
+@item info dos address-pte @var{addr}
+This command displays the Page Table entry for a specified linear
+address. The argument linear address @var{addr} should already have the
+appropriate segment's base address added to it, because this command
+accepts addresses which may belong to @emph{any} segment. For
+example, here's how to display the Page Table entry for the page where
+the variable @code{i} is stored:
+
+@smallexample
+@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte __djgpp_base_address + (char *)&i}
+@exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x11a00d30:}
+@exdent @code{Base=0x02698000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0xd30}
+@end smallexample
-@cindex sequence-id, for @value{GDBN} remote
@noindent
-The two-digit @var{sequence-id}, when present, is returned with the
-acknowledgment. Beyond that its meaning is poorly defined.
-@value{GDBN} is not known to output @var{sequence-id}s.
+This says that @code{i} is stored at offset @code{0xd30} from the page
+whose physical base address is @code{0x02698000}, and prints all the
+attributes of that page.
-When either the host or the target machine receives a packet, the first
-response expected is an acknowledgment: either @samp{+} (to indicate
-the package was received correctly) or @samp{-} (to request
-retransmission):
+Note that you must cast the addresses of variables to a @code{char *},
+since otherwise the value of @code{__djgpp_base_address}, the base
+address of all variables and functions in a @sc{djgpp} program, will
+be added using the rules of C pointer arithmetics: if @code{i} is
+declared an @code{int}, @value{GDBN} will add 4 times the value of
+@code{__djgpp_base_address} to the address of @code{i}.
+
+Here's another example, it displays the Page Table entry for the
+transfer buffer:
+
+@smallexample
+@exdent @code{(@value{GDBP}) info dos address-pte *((unsigned *)&_go32_info_block + 3)}
+@exdent @code{Page Table entry for address 0x29110:}
+@exdent @code{Base=0x00029000 Dirty Acc. Not-Cached Write-Back Usr Read-Write +0x110}
+@end smallexample
-@example
-<- @code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
--> @code{+}
-@end example
@noindent
-If the received packet included a @var{sequence-id} than that is
-appended to a positive acknowledgment:
+(The @code{+ 3} offset is because the transfer buffer's address is the
+3rd member of the @code{_go32_info_block} structure.) The output of
+this command clearly shows that addresses in conventional memory are
+mapped 1:1, i.e.@: the physical and linear addresses are identical.
-@example
-<- @code{$}@var{sequence-id}@code{:}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
--> @code{+}@var{sequence-id}
-@end example
+This command is supported only with some DPMI servers.
+@end table
-The host (@value{GDBN}) sends @var{command}s, and the target (the
-debugging stub incorporated in your program) sends a @var{response}. In
-the case of step and continue @var{command}s, the response is only sent
-when the operation has completed (the target has again stopped).
+@node Embedded OS
+@section Embedded Operating Systems
-@var{packet-data} consists of a sequence of characters with the
-exception of @samp{#} and @samp{$} (see @samp{X} packet for an
-exception). @samp{:} can not appear as the third character in a packet.
-Fields within the packet should be separated using @samp{,} and @samp{;}
-(unfortunately some packets chose to use @samp{:}). Except where
-otherwise noted all numbers are represented in HEX with leading zeros
-suppressed.
+This section describes configurations involving the debugging of
+embedded operating systems that are available for several different
+architectures.
-Response @var{data} can be run-length encoded to save space. A @samp{*}
-means that the next character is an ASCII encoding giving a repeat count
-which stands for that many repetitions of the character preceding the
-@samp{*}. The encoding is @code{n+29}, yielding a printable character
-where @code{n >=3} (which is where rle starts to win). The printable
-characters @samp{$}, @samp{#}, @samp{+} and @samp{-} or with a numeric
-value greater than 126 should not be used.
+@menu
+* VxWorks:: Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
+@end menu
-Some remote systems have used a different run-length encoding mechanism
-loosely refered to as the cisco encoding. Following the @samp{*}
-character are two hex digits that indicate the size of the packet.
+@value{GDBN} includes the ability to debug programs running on
+various real-time operating systems.
-So:
-@example
-"@code{0* }"
-@end example
-@noindent
-means the same as "0000".
+@node VxWorks
+@subsection Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
-The error response, returned for some packets includes a two character
-error number. That number is not well defined.
+@cindex VxWorks
-For any @var{command} not supported by the stub, an empty response
-(@samp{$#00}) should be returned. That way it is possible to extend the
-protocol. A newer @value{GDBN} can tell if a packet is supported based
-on that response.
+@table @code
-Below is a complete list of all currently defined @var{command}s and
-their corresponding response @var{data}:
+@kindex target vxworks
+@item target vxworks @var{machinename}
+A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
+is the target system's machine name or IP address.
-@multitable @columnfractions .30 .30 .40
-@item Packet
-@tab Request
-@tab Description
+@end table
-@item extended ops @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{!}
-@tab
-Use the extended remote protocol. Sticky---only needs to be set once.
-The extended remote protocol support the @samp{R} packet.
-@item
-@tab reply @samp{}
-@tab
-Stubs that support the extended remote protocol return @samp{} which,
-unfortunately, is identical to the response returned by stubs that do not
-support protocol extensions.
+On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
+current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
+
+@value{GDBN} enables developers to spawn and debug tasks running on networked
+VxWorks targets from a Unix host. Already-running tasks spawned from
+the VxWorks shell can also be debugged. @value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
+both the Unix host and on the VxWorks target. The program
+@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host. (It may be
+installed with the name @code{vxgdb}, to distinguish it from a
+@value{GDBN} for debugging programs on the host itself.)
+
+@table @code
+@item VxWorks-timeout @var{args}
+@kindex vxworks-timeout
+All VxWorks-based targets now support the option @code{vxworks-timeout}.
+This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
+seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses to rpc's. You might use this if
+your VxWorks target is a slow software simulator or is on the far side
+of a thin network line.
+@end table
+
+The following information on connecting to VxWorks was current when
+this manual was produced; newer releases of VxWorks may use revised
+procedures.
+
+@kindex INCLUDE_RDB
+To use @value{GDBN} with VxWorks, you must rebuild your VxWorks kernel
+to include the remote debugging interface routines in the VxWorks
+library @file{rdb.a}. To do this, define @code{INCLUDE_RDB} in the
+VxWorks configuration file @file{configAll.h} and rebuild your VxWorks
+kernel. The resulting kernel contains @file{rdb.a}, and spawns the
+source debugging task @code{tRdbTask} when VxWorks is booted. For more
+information on configuring and remaking VxWorks, see the manufacturer's
+manual.
+@c VxWorks, see the @cite{VxWorks Programmer's Guide}.
+
+Once you have included @file{rdb.a} in your VxWorks system image and set
+your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
+run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}} (or
+@code{vxgdb}, depending on your installation).
+
+@value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
+
+@example
+(vxgdb)
+@end example
+
+@menu
+* VxWorks Connection:: Connecting to VxWorks
+* VxWorks Download:: VxWorks download
+* VxWorks Attach:: Running tasks
+@end menu
-@item last signal
-@tab @code{?}
-@tab
-Indicate the reason the target halted. The reply is the same as for step
-and continue.
-@item
-@tab reply
-@tab see below
+@node VxWorks Connection
+@subsubsection Connecting to VxWorks
+The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a VxWorks target on the
+network. To connect to a target whose host name is ``@code{tt}'', type:
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{a}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@example
+(vxgdb) target vxworks tt
+@end example
-@item set program arguments @strong{(reserved)} @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{A}@var{arglen}@code{,}@var{argnum}@code{,}@var{arg}@code{,...}
-@tab
-Initialized @samp{argv[]} array passed into program. @var{arglen}
-specifies the number of bytes in the hex encoded byte stream @var{arg}.
-See @file{gdbserver} for more details.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@need 750
+@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
-@item set baud @strong{(deprecated)}
-@tab @code{b}@var{baud}
-@tab
-Change the serial line speed to @var{baud}. JTC: @emph{When does the
-transport layer state change? When it's received, or after the ACK is
-transmitted. In either case, there are problems if the command or the
-acknowledgment packet is dropped.} Stan: @emph{If people really wanted
-to add something like this, and get it working for the first time, they
-ought to modify ser-unix.c to send some kind of out-of-band message to a
-specially-setup stub and have the switch happen "in between" packets, so
-that from remote protocol's point of view, nothing actually
-happened.}
+@smallexample
+Attaching remote machine across net...
+Connected to tt.
+@end smallexample
-@item set breakpoint @strong{(deprecated)}
-@tab @code{B}@var{addr},@var{mode}
-@tab
-Set (@var{mode} is @samp{S}) or clear (@var{mode} is @samp{C}) a
-breakpoint at @var{addr}. @emph{This has been replaced by the @samp{Z} and
-@samp{z} packets.}
+@need 1000
+@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol tables of any object modules
+loaded into the VxWorks target since it was last booted. @value{GDBN} locates
+these files by searching the directories listed in the command search
+path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}); if it fails
+to find an object file, it displays a message such as:
-@item continue
-@tab @code{c}@var{addr}
-@tab
-@var{addr} is address to resume. If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
-current address.
-@item
-@tab reply
-@tab see below
+@example
+prog.o: No such file or directory.
+@end example
-@item continue with signal @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{C}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr}
-@tab
-Continue with signal @var{sig} (hex signal number). If
-@code{;}@var{addr} is omitted, resume at same address.
-@item
-@tab reply
-@tab see below
+When this happens, add the appropriate directory to the search path with
+the @value{GDBN} command @code{path}, and execute the @code{target}
+command again.
-@item toggle debug @emph{(deprecated)}
-@tab @code{d}
-@tab
-toggle debug flag.
+@node VxWorks Download
+@subsubsection VxWorks download
-@item detach @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{D}
-@tab
-Detach GDB from the remote system. Sent to the remote target before
-GDB disconnects.
-@item
-@tab reply @emph{no response}
-@tab
-GDB does not check for any response after sending this packet
+@cindex download to VxWorks
+If you have connected to the VxWorks target and you want to debug an
+object that has not yet been loaded, you can use the @value{GDBN}
+@code{load} command to download a file from Unix to VxWorks
+incrementally. The object file given as an argument to the @code{load}
+command is actually opened twice: first by the VxWorks target in order
+to download the code, then by @value{GDBN} in order to read the symbol
+table. This can lead to problems if the current working directories on
+the two systems differ. If both systems have NFS mounted the same
+filesystems, you can avoid these problems by using absolute paths.
+Otherwise, it is simplest to set the working directory on both systems
+to the directory in which the object file resides, and then to reference
+the file by its name, without any path. For instance, a program
+@file{prog.o} may reside in @file{@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb} in VxWorks
+and in @file{@var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb} on the host. To load this
+program, type this on VxWorks:
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{e}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@example
+-> cd "@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb"
+@end example
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{E}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@noindent
+Then, in @value{GDBN}, type:
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{f}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@example
+(vxgdb) cd @var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb
+(vxgdb) load prog.o
+@end example
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{F}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@value{GDBN} displays a response similar to this:
-@item read registers
-@tab @code{g}
-@tab Read general registers.
-@item
-@tab reply @var{XX...}
-@tab
-Each byte of register data is described by two hex digits. The bytes
-with the register are transmitted in target byte order. The size of
-each register and their position within the @samp{g} @var{packet} are
-determined by the GDB internal macros @var{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE} and
-@var{REGISTER_NAME} macros. The specification of several standard
-@code{g} packets is specified below.
-@item
-@tab @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error.
+@smallexample
+Reading symbol data from wherever/vw/demo/rdb/prog.o... done.
+@end smallexample
-@item write regs
-@tab @code{G}@var{XX...}
-@tab
-See @samp{g} for a description of the @var{XX...} data.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error
+You can also use the @code{load} command to reload an object module
+after editing and recompiling the corresponding source file. Note that
+this makes @value{GDBN} delete all currently-defined breakpoints,
+auto-displays, and convenience variables, and to clear the value
+history. (This is necessary in order to preserve the integrity of
+debugger's data structures that reference the target system's symbol
+table.)
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{h}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@node VxWorks Attach
+@subsubsection Running tasks
-@item set thread @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{H}@var{c}@var{t...}
-@tab
-Set thread for subsequent operations (@samp{m}, @samp{M}, @samp{g},
-@samp{G}, et.al.). @var{c} = @samp{c} for thread used in step and
-continue; @var{t...} can be -1 for all threads. @var{c} = @samp{g} for
-thread used in other operations. If zero, pick a thread, any thread.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error
+@cindex running VxWorks tasks
+You can also attach to an existing task using the @code{attach} command as
+follows:
-@c FIXME: JTC:
-@c 'H': How restrictive (or permissive) is the thread model. If a
-@c thread is selected and stopped, are other threads allowed
-@c to continue to execute? As I mentioned above, I think the
-@c semantics of each command when a thread is selected must be
-@c described. For example:
-@c
-@c 'g': If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
-@c selected, returns the register block from that thread;
-@c otherwise returns current registers.
-@c
-@c 'G' If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
-@c selected, sets the registers of the register block of
-@c that thread; otherwise sets current registers.
+@example
+(vxgdb) attach @var{task}
+@end example
-@item cycle step @strong{(draft)} @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{i}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{nnn}
-@tab
-Step the remote target by a single clock cycle. If @code{,}@var{nnn} is
-present, cycle step @var{nnn} cycles. If @var{addr} is present, cycle
-step starting at that address.
+@noindent
+where @var{task} is the VxWorks hexadecimal task ID. The task can be running
+or suspended when you attach to it. Running tasks are suspended at
+the time of attachment.
-@item signal then cycle step @strong{(reserved)} @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{I}
-@tab
-See @samp{i} and @samp{S} for likely syntax and semantics.
+@node Embedded Processors
+@section Embedded Processors
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{j}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+This section goes into details specific to particular embedded
+configurations.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{J}
-@tab Reserved for future use
-@item kill request @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{k}
-@tab
-FIXME: @emph{There is no description of how operate when a specific
-thread context has been selected (ie. does 'k' kill only that thread?)}.
+@c OBSOLETE * A29K Embedded:: AMD A29K Embedded
+@menu
+* ARM:: ARM
+* H8/300:: Hitachi H8/300
+* H8/500:: Hitachi H8/500
+* i960:: Intel i960
+* M32R/D:: Mitsubishi M32R/D
+* M68K:: Motorola M68K
+* M88K:: Motorola M88K
+* MIPS Embedded:: MIPS Embedded
+* PA:: HP PA Embedded
+* PowerPC: PowerPC
+* SH:: Hitachi SH
+* Sparclet:: Tsqware Sparclet
+* Sparclite:: Fujitsu Sparclite
+* ST2000:: Tandem ST2000
+* Z8000:: Zilog Z8000
+@end menu
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{l}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@c OBSOLETE @node A29K Embedded
+@c OBSOLETE @subsection AMD A29K Embedded
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @menu
+@c OBSOLETE * A29K UDI::
+@c OBSOLETE * A29K EB29K::
+@c OBSOLETE * Comms (EB29K):: Communications setup
+@c OBSOLETE * gdb-EB29K:: EB29K cross-debugging
+@c OBSOLETE * Remote Log:: Remote log
+@c OBSOLETE @end menu
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @table @code
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @kindex target adapt
+@c OBSOLETE @item target adapt @var{dev}
+@c OBSOLETE Adapt monitor for A29K.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @kindex target amd-eb
+@c OBSOLETE @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex AMD EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
+@c OBSOLETE @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
+@c OBSOLETE @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
+@c OBSOLETE name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
+@c OBSOLETE @xref{A29K EB29K, ,EBMON protocol for AMD29K}.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @end table
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @node A29K UDI
+@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection A29K UDI
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex UDI
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex AMD29K via UDI
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @value{GDBN} supports AMD's UDI (``Universal Debugger Interface'')
+@c OBSOLETE protocol for debugging the a29k processor family. To use this
+@c OBSOLETE configuration with AMD targets running the MiniMON monitor, you need the
+@c OBSOLETE program @code{MONTIP}, available from AMD at no charge. You can also
+@c OBSOLETE use @value{GDBN} with the UDI-conformant a29k simulator program
+@c OBSOLETE @code{ISSTIP}, also available from AMD.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @table @code
+@c OBSOLETE @item target udi @var{keyword}
+@c OBSOLETE @kindex udi
+@c OBSOLETE Select the UDI interface to a remote a29k board or simulator, where
+@c OBSOLETE @var{keyword} is an entry in the AMD configuration file @file{udi_soc}.
+@c OBSOLETE This file contains keyword entries which specify parameters used to
+@c OBSOLETE connect to a29k targets. If the @file{udi_soc} file is not in your
+@c OBSOLETE working directory, you must set the environment variable @samp{UDICONF}
+@c OBSOLETE to its pathname.
+@c OBSOLETE @end table
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @node A29K EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection EBMON protocol for AMD29K
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex EB29K board
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex running 29K programs
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE AMD distributes a 29K development board meant to fit in a PC, together
+@c OBSOLETE with a DOS-hosted monitor program called @code{EBMON}. As a shorthand
+@c OBSOLETE term, this development system is called the ``EB29K''. To use
+@c OBSOLETE @value{GDBN} from a Unix system to run programs on the EB29K board, you
+@c OBSOLETE must first connect a serial cable between the PC (which hosts the EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE board) and a serial port on the Unix system. In the following, we
+@c OBSOLETE assume you've hooked the cable between the PC's @file{COM1} port and
+@c OBSOLETE @file{/dev/ttya} on the Unix system.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @node Comms (EB29K)
+@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Communications setup
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE The next step is to set up the PC's port, by doing something like this
+@c OBSOLETE in DOS on the PC:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE C:\> MODE com1:9600,n,8,1,none
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @noindent
+@c OBSOLETE This example---run on an MS DOS 4.0 system---sets the PC port to 9600
+@c OBSOLETE bps, no parity, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no ``retry'' action;
+@c OBSOLETE you must match the communications parameters when establishing the Unix
+@c OBSOLETE end of the connection as well.
+@c OBSOLETE @c FIXME: Who knows what this "no retry action" crud from the DOS manual may
+@c OBSOLETE @c mean? It's optional; leave it out? ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
+@c OBSOLETE @c
+@c OBSOLETE @c It's optional, but it's unwise to omit it: who knows what is the
+@c OBSOLETE @c default value set when the DOS machines boots? "No retry" means that
+@c OBSOLETE @c the DOS serial device driver won't retry the operation if it fails;
+@c OBSOLETE @c I understand that this is needed because the GDB serial protocol
+@c OBSOLETE @c handles any errors and retransmissions itself. ---Eli Zaretskii, 3sep99
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE To give control of the PC to the Unix side of the serial line, type
+@c OBSOLETE the following at the DOS console:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE C:\> CTTY com1
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @noindent
+@c OBSOLETE (Later, if you wish to return control to the DOS console, you can use
+@c OBSOLETE the command @code{CTTY con}---but you must send it over the device that
+@c OBSOLETE had control, in our example over the @file{COM1} serial line.)
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE From the Unix host, use a communications program such as @code{tip} or
+@c OBSOLETE @code{cu} to communicate with the PC; for example,
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE cu -s 9600 -l /dev/ttya
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @noindent
+@c OBSOLETE The @code{cu} options shown specify, respectively, the linespeed and the
+@c OBSOLETE serial port to use. If you use @code{tip} instead, your command line
+@c OBSOLETE may look something like the following:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE tip -9600 /dev/ttya
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @noindent
+@c OBSOLETE Your system may require a different name where we show
+@c OBSOLETE @file{/dev/ttya} as the argument to @code{tip}. The communications
+@c OBSOLETE parameters, including which port to use, are associated with the
+@c OBSOLETE @code{tip} argument in the ``remote'' descriptions file---normally the
+@c OBSOLETE system table @file{/etc/remote}.
+@c OBSOLETE @c FIXME: What if anything needs doing to match the "n,8,1,none" part of
+@c OBSOLETE @c the DOS side's comms setup? cu can support -o (odd
+@c OBSOLETE @c parity), -e (even parity)---apparently no settings for no parity or
+@c OBSOLETE @c for character size. Taken from stty maybe...? John points out tip
+@c OBSOLETE @c can set these as internal variables, eg ~s parity=none; man stty
+@c OBSOLETE @c suggests that it *might* work to stty these options with stdin or
+@c OBSOLETE @c stdout redirected... ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
+@c OBSOLETE @c
+@c OBSOLETE @c There's nothing to be done for the "none" part of the DOS MODE
+@c OBSOLETE @c command. The rest of the parameters should be matched by the
+@c OBSOLETE @c baudrate, bits, and parity used by the Unix side. ---Eli Zaretskii, 3Sep99
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @kindex EBMON
+@c OBSOLETE Using the @code{tip} or @code{cu} connection, change the DOS working
+@c OBSOLETE directory to the directory containing a copy of your 29K program, then
+@c OBSOLETE start the PC program @code{EBMON} (an EB29K control program supplied
+@c OBSOLETE with your board by AMD). You should see an initial display from
+@c OBSOLETE @code{EBMON} similar to the one that follows, ending with the
+@c OBSOLETE @code{EBMON} prompt @samp{#}---
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE C:\> G:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE G:\> CD \usr\joe\work29k
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE G:\USR\JOE\WORK29K> EBMON
+@c OBSOLETE Am29000 PC Coprocessor Board Monitor, version 3.0-18
+@c OBSOLETE Copyright 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
+@c OBSOLETE Written by Gibbons and Associates, Inc.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE Enter '?' or 'H' for help
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE PC Coprocessor Type = EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE I/O Base = 0x208
+@c OBSOLETE Memory Base = 0xd0000
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE Data Memory Size = 2048KB
+@c OBSOLETE Available I-RAM Range = 0x8000 to 0x1fffff
+@c OBSOLETE Available D-RAM Range = 0x80002000 to 0x801fffff
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE PageSize = 0x400
+@c OBSOLETE Register Stack Size = 0x800
+@c OBSOLETE Memory Stack Size = 0x1800
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE CPU PRL = 0x3
+@c OBSOLETE Am29027 Available = No
+@c OBSOLETE Byte Write Available = Yes
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE # ~.
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE Then exit the @code{cu} or @code{tip} program (done in the example by
+@c OBSOLETE typing @code{~.} at the @code{EBMON} prompt). @code{EBMON} keeps
+@c OBSOLETE running, ready for @value{GDBN} to take over.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE For this example, we've assumed what is probably the most convenient
+@c OBSOLETE way to make sure the same 29K program is on both the PC and the Unix
+@c OBSOLETE system: a PC/NFS connection that establishes ``drive @file{G:}'' on the
+@c OBSOLETE PC as a file system on the Unix host. If you do not have PC/NFS or
+@c OBSOLETE something similar connecting the two systems, you must arrange some
+@c OBSOLETE other way---perhaps floppy-disk transfer---of getting the 29K program
+@c OBSOLETE from the Unix system to the PC; @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} download it over the
+@c OBSOLETE serial line.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @node gdb-EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection EB29K cross-debugging
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE Finally, @code{cd} to the directory containing an image of your 29K
+@c OBSOLETE program on the Unix system, and start @value{GDBN}---specifying as argument the
+@c OBSOLETE name of your 29K program:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE cd /usr/joe/work29k
+@c OBSOLETE @value{GDBP} myfoo
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @need 500
+@c OBSOLETE Now you can use the @code{target} command:
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @example
+@c OBSOLETE target amd-eb /dev/ttya 9600 MYFOO
+@c OBSOLETE @c FIXME: test above 'target amd-eb' as spelled, with caps! caps are meant to
+@c OBSOLETE @c emphasize that this is the name as seen by DOS (since I think DOS is
+@c OBSOLETE @c single-minded about case of letters). ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
+@c OBSOLETE @end example
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @noindent
+@c OBSOLETE In this example, we've assumed your program is in a file called
+@c OBSOLETE @file{myfoo}. Note that the filename given as the last argument to
+@c OBSOLETE @code{target amd-eb} should be the name of the program as it appears to DOS.
+@c OBSOLETE In our example this is simply @code{MYFOO}, but in general it can include
+@c OBSOLETE a DOS path, and depending on your transfer mechanism may not resemble
+@c OBSOLETE the name on the Unix side.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE At this point, you can set any breakpoints you wish; when you are ready
+@c OBSOLETE to see your program run on the 29K board, use the @value{GDBN} command
+@c OBSOLETE @code{run}.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE To stop debugging the remote program, use the @value{GDBN} @code{detach}
+@c OBSOLETE command.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE To return control of the PC to its console, use @code{tip} or @code{cu}
+@c OBSOLETE once again, after your @value{GDBN} session has concluded, to attach to
+@c OBSOLETE @code{EBMON}. You can then type the command @code{q} to shut down
+@c OBSOLETE @code{EBMON}, returning control to the DOS command-line interpreter.
+@c OBSOLETE Type @kbd{CTTY con} to return command input to the main DOS console,
+@c OBSOLETE and type @kbd{~.} to leave @code{tip} or @code{cu}.
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE @node Remote Log
+@c OBSOLETE @subsubsection Remote log
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex @file{eb.log}, a log file for EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE @cindex log file for EB29K
+@c OBSOLETE
+@c OBSOLETE The @code{target amd-eb} command creates a file @file{eb.log} in the
+@c OBSOLETE current working directory, to help debug problems with the connection.
+@c OBSOLETE @file{eb.log} records all the output from @code{EBMON}, including echoes
+@c OBSOLETE of the commands sent to it. Running @samp{tail -f} on this file in
+@c OBSOLETE another window often helps to understand trouble with @code{EBMON}, or
+@c OBSOLETE unexpected events on the PC side of the connection.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{L}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@node ARM
+@subsection ARM
-@item read memory
-@tab @code{m}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
-@tab
-Read @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
-Neither GDB nor the stub assume that sized memory transfers are assumed
-using word alligned accesses. FIXME: @emph{A word aligned memory
-transfer mechanism is needed.}
-@item
-@tab reply @var{XX...}
-@tab
-@var{XX...} is mem contents. Can be fewer bytes than requested if able
-to read only part of the data. Neither GDB nor the stub assume that
-sized memory transfers are assumed using word alligned accesses. FIXME:
-@emph{A word aligned memory transfer mechanism is needed.}
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab @var{NN} is errno
+@table @code
+
+@kindex target rdi
+@item target rdi @var{dev}
+ARM Angel monitor, via RDI library interface to ADP protocol. You may
+use this target to communicate with both boards running the Angel
+monitor, or with the EmbeddedICE JTAG debug device.
-@item write mem
-@tab @code{M}@var{addr},@var{length}@code{:}@var{XX...}
-@tab
-Write @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
-@var{XX...} is the data.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab
-for an error (this includes the case where only part of the data was
-written).
+@kindex target rdp
+@item target rdp @var{dev}
+ARM Demon monitor.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{n}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@end table
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{N}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@node H8/300
+@subsection Hitachi H8/300
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{o}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@table @code
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{O}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@kindex target hms@r{, with H8/300}
+@item target hms @var{dev}
+A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
+Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
+line and the communications speed used.
-@item read reg @strong{(reserved)}
-@tab @code{p}@var{n...}
-@tab
-See write register.
-@item
-@tab return @var{r....}
-@tab The hex encoded value of the register in target byte order.
+@kindex target e7000@r{, with H8/300}
+@item target e7000 @var{dev}
+E7000 emulator for Hitachi H8 and SH.
-@item write reg @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{P}@var{n...}@code{=}@var{r...}
-@tab
-Write register @var{n...} with value @var{r...}, which contains two hex
-digits for each byte in the register (target byte order).
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error
+@kindex target sh3@r{, with H8/300}
+@kindex target sh3e@r{, with H8/300}
+@item target sh3 @var{dev}
+@itemx target sh3e @var{dev}
+Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
-@item general query @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{q}@var{query}
-@tab
-Request info about @var{query}. In general @value{GDBN} @var{query}'s
-have a leading upper case letter. Custom vendor queries should use a
-company prefix (in lower case) ex: @samp{qfsf.var}. @var{query} may
-optionally be followed by a @samp{,} or @samp{;} separated list. Stubs
-must ensure that they match the full @var{query} name.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{XX...}
-@tab Hex encoded data from query. The reply can not be empty.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab error reply
-@item
-@tab reply @samp{}
-@tab Indicating an unrecognized @var{query}.
+@end table
-@item general set @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{Q}@var{var}@code{=}@var{val}
-@tab
-Set value of @var{var} to @var{val}. See @samp{q} for a discussing of
-naming conventions.
+@cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
+@cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
+@cindex download to Hitachi SH
+@cindex Hitachi SH download
+When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500
+board, the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi
+board and also opens it as the current executable target for
+@value{GDBN} on your host (like the @code{file} command).
-@item reset @emph{(deprecated)}
-@tab @code{r}
-@tab
-Reset the entire system.
+@value{GDBN} needs to know these things to talk to your
+Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500:
-@item remote restart @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{R}@var{XX}
-@tab
-Restart the remote server. @var{XX} while needed has no clear
-definition. FIXME: @emph{An example interaction explaining how this
-packet is used in extended-remote mode is needed}.
+@enumerate
+@item
+that you want to use @samp{target hms}, the remote debugging interface
+for Hitachi microprocessors, or @samp{target e7000}, the in-circuit
+emulator for the Hitachi SH and the Hitachi 300H. (@samp{target hms} is
+the default when @value{GDBN} is configured specifically for the Hitachi SH,
+H8/300, or H8/500.)
-@item step @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{s}@var{addr}
-@tab
-@var{addr} is address to resume. If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
-same address.
@item
-@tab reply
-@tab see below
+what serial device connects your host to your Hitachi board (the first
+serial device available on your host is the default).
-@item step with signal @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{S}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr}
-@tab
-Like @samp{C} but step not continue.
@item
-@tab reply
-@tab see below
+what speed to use over the serial device.
+@end enumerate
-@item search @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{t}@var{addr}@code{:}@var{PP}@code{,}@var{MM}
-@tab
-Search backwards starting at address @var{addr} for a match with pattern
-@var{PP} and mask @var{MM}. @var{PP} and @var{MM} are 4
-bytes. @var{addr} must be at least 3 digits.
+@menu
+* Hitachi Boards:: Connecting to Hitachi boards.
+* Hitachi ICE:: Using the E7000 In-Circuit Emulator.
+* Hitachi Special:: Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros.
+@end menu
-@item thread alive @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{T}@var{XX}
-@tab Find out if the thread XX is alive.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab thread is still alive
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab thread is dead
-
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{u}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@node Hitachi Boards
+@subsubsection Connecting to Hitachi boards
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{U}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@c only for Unix hosts
+@kindex device
+@cindex serial device, Hitachi micros
+Use the special @code{@value{GDBN}} command @samp{device @var{port}} if you
+need to explicitly set the serial device. The default @var{port} is the
+first available port on your host. This is only necessary on Unix
+hosts, where it is typically something like @file{/dev/ttya}.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{v}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@kindex speed
+@cindex serial line speed, Hitachi micros
+@code{@value{GDBN}} has another special command to set the communications
+speed: @samp{speed @var{bps}}. This command also is only used from Unix
+hosts; on DOS hosts, set the line speed as usual from outside @value{GDBN} with
+the DOS @code{mode} command (for instance,
+@w{@kbd{mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p}} for a 9600@dmn{bps} connection).
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{V}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+The @samp{device} and @samp{speed} commands are available only when you
+use a Unix host to debug your Hitachi microprocessor programs. If you
+use a DOS host,
+@value{GDBN} depends on an auxiliary terminate-and-stay-resident program
+called @code{asynctsr} to communicate with the development board
+through a PC serial port. You must also use the DOS @code{mode} command
+to set up the serial port on the DOS side.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{w}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+The following sample session illustrates the steps needed to start a
+program under @value{GDBN} control on an H8/300. The example uses a
+sample H8/300 program called @file{t.x}. The procedure is the same for
+the Hitachi SH and the H8/500.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{W}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+First hook up your development board. In this example, we use a
+board attached to serial port @code{COM2}; if you use a different serial
+port, substitute its name in the argument of the @code{mode} command.
+When you call @code{asynctsr}, the auxiliary comms program used by the
+debugger, you give it just the numeric part of the serial port's name;
+for example, @samp{asyncstr 2} below runs @code{asyncstr} on
+@code{COM2}.
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{x}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@example
+C:\H8300\TEST> asynctsr 2
+C:\H8300\TEST> mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p
-@item write mem (binary) @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{X}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}@var{:}@var{XX...}
-@tab
-@var{addr} is address, @var{length} is number of bytes, @var{XX...} is
-binary data. The characters @code{$}, @code{#}, and @code{0x7d} are
-escaped using @code{0x7d}.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error
+Resident portion of MODE loaded
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{y}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+COM2: 9600, n, 8, 1, p
-@item reserved
-@tab @code{Y}
-@tab Reserved for future use
+@end example
-@item remove break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)} @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
-@tab
-See @samp{Z}.
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} We have noticed a bug in PC-NFS that conflicts with
+@code{asynctsr}. If you also run PC-NFS on your DOS host, you may need to
+disable it, or even boot without it, to use @code{asynctsr} to control
+your development board.
+@end quotation
-@item insert break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)} @emph{(optional)}
-@tab @code{Z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
-@tab
-@var{t} is type: @samp{0} - software breakpoint, @samp{1} - hardware
-breakpoint, @samp{2} - write watchpoint, @samp{3} - read watchpoint,
-@samp{4} - access watchpoint; @var{addr} is address; @var{length} is in
-bytes. For a software breakpoint, @var{length} specifies the size of
-the instruction to be patched. For hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
-@var{length} specifies the memory region to be monitored. To avoid
-potential problems with duplicate packets, the operations should be
-implemented in an ident-potentent way.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab for an error
+@kindex target hms@r{, and serial protocol}
+Now that serial communications are set up, and the development board is
+connected, you can start up @value{GDBN}. Call @code{@value{GDBP}} with
+the name of your program as the argument. @code{@value{GDBN}} prompts
+you, as usual, with the prompt @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. Use two special
+commands to begin your debugging session: @samp{target hms} to specify
+cross-debugging to the Hitachi board, and the @code{load} command to
+download your program to the board. @code{load} displays the names of
+the program's sections, and a @samp{*} for each 2K of data downloaded.
+(If you want to refresh @value{GDBN} data on symbols or on the
+executable file without downloading, use the @value{GDBN} commands
+@code{file} or @code{symbol-file}. These commands, and @code{load}
+itself, are described in @ref{Files,,Commands to specify files}.)
+
+@smallexample
+(eg-C:\H8300\TEST) @value{GDBP} t.x
+@value{GDBN} is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
+ of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
+ the conditions.
+There is absolutely no warranty for @value{GDBN}; type "show warranty"
+for details.
+@value{GDBN} @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
+(@value{GDBP}) target hms
+Connected to remote H8/300 HMS system.
+(@value{GDBP}) load t.x
+.text : 0x8000 .. 0xabde ***********
+.data : 0xabde .. 0xad30 *
+.stack : 0xf000 .. 0xf014 *
+@end smallexample
+
+At this point, you're ready to run or debug your program. From here on,
+you can use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands. The @code{break} command
+sets breakpoints; the @code{run} command starts your program;
+@code{print} or @code{x} display data; the @code{continue} command
+resumes execution after stopping at a breakpoint. You can use the
+@code{help} command at any time to find out more about @value{GDBN} commands.
+
+Remember, however, that @emph{operating system} facilities aren't
+available on your development board; for example, if your program hangs,
+you can't send an interrupt---but you can press the @sc{reset} switch!
+
+Use the @sc{reset} button on the development board
+@itemize @bullet
@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab for success
+to interrupt your program (don't use @kbd{ctl-C} on the DOS host---it has
+no way to pass an interrupt signal to the development board); and
+
@item
-@tab @samp{}
-@tab If not supported.
+to return to the @value{GDBN} command prompt after your program finishes
+normally. The communications protocol provides no other way for @value{GDBN}
+to detect program completion.
+@end itemize
-@item reserved
-@tab <other>
-@tab Reserved for future use
+In either case, @value{GDBN} sees the effect of a @sc{reset} on the
+development board as a ``normal exit'' of your program.
-@end multitable
+@node Hitachi ICE
+@subsubsection Using the E7000 in-circuit emulator
-The @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}, @samp{s} and @samp{?} packets can
-receive any of the below as a reply. In the case of the @samp{C},
-@samp{c}, @samp{S} and @samp{s} packets, that reply is only returned
-when the target halts. In the below the exact meaning of @samp{signal
-number} is poorly defined. In general one of the UNIX signal numbering
-conventions is used.
+@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi ICE}
+You can use the E7000 in-circuit emulator to develop code for either the
+Hitachi SH or the H8/300H. Use one of these forms of the @samp{target
+e7000} command to connect @value{GDBN} to your E7000:
-@multitable @columnfractions .4 .6
+@table @code
+@item target e7000 @var{port} @var{speed}
+Use this form if your E7000 is connected to a serial port. The
+@var{port} argument identifies what serial port to use (for example,
+@samp{com2}). The third argument is the line speed in bits per second
+(for example, @samp{9600}).
-@item @code{S}@var{AA}
-@tab @var{AA} is the signal number
+@item target e7000 @var{hostname}
+If your E7000 is installed as a host on a TCP/IP network, you can just
+specify its hostname; @value{GDBN} uses @code{telnet} to connect.
+@end table
-@item @code{T}@var{AA}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}
-@tab
-@var{AA} = two hex digit signal number; @var{n...} = register number
-(hex), @var{r...} = target byte ordered register contents, size defined
-by @code{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE}; @var{n...} = @samp{thread}, @var{r...} =
-thread process ID, this is a hex integer; @var{n...} = other string not
-starting with valid hex digit. @value{GDBN} should ignore this
-@var{n...}, @var{r...} pair and go on to the next. This way we can
-extend the protocol.
+@node Hitachi Special
+@subsubsection Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros
-@item @code{W}@var{AA}
-@tab
-The process exited, and @var{AA} is the exit status. This is only
-applicable for certains sorts of targets.
+Some @value{GDBN} commands are available only for the H8/300:
-@item @code{X}@var{AA}
-@tab
-The process terminated with signal @var{AA}.
+@table @code
-@item @code{N}@var{AA}@code{;}@var{tttttttt}@code{;}@var{dddddddd}@code{;}@var{bbbbbbbb} @strong{(obsolete)}
-@tab
-@var{AA} = signal number; @var{tttttttt} = address of symbol "_start";
-@var{dddddddd} = base of data section; @var{bbbbbbbb} = base of bss
-section. @emph{Note: only used by Cisco Systems targets. The difference
-between this reply and the "qOffsets" query is that the 'N' packet may
-arrive spontaneously whereas the 'qOffsets' is a query initiated by the
-host debugger.}
+@kindex set machine
+@kindex show machine
+@item set machine h8300
+@itemx set machine h8300h
+Condition @value{GDBN} for one of the two variants of the H8/300
+architecture with @samp{set machine}. You can use @samp{show machine}
+to check which variant is currently in effect.
-@item @code{O}@var{XX...}
-@tab
-@var{XX...} is hex encoding of ASCII data. This can happen at any time
-while the program is running and the debugger should continue to wait
-for 'W', 'T', etc.
+@end table
-@end multitable
+@node H8/500
+@subsection H8/500
-The following set and query packets have already been defined.
+@table @code
-@multitable @columnfractions .2 .2 .6
+@kindex set memory @var{mod}
+@cindex memory models, H8/500
+@item set memory @var{mod}
+@itemx show memory
+Specify which H8/500 memory model (@var{mod}) you are using with
+@samp{set memory}; check which memory model is in effect with @samp{show
+memory}. The accepted values for @var{mod} are @code{small},
+@code{big}, @code{medium}, and @code{compact}.
-@item current thread
-@tab @code{q}@code{C}
-@tab Return the current thread id.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{QC}@var{pid}
-@tab
-Where @var{pid} is a HEX encoded 16 bit process id.
-@item
-@tab reply *
-@tab Any other reply implies the old pid.
+@end table
-@item compute CRC of memory block
-@tab @code{q}@code{CRC:}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
-@tab
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab An error (such as memory fault)
-@item
-@tab reply @code{C}@var{CRC32}
-@tab A 32 bit cyclic redundancy check of the specified memory region.
+@node i960
+@subsection Intel i960
-@item query @var{LIST} or @var{threadLIST} @strong{(deprecated)}
-@tab @code{q}@code{L}@var{startflag}@var{threadcount}@var{nextthread}
-@tab
-Obtain thread information from RTOS. Where: @var{startflag} (one hex
-digit) is one to indicate the first query and zero to indicate a
-subsequent query; @var{threadcount} (two hex digits) is the maximum
-number of threads the response packet can contain; and @var{nextthread}
-(eight hex digits), for subsequent queries (@var{startflag} is zero), is
-returned in the response as @var{argthread}.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{q}@code{M}@var{count}@var{done}@var{argthread}@var{thread...}
-@tab
-Where: @var{count} (two hex digits) is the number of threads being
-returned; @var{done} (one hex digit) is zero to indicate more threads
-and one indicates no further threads; @var{argthreadid} (eight hex
-digits) is @var{nextthread} from the request packet; @var{thread...} is
-a sequence of thread IDs from the target. @var{threadid} (eight hex
-digits). See @code{remote.c:parse_threadlist_response()}.
+@table @code
-@item query sect offs
-@tab @code{q}@code{Offsets}
-@tab Get section offsets.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{Text=}@var{xxx}@code{;Data=}@var{yyy}@code{;Bss=}@var{zzz}
+@kindex target mon960
+@item target mon960 @var{dev}
+MON960 monitor for Intel i960.
-@item thread info request
-@tab @code{q}@code{P}@var{mode}@var{threadid}
-@tab
-Returns information on @var{threadid}. Where: @var{mode} is a hex
-encoded 32 bit mode; @var{threadid} is a hex encoded 64 bit thread ID.
-@item
-@tab reply *
-@tab
-See @code{remote.c:remote_unpack_thread_info_response()}.
+@kindex target nindy
+@item target nindy @var{devicename}
+An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
+the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
+@file{/dev/ttya}.
-@item remote command
-@tab @code{q}@code{Rcmd,}@var{COMMAND}
-@tab
-@var{COMMAND} (hex encoded) is passed to the local interpreter for
-execution. Invalid commands should be reported using the output string.
-Before the final result packet, the target may also respond with a
-number of intermediate @code{O}@var{OUTPUT} console output
-packets. @emph{Implementors should note that providing access to a
-stubs's interpreter may have security implications}.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{OK}
-@tab
-A command response with no output.
-@item
-@tab reply @var{OUTPUT}
-@tab
-A command response with the hex encoded output string @var{OUTPUT}.
-@item
-@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-@tab
-Indicate a badly formed request.
+@end table
+
+@cindex Nindy
+@cindex i960
+@dfn{Nindy} is a ROM Monitor program for Intel 960 target systems. When
+@value{GDBN} is configured to control a remote Intel 960 using Nindy, you can
+tell @value{GDBN} how to connect to the 960 in several ways:
+@itemize @bullet
@item
-@tab reply @samp{}
-@tab
-When @samp{q}@samp{Rcmd} is not recognized.
+Through command line options specifying serial port, version of the
+Nindy protocol, and communications speed;
-@end multitable
+@item
+By responding to a prompt on startup;
-The following @samp{g}/@samp{G} packets have previously been defined.
-In the below, some thirty-two bit registers are transferred as sixty-four
-bits. Those registers should be zero/sign extended (which?) to fill the
-space allocated. Register bytes are transfered in target byte order.
-The two nibbles within a register byte are transfered most-significant -
-least-significant.
+@item
+By using the @code{target} command at any point during your @value{GDBN}
+session. @xref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}.
-@multitable @columnfractions .5 .5
+@end itemize
-@item MIPS32
-@tab
-All registers are transfered as thirty-two bit quantities in the order:
-32 general-purpose; sr; lo; hi; bad; cause; pc; 32 floating-point
-registers; fsr; fir; fp.
+@cindex download to Nindy-960
+With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load}
+downloads @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
+@value{GDBN}.
-@item MIPS64
-@tab
-All registers are transfered as sixty-four bit quantities (including
-thirty-two bit registers such as @code{sr}). The ordering is the same
-as @code{MIPS32}.
+@menu
+* Nindy Startup:: Startup with Nindy
+* Nindy Options:: Options for Nindy
+* Nindy Reset:: Nindy reset command
+@end menu
-@end multitable
+@node Nindy Startup
+@subsubsection Startup with Nindy
-Example sequence of a target being re-started. Notice how the restart
-does not get any direct output:
+If you simply start @code{@value{GDBP}} without using any command-line
+options, you are prompted for what serial port to use, @emph{before} you
+reach the ordinary @value{GDBN} prompt:
@example
-<- @code{R00}
--> @code{+}
-@emph{target restarts}
-<- @code{?}
--> @code{+}
--> @code{T001:1234123412341234}
-<- @code{+}
+Attach /dev/ttyNN -- specify NN, or "quit" to quit:
@end example
-Example sequence of a target being stepped by a single instruction:
+@noindent
+Respond to the prompt with whatever suffix (after @samp{/dev/tty})
+identifies the serial port you want to use. You can, if you choose,
+simply start up with no Nindy connection by responding to the prompt
+with an empty line. If you do this and later wish to attach to Nindy,
+use @code{target} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}).
-@example
-<- @code{G1445...}
--> @code{+}
-<- @code{s}
--> @code{+}
-@emph{time passes}
--> @code{T001:1234123412341234}
-<- @code{+}
-<- @code{g}
--> @code{+}
--> @code{1455...}
-<- @code{+}
-@end example
+@node Nindy Options
+@subsubsection Options for Nindy
+
+These are the startup options for beginning your @value{GDBN} session with a
+Nindy-960 board attached:
-@kindex set remotedebug@r{, serial protocol}
-@kindex show remotedebug@r{, serial protocol}
-@cindex packets, reporting on stdout
-@cindex serial connections, debugging
-If you have trouble with the serial connection, you can use the command
-@code{set remotedebug}. This makes @value{GDBN} report on all packets sent
-back and forth across the serial line to the remote machine. The
-packet-debugging information is printed on the @value{GDBN} standard output
-stream. @code{set remotedebug off} turns it off, and @code{show
-remotedebug} shows you its current state.
+@table @code
+@item -r @var{port}
+Specify the serial port name of a serial interface to be used to connect
+to the target system. This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is
+configured for the Intel 960 target architecture. You may specify
+@var{port} as any of: a full pathname (e.g. @samp{-r /dev/ttya}), a
+device name in @file{/dev} (e.g. @samp{-r ttya}), or simply the unique
+suffix for a specific @code{tty} (e.g. @samp{-r a}).
-@node Server
-@subsubsection Using the @code{gdbserver} program
+@item -O
+(An uppercase letter ``O'', not a zero.) Specify that @value{GDBN} should use
+the ``old'' Nindy monitor protocol to connect to the target system.
+This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is configured for the Intel 960
+target architecture.
-@kindex gdbserver
-@cindex remote connection without stubs
-@code{gdbserver} is a control program for Unix-like systems, which
-allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
-@code{target remote}---but without linking in the usual debugging stub.
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} if you specify @samp{-O}, but are actually trying to
+connect to a target system that expects the newer protocol, the connection
+fails, appearing to be a speed mismatch. @value{GDBN} repeatedly
+attempts to reconnect at several different line speeds. You can abort
+this process with an interrupt.
+@end quotation
-@code{gdbserver} is not a complete replacement for the debugging stubs,
-because it requires essentially the same operating-system facilities
-that @value{GDBN} itself does. In fact, a system that can run
-@code{gdbserver} to connect to a remote @value{GDBN} could also run
-@value{GDBN} locally! @code{gdbserver} is sometimes useful nevertheless,
-because it is a much smaller program than @value{GDBN} itself. It is
-also easier to port than all of @value{GDBN}, so you may be able to get
-started more quickly on a new system by using @code{gdbserver}.
-Finally, if you develop code for real-time systems, you may find that
-the tradeoffs involved in real-time operation make it more convenient to
-do as much development work as possible on another system, for example
-by cross-compiling. You can use @code{gdbserver} to make a similar
-choice for debugging.
+@item -brk
+Specify that @value{GDBN} should first send a @code{BREAK} signal to the target
+system, in an attempt to reset it, before connecting to a Nindy target.
-@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserver} communicate via either a serial line
-or a TCP connection, using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial
-protocol.
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} Many target systems do not have the hardware that this
+requires; it only works with a few boards.
+@end quotation
+@end table
-@table @emph
-@item On the target machine,
-you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
-@code{gdbserver} does not need your program's symbol table, so you can
-strip the program if necessary to save space. @value{GDBN} on the host
-system does all the symbol handling.
+The standard @samp{-b} option controls the line speed used on the serial
+port.
-To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with @value{GDBN};
-the name of your program; and the arguments for your program. The
-syntax is:
+@c @group
+@node Nindy Reset
+@subsubsection Nindy reset command
-@smallexample
-target> gdbserver @var{comm} @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
-@end smallexample
+@table @code
+@item reset
+@kindex reset
+For a Nindy target, this command sends a ``break'' to the remote target
+system; this is only useful if the target has been equipped with a
+circuit to perform a hard reset (or some other interesting action) when
+a break is detected.
+@end table
+@c @end group
-@var{comm} is either a device name (to use a serial line) or a TCP
-hostname and portnumber. For example, to debug Emacs with the argument
-@samp{foo.txt} and communicate with @value{GDBN} over the serial port
-@file{/dev/com1}:
+@node M32R/D
+@subsection Mitsubishi M32R/D
-@smallexample
-target> gdbserver /dev/com1 emacs foo.txt
-@end smallexample
+@table @code
-@code{gdbserver} waits passively for the host @value{GDBN} to communicate
-with it.
+@kindex target m32r
+@item target m32r @var{dev}
+Mitsubishi M32R/D ROM monitor.
-To use a TCP connection instead of a serial line:
+@end table
-@smallexample
-target> gdbserver host:2345 emacs foo.txt
-@end smallexample
+@node M68K
+@subsection M68k
-The only difference from the previous example is the first argument,
-specifying that you are communicating with the host @value{GDBN} via
-TCP. The @samp{host:2345} argument means that @code{gdbserver} is to
-expect a TCP connection from machine @samp{host} to local TCP port 2345.
-(Currently, the @samp{host} part is ignored.) You can choose any number
-you want for the port number as long as it does not conflict with any
-TCP ports already in use on the target system (for example, @code{23} is
-reserved for @code{telnet}).@footnote{If you choose a port number that
-conflicts with another service, @code{gdbserver} prints an error message
-and exits.} You must use the same port number with the host @value{GDBN}
-@code{target remote} command.
+The Motorola m68k configuration includes ColdFire support, and
+target command for the following ROM monitors.
-@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
-you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
-symbols and debugging information. Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
-using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
-(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
-running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}.) After that, use @code{target
-remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserver}. Its argument
-is either a device name (usually a serial device, like
-@file{/dev/ttyb}), or a TCP port descriptor in the form
-@code{@var{host}:@var{PORT}}. For example:
+@table @code
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
-@end smallexample
+@kindex target abug
+@item target abug @var{dev}
+ABug ROM monitor for M68K.
-@noindent
-communicates with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}, and
+@kindex target cpu32bug
+@item target cpu32bug @var{dev}
+CPU32BUG monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) target remote the-target:2345
-@end smallexample
+@kindex target dbug
+@item target dbug @var{dev}
+dBUG ROM monitor for Motorola ColdFire.
+
+@kindex target est
+@item target est @var{dev}
+EST-300 ICE monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
+
+@kindex target rom68k
+@item target rom68k @var{dev}
+ROM 68K monitor, running on an M68K IDP board.
-@noindent
-communicates via a TCP connection to port 2345 on host @w{@file{the-target}}.
-For TCP connections, you must start up @code{gdbserver} prior to using
-the @code{target remote} command. Otherwise you may get an error whose
-text depends on the host system, but which usually looks something like
-@samp{Connection refused}.
@end table
-@node NetWare
-@subsubsection Using the @code{gdbserve.nlm} program
+If @value{GDBN} is configured with @code{m68*-ericsson-*}, it will
+instead have only a single special target command:
-@kindex gdbserve.nlm
-@code{gdbserve.nlm} is a control program for NetWare systems, which
-allows you to connect your program with a remote @value{GDBN} via
-@code{target remote}.
+@table @code
-@value{GDBN} and @code{gdbserve.nlm} communicate via a serial line,
-using the standard @value{GDBN} remote serial protocol.
+@kindex target es1800
+@item target es1800 @var{dev}
+ES-1800 emulator for M68K.
-@table @emph
-@item On the target machine,
-you need to have a copy of the program you want to debug.
-@code{gdbserve.nlm} does not need your program's symbol table, so you
-can strip the program if necessary to save space. @value{GDBN} on the
-host system does all the symbol handling.
+@end table
-To use the server, you must tell it how to communicate with
-@value{GDBN}; the name of your program; and the arguments for your
-program. The syntax is:
+[context?]
-@smallexample
-load gdbserve [ BOARD=@var{board} ] [ PORT=@var{port} ]
- [ BAUD=@var{baud} ] @var{program} [ @var{args} @dots{} ]
-@end smallexample
+@table @code
-@var{board} and @var{port} specify the serial line; @var{baud} specifies
-the baud rate used by the connection. @var{port} and @var{node} default
-to 0, @var{baud} defaults to 9600@dmn{bps}.
+@kindex target rombug
+@item target rombug @var{dev}
+ROMBUG ROM monitor for OS/9000.
-For example, to debug Emacs with the argument @samp{foo.txt}and
-communicate with @value{GDBN} over serial port number 2 or board 1
-using a 19200@dmn{bps} connection:
+@end table
-@smallexample
-load gdbserve BOARD=1 PORT=2 BAUD=19200 emacs foo.txt
-@end smallexample
+@node M88K
+@subsection M88K
-@item On the @value{GDBN} host machine,
-you need an unstripped copy of your program, since @value{GDBN} needs
-symbols and debugging information. Start up @value{GDBN} as usual,
-using the name of the local copy of your program as the first argument.
-(You may also need the @w{@samp{--baud}} option if the serial line is
-running at anything other than 9600@dmn{bps}. After that, use @code{target
-remote} to establish communications with @code{gdbserve.nlm}. Its
-argument is a device name (usually a serial device, like
-@file{/dev/ttyb}). For example:
+@table @code
-@smallexample
-(@value{GDBP}) target remote /dev/ttyb
-@end smallexample
+@kindex target bug
+@item target bug @var{dev}
+BUG monitor, running on a MVME187 (m88k) board.
-@noindent
-communications with the server via serial line @file{/dev/ttyb}.
@end table
-@node KOD
-@section Kernel Object Display
-
-@cindex kernel object display
-@cindex kernel object
-@cindex KOD
+@node MIPS Embedded
+@subsection MIPS Embedded
-Some targets support kernel object display. Using this facility,
-@value{GDBN} communicates specially with the underlying operating system
-and can display information about operating system-level objects such as
-mutexes and other synchronization objects. Exactly which objects can be
-displayed is determined on a per-OS basis.
+@cindex MIPS boards
+@value{GDBN} can use the MIPS remote debugging protocol to talk to a
+MIPS board attached to a serial line. This is available when
+you configure @value{GDBN} with @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.
-Use the @code{set os} command to set the operating system. This tells
-@value{GDBN} which kernel object display module to initialize:
+@need 1000
+Use these @value{GDBN} commands to specify the connection to your target board:
-@example
-(gdb) set os cisco
-@end example
+@table @code
+@item target mips @var{port}
+@kindex target mips @var{port}
+To run a program on the board, start up @code{@value{GDBP}} with the
+name of your program as the argument. To connect to the board, use the
+command @samp{target mips @var{port}}, where @var{port} is the name of
+the serial port connected to the board. If the program has not already
+been downloaded to the board, you may use the @code{load} command to
+download it. You can then use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands.
-If @code{set os} succeeds, @value{GDBN} will display some information
-about the operating system, and will create a new @code{info} command
-which can be used to query the target. The @code{info} command is named
-after the operating system:
+For example, this sequence connects to the target board through a serial
+port, and loads and runs a program called @var{prog} through the
+debugger:
@example
-(gdb) info cisco
-List of Cisco Kernel Objects
-Object Description
-any Any and all objects
+host$ @value{GDBP} @var{prog}
+@value{GDBN} is free software and @dots{}
+(@value{GDBP}) target mips /dev/ttyb
+(@value{GDBP}) load @var{prog}
+(@value{GDBP}) run
@end example
-Further subcommands can be used to query about particular objects known
-by the kernel.
+@item target mips @var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}
+On some @value{GDBN} host configurations, you can specify a TCP
+connection (for instance, to a serial line managed by a terminal
+concentrator) instead of a serial port, using the syntax
+@samp{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
-There is currently no way to determine whether a given operating system
-is supported other than to try it.
+@item target pmon @var{port}
+@kindex target pmon @var{port}
+PMON ROM monitor.
+@item target ddb @var{port}
+@kindex target ddb @var{port}
+NEC's DDB variant of PMON for Vr4300.
-@node Configurations
-@chapter Configuration-Specific Information
+@item target lsi @var{port}
+@kindex target lsi @var{port}
+LSI variant of PMON.
-While nearly all @value{GDBN} commands are available for all native and
-cross versions of the debugger, there are some exceptions. This chapter
-describes things that are only available in certain configurations.
+@kindex target r3900
+@item target r3900 @var{dev}
+Densan DVE-R3900 ROM monitor for Toshiba R3900 Mips.
-There are three major categories of configurations: native
-configurations, where the host and target are the same, embedded
-operating system configurations, which are usually the same for several
-different processor architectures, and bare embedded processors, which
-are quite different from each other.
+@kindex target array
+@item target array @var{dev}
+Array Tech LSI33K RAID controller board.
-@menu
-* Native::
-* Embedded OS::
-* Embedded Processors::
-* Architectures::
-@end menu
+@end table
-@node Native
-@section Native
-This section describes details specific to particular native
-configurations.
+@noindent
+@value{GDBN} also supports these special commands for MIPS targets:
-@menu
-* HP-UX:: HP-UX
-* SVR4 Process Information:: SVR4 process information
-@end menu
+@table @code
+@item set processor @var{args}
+@itemx show processor
+@kindex set processor @var{args}
+@kindex show processor
+Use the @code{set processor} command to set the type of MIPS
+processor when you want to access processor-type-specific registers.
+For example, @code{set processor @var{r3041}} tells @value{GDBN}
+to use the CPU registers appropriate for the 3041 chip.
+Use the @code{show processor} command to see what MIPS processor @value{GDBN}
+is using. Use the @code{info reg} command to see what registers
+@value{GDBN} is using.
-@node HP-UX
-@subsection HP-UX
+@item set mipsfpu double
+@itemx set mipsfpu single
+@itemx set mipsfpu none
+@itemx show mipsfpu
+@kindex set mipsfpu
+@kindex show mipsfpu
+@cindex MIPS remote floating point
+@cindex floating point, MIPS remote
+If your target board does not support the MIPS floating point
+coprocessor, you should use the command @samp{set mipsfpu none} (if you
+need this, you may wish to put the command in your @value{GDBN} init
+file). This tells @value{GDBN} how to find the return value of
+functions which return floating point values. It also allows
+@value{GDBN} to avoid saving the floating point registers when calling
+functions on the board. If you are using a floating point coprocessor
+with only single precision floating point support, as on the @sc{r4650}
+processor, use the command @samp{set mipsfpu single}. The default
+double precision floating point coprocessor may be selected using
+@samp{set mipsfpu double}.
-On HP-UX systems, if you refer to a function or variable name that
-begins with a dollar sign, @value{GDBN} searches for a user or system
-name first, before it searches for a convenience variable.
+In previous versions the only choices were double precision or no
+floating point, so @samp{set mipsfpu on} will select double precision
+and @samp{set mipsfpu off} will select no floating point.
-@node SVR4 Process Information
-@subsection SVR4 process information
+As usual, you can inquire about the @code{mipsfpu} variable with
+@samp{show mipsfpu}.
-@kindex /proc
-@cindex process image
+@item set remotedebug @var{n}
+@itemx show remotedebug
+@kindex set remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
+@kindex show remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
+@cindex @code{remotedebug}, MIPS protocol
+@cindex MIPS @code{remotedebug} protocol
+@c FIXME! For this to be useful, you must know something about the MIPS
+@c FIXME...protocol. Where is it described?
+You can see some debugging information about communications with the board
+by setting the @code{remotedebug} variable. If you set it to @code{1} using
+@samp{set remotedebug 1}, every packet is displayed. If you set it
+to @code{2}, every character is displayed. You can check the current value
+at any time with the command @samp{show remotedebug}.
-Many versions of SVR4 provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can be
-used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
-subroutines. If @value{GDBN} is configured for an operating system with
-this facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on
-several kinds of information about the process running your program.
-@code{info proc} works only on SVR4 systems that include the
-@code{procfs} code. This includes OSF/1 (Digital Unix), Solaris, Irix,
-and Unixware, but not HP-UX or Linux, for example.
+@item set timeout @var{seconds}
+@itemx set retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}
+@itemx show timeout
+@itemx show retransmit-timeout
+@cindex @code{timeout}, MIPS protocol
+@cindex @code{retransmit-timeout}, MIPS protocol
+@kindex set timeout
+@kindex show timeout
+@kindex set retransmit-timeout
+@kindex show retransmit-timeout
+You can control the timeout used while waiting for a packet, in the MIPS
+remote protocol, with the @code{set timeout @var{seconds}} command. The
+default is 5 seconds. Similarly, you can control the timeout used while
+waiting for an acknowledgement of a packet with the @code{set
+retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}} command. The default is 3 seconds.
+You can inspect both values with @code{show timeout} and @code{show
+retransmit-timeout}. (These commands are @emph{only} available when
+@value{GDBN} is configured for @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.)
-@table @code
-@kindex info proc
-@item info proc
-Summarize available information about the process.
+The timeout set by @code{set timeout} does not apply when @value{GDBN}
+is waiting for your program to stop. In that case, @value{GDBN} waits
+forever because it has no way of knowing how long the program is going
+to run before stopping.
+@end table
-@kindex info proc mappings
-@item info proc mappings
-Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
-on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
+@node PowerPC
+@subsection PowerPC
-@kindex info proc times
-@item info proc times
-Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
-its children.
+@table @code
-@kindex info proc id
-@item info proc id
-Report on the process IDs related to your program: its own process ID,
-the ID of its parent, the process group ID, and the session ID.
+@kindex target dink32
+@item target dink32 @var{dev}
+DINK32 ROM monitor.
-@kindex info proc status
-@item info proc status
-General information on the state of the process. If the process is
-stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
-received.
+@kindex target ppcbug
+@item target ppcbug @var{dev}
+@kindex target ppcbug1
+@item target ppcbug1 @var{dev}
+PPCBUG ROM monitor for PowerPC.
+
+@kindex target sds
+@item target sds @var{dev}
+SDS monitor, running on a PowerPC board (such as Motorola's ADS).
-@item info proc all
-Show all the above information about the process.
@end table
-@node Embedded OS
-@section Embedded Operating Systems
+@node PA
+@subsection HP PA Embedded
-This section describes configurations involving the debugging of
-embedded operating systems that are available for several different
-architectures.
+@table @code
-@menu
-* VxWorks:: Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
-@end menu
+@kindex target op50n
+@item target op50n @var{dev}
+OP50N monitor, running on an OKI HPPA board.
-@value{GDBN} includes the ability to debug programs running on
-various real-time operating systems.
+@kindex target w89k
+@item target w89k @var{dev}
+W89K monitor, running on a Winbond HPPA board.
-@node VxWorks
-@subsection Using @value{GDBN} with VxWorks
+@end table
-@cindex VxWorks
+@node SH
+@subsection Hitachi SH
@table @code
-@kindex target vxworks
-@item target vxworks @var{machinename}
-A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
-is the target system's machine name or IP address.
+@kindex target hms@r{, with Hitachi SH}
+@item target hms @var{dev}
+A Hitachi SH board attached via serial line to your host. Use special
+commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial line and
+the communications speed used.
+
+@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi SH}
+@item target e7000 @var{dev}
+E7000 emulator for Hitachi SH.
+
+@kindex target sh3@r{, with SH}
+@kindex target sh3e@r{, with SH}
+@item target sh3 @var{dev}
+@item target sh3e @var{dev}
+Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
@end table
-On VxWorks, @code{load} links @var{filename} dynamically on the
-current target system as well as adding its symbols in @value{GDBN}.
+@node Sparclet
+@subsection Tsqware Sparclet
-@value{GDBN} enables developers to spawn and debug tasks running on networked
-VxWorks targets from a Unix host. Already-running tasks spawned from
-the VxWorks shell can also be debugged. @value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
-both the Unix host and on the VxWorks target. The program
-@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host. (It may be
-installed with the name @code{vxgdb}, to distinguish it from a
-@value{GDB} for debugging programs on the host itself.)
+@cindex Sparclet
+
+@value{GDBN} enables developers to debug tasks running on
+Sparclet targets from a Unix host.
+@value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
+both the Unix host and on the Sparclet target. The program
+@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host.
@table @code
-@item VxWorks-timeout @var{args}
-@kindex vxworks-timeout
-All VxWorks-based targets now support the option @code{vxworks-timeout}.
-This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
-seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses to rpc's. You might use this if
-your VxWorks target is a slow software simulator or is on the far side
-of a thin network line.
+@item remotetimeout @var{args}
+@kindex remotetimeout
+@value{GDBN} supports the option @code{remotetimeout}.
+This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
+seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses.
@end table
-The following information on connecting to VxWorks was current when
-this manual was produced; newer releases of VxWorks may use revised
-procedures.
-
-@kindex INCLUDE_RDB
-To use @value{GDBN} with VxWorks, you must rebuild your VxWorks kernel
-to include the remote debugging interface routines in the VxWorks
-library @file{rdb.a}. To do this, define @code{INCLUDE_RDB} in the
-VxWorks configuration file @file{configAll.h} and rebuild your VxWorks
-kernel. The resulting kernel contains @file{rdb.a}, and spawns the
-source debugging task @code{tRdbTask} when VxWorks is booted. For more
-information on configuring and remaking VxWorks, see the manufacturer's
-manual.
-@c VxWorks, see the @cite{VxWorks Programmer's Guide}.
+@cindex compiling, on Sparclet
+When compiling for debugging, include the options @samp{-g} to get debug
+information and @samp{-Ttext} to relocate the program to where you wish to
+load it on the target. You may also want to add the options @samp{-n} or
+@samp{-N} in order to reduce the size of the sections. Example:
-Once you have included @file{rdb.a} in your VxWorks system image and set
+@example
+sparclet-aout-gcc prog.c -Ttext 0x12010000 -g -o prog -N
+@end example
+
+You can use @code{objdump} to verify that the addresses are what you intended:
+
+@example
+sparclet-aout-objdump --headers --syms prog
+@end example
+
+@cindex running, on Sparclet
+Once you have set
your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
-run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}} (or @code{vxgdb},
-depending on your installation).
+run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}}
+(or @code{sparclet-aout-gdb}, depending on your installation).
@value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
@example
-(vxgdb)
+(gdbslet)
@end example
@menu
-* VxWorks Connection:: Connecting to VxWorks
-* VxWorks Download:: VxWorks download
-* VxWorks Attach:: Running tasks
+* Sparclet File:: Setting the file to debug
+* Sparclet Connection:: Connecting to Sparclet
+* Sparclet Download:: Sparclet download
+* Sparclet Execution:: Running and debugging
@end menu
-@node VxWorks Connection
-@subsubsection Connecting to VxWorks
+@node Sparclet File
+@subsubsection Setting file to debug
-The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a VxWorks target on the
-network. To connect to a target whose host name is ``@code{tt}'', type:
+The @value{GDBN} command @code{file} lets you choose with program to debug.
@example
-(vxgdb) target vxworks tt
+(gdbslet) file prog
@end example
-@need 750
-@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
-
-@smallexample
-Attaching remote machine across net...
-Connected to tt.
-@end smallexample
-
@need 1000
-@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol tables of any object modules
-loaded into the VxWorks target since it was last booted. @value{GDBN} locates
-these files by searching the directories listed in the command search
-path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}); if it fails
-to find an object file, it displays a message such as:
+@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol table of @file{prog}.
+@value{GDBN} locates
+the file by searching the directories listed in the command search
+path.
+If the file was compiled with debug information (option "-g"), source
+files will be searched as well.
+@value{GDBN} locates
+the source files by searching the directories listed in the directory search
+path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}).
+If it fails
+to find a file, it displays a message such as:
@example
-prog.o: No such file or directory.
+prog: No such file or directory.
@end example
-When this happens, add the appropriate directory to the search path with
-the @value{GDBN} command @code{path}, and execute the @code{target}
-command again.
+When this happens, add the appropriate directories to the search paths with
+the @value{GDBN} commands @code{path} and @code{dir}, and execute the
+@code{target} command again.
-@node VxWorks Download
-@subsubsection VxWorks download
+@node Sparclet Connection
+@subsubsection Connecting to Sparclet
-@cindex download to VxWorks
-If you have connected to the VxWorks target and you want to debug an
-object that has not yet been loaded, you can use the @value{GDBN}
-@code{load} command to download a file from Unix to VxWorks
-incrementally. The object file given as an argument to the @code{load}
-command is actually opened twice: first by the VxWorks target in order
-to download the code, then by @value{GDBN} in order to read the symbol
-table. This can lead to problems if the current working directories on
-the two systems differ. If both systems have NFS mounted the same
-filesystems, you can avoid these problems by using absolute paths.
-Otherwise, it is simplest to set the working directory on both systems
-to the directory in which the object file resides, and then to reference
-the file by its name, without any path. For instance, a program
-@file{prog.o} may reside in @file{@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb} in VxWorks
-and in @file{@var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb} on the host. To load this
-program, type this on VxWorks:
+The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a Sparclet target.
+To connect to a target on serial port ``@code{ttya}'', type:
@example
--> cd "@var{vxpath}/vw/demo/rdb"
+(gdbslet) target sparclet /dev/ttya
+Remote target sparclet connected to /dev/ttya
+main () at ../prog.c:3
@end example
-@noindent
-Then, in @value{GDBN}, type:
+@need 750
+@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
@example
-(vxgdb) cd @var{hostpath}/vw/demo/rdb
-(vxgdb) load prog.o
+Connected to ttya.
@end example
-@value{GDBN} displays a response similar to this:
-
-@smallexample
-Reading symbol data from wherever/vw/demo/rdb/prog.o... done.
-@end smallexample
-
-You can also use the @code{load} command to reload an object module
-after editing and recompiling the corresponding source file. Note that
-this makes @value{GDBN} delete all currently-defined breakpoints,
-auto-displays, and convenience variables, and to clear the value
-history. (This is necessary in order to preserve the integrity of
-debugger's data structures that reference the target system's symbol
-table.)
-
-@node VxWorks Attach
-@subsubsection Running tasks
+@node Sparclet Download
+@subsubsection Sparclet download
-@cindex running VxWorks tasks
-You can also attach to an existing task using the @code{attach} command as
-follows:
+@cindex download to Sparclet
+Once connected to the Sparclet target,
+you can use the @value{GDBN}
+@code{load} command to download the file from the host to the target.
+The file name and load offset should be given as arguments to the @code{load}
+command.
+Since the file format is aout, the program must be loaded to the starting
+address. You can use @code{objdump} to find out what this value is. The load
+offset is an offset which is added to the VMA (virtual memory address)
+of each of the file's sections.
+For instance, if the program
+@file{prog} was linked to text address 0x1201000, with data at 0x12010160
+and bss at 0x12010170, in @value{GDBN}, type:
@example
-(vxgdb) attach @var{task}
+(gdbslet) load prog 0x12010000
+Loading section .text, size 0xdb0 vma 0x12010000
@end example
-@noindent
-where @var{task} is the VxWorks hexadecimal task ID. The task can be running
-or suspended when you attach to it. Running tasks are suspended at
-the time of attachment.
-
-@node Embedded Processors
-@section Embedded Processors
+If the code is loaded at a different address then what the program was linked
+to, you may need to use the @code{section} and @code{add-symbol-file} commands
+to tell @value{GDBN} where to map the symbol table.
-This section goes into details specific to particular embedded
-configurations.
+@node Sparclet Execution
+@subsubsection Running and debugging
-@menu
-* A29K Embedded:: AMD A29K Embedded
-* ARM:: ARM
-* H8/300:: Hitachi H8/300
-* H8/500:: Hitachi H8/500
-* i960:: Intel i960
-* M32R/D:: Mitsubishi M32R/D
-* M68K:: Motorola M68K
-* M88K:: Motorola M88K
-* MIPS Embedded:: MIPS Embedded
-* PA:: HP PA Embedded
-* PowerPC: PowerPC
-* SH:: Hitachi SH
-* Sparclet:: Tsqware Sparclet
-* Sparclite:: Fujitsu Sparclite
-* ST2000:: Tandem ST2000
-* Z8000:: Zilog Z8000
-@end menu
+@cindex running and debugging Sparclet programs
+You can now begin debugging the task using @value{GDBN}'s execution control
+commands, @code{b}, @code{step}, @code{run}, etc. See the @value{GDBN}
+manual for the list of commands.
-@node A29K Embedded
-@subsection AMD A29K Embedded
+@example
+(gdbslet) b main
+Breakpoint 1 at 0x12010000: file prog.c, line 3.
+(gdbslet) run
+Starting program: prog
+Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xeffff21c) at prog.c:3
+3 char *symarg = 0;
+(gdbslet) step
+4 char *execarg = "hello!";
+(gdbslet)
+@end example
-@menu
-* A29K UDI::
-* A29K EB29K::
-* Comms (EB29K):: Communications setup
-* gdb-EB29K:: EB29K cross-debugging
-* Remote Log:: Remote log
-@end menu
+@node Sparclite
+@subsection Fujitsu Sparclite
@table @code
-@kindex target adapt
-@item target adapt @var{dev}
-Adapt monitor for A29K.
-
-@kindex target amd-eb
-@item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
-@cindex AMD EB29K
-Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
-@var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
-@var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
-name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
-@xref{A29K EB29K, ,EBMON protocol for AMD29K}.
-
-@end table
-
-@node A29K UDI
-@subsubsection A29K UDI
-
-@cindex UDI
-@cindex AMD29K via UDI
-
-@value{GDBN} supports AMD's UDI (``Universal Debugger Interface'')
-protocol for debugging the a29k processor family. To use this
-configuration with AMD targets running the MiniMON monitor, you need the
-program @code{MONTIP}, available from AMD at no charge. You can also
-use @value{GDBN} with the UDI-conformant a29k simulator program
-@code{ISSTIP}, also available from AMD.
+@kindex target sparclite
+@item target sparclite @var{dev}
+Fujitsu sparclite boards, used only for the purpose of loading.
+You must use an additional command to debug the program.
+For example: target remote @var{dev} using @value{GDBN} standard
+remote protocol.
-@table @code
-@item target udi @var{keyword}
-@kindex udi
-Select the UDI interface to a remote a29k board or simulator, where
-@var{keyword} is an entry in the AMD configuration file @file{udi_soc}.
-This file contains keyword entries which specify parameters used to
-connect to a29k targets. If the @file{udi_soc} file is not in your
-working directory, you must set the environment variable @samp{UDICONF}
-to its pathname.
@end table
-@node A29K EB29K
-@subsubsection EBMON protocol for AMD29K
-
-@cindex EB29K board
-@cindex running 29K programs
-
-AMD distributes a 29K development board meant to fit in a PC, together
-with a DOS-hosted monitor program called @code{EBMON}. As a shorthand
-term, this development system is called the ``EB29K''. To use
-@value{GDBN} from a Unix system to run programs on the EB29K board, you
-must first connect a serial cable between the PC (which hosts the EB29K
-board) and a serial port on the Unix system. In the following, we
-assume you've hooked the cable between the PC's @file{COM1} port and
-@file{/dev/ttya} on the Unix system.
-
-@node Comms (EB29K)
-@subsubsection Communications setup
-
-The next step is to set up the PC's port, by doing something like this
-in DOS on the PC:
-
-@example
-C:\> MODE com1:9600,n,8,1,none
-@end example
-
-@noindent
-This example---run on an MS DOS 4.0 system---sets the PC port to 9600
-bps, no parity, eight data bits, one stop bit, and no ``retry'' action;
-you must match the communications parameters when establishing the Unix
-end of the connection as well.
-@c FIXME: Who knows what this "no retry action" crud from the DOS manual may
-@c mean? It's optional; leave it out? ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
-@c
-@c It's optional, but it's unwise to omit it: who knows what is the
-@c default value set when the DOS machines boots? "No retry" means that
-@c the DOS serial device driver won't retry the operation if it fails;
-@c I understand that this is needed because the GDB serial protocol
-@c handles any errors and retransmissions itself. ---Eli Zaretskii, 3sep99
-
-To give control of the PC to the Unix side of the serial line, type
-the following at the DOS console:
-
-@example
-C:\> CTTY com1
-@end example
+@node ST2000
+@subsection Tandem ST2000
-@noindent
-(Later, if you wish to return control to the DOS console, you can use
-the command @code{CTTY con}---but you must send it over the device that
-had control, in our example over the @file{COM1} serial line).
+@value{GDBN} may be used with a Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's
+STDBUG protocol.
-From the Unix host, use a communications program such as @code{tip} or
-@code{cu} to communicate with the PC; for example,
+To connect your ST2000 to the host system, see the manufacturer's
+manual. Once the ST2000 is physically attached, you can run:
@example
-cu -s 9600 -l /dev/ttya
+target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
@end example
@noindent
-The @code{cu} options shown specify, respectively, the linespeed and the
-serial port to use. If you use @code{tip} instead, your command line
-may look something like the following:
+to establish it as your debugging environment. @var{dev} is normally
+the name of a serial device, such as @file{/dev/ttya}, connected to the
+ST2000 via a serial line. You can instead specify @var{dev} as a TCP
+connection (for example, to a serial line attached via a terminal
+concentrator) using the syntax @code{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
-@example
-tip -9600 /dev/ttya
-@end example
+The @code{load} and @code{attach} commands are @emph{not} defined for
+this target; you must load your program into the ST2000 as you normally
+would for standalone operation. @value{GDBN} reads debugging information
+(such as symbols) from a separate, debugging version of the program
+available on your host computer.
+@c FIXME!! This is terribly vague; what little content is here is
+@c basically hearsay.
-@noindent
-Your system may require a different name where we show
-@file{/dev/ttya} as the argument to @code{tip}. The communications
-parameters, including which port to use, are associated with the
-@code{tip} argument in the ``remote'' descriptions file---normally the
-system table @file{/etc/remote}.
-@c FIXME: What if anything needs doing to match the "n,8,1,none" part of
-@c the DOS side's comms setup? cu can support -o (odd
-@c parity), -e (even parity)---apparently no settings for no parity or
-@c for character size. Taken from stty maybe...? John points out tip
-@c can set these as internal variables, eg ~s parity=none; man stty
-@c suggests that it *might* work to stty these options with stdin or
-@c stdout redirected... ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
-@c
-@c There's nothing to be done for the "none" part of the DOS MODE
-@c command. The rest of the parameters should be matched by the
-@c baudrate, bits, and parity used by the Unix side. ---Eli Zaretskii, 3Sep99
-
-@kindex EBMON
-Using the @code{tip} or @code{cu} connection, change the DOS working
-directory to the directory containing a copy of your 29K program, then
-start the PC program @code{EBMON} (an EB29K control program supplied
-with your board by AMD). You should see an initial display from
-@code{EBMON} similar to the one that follows, ending with the
-@code{EBMON} prompt @samp{#}---
+@cindex ST2000 auxiliary commands
+These auxiliary @value{GDBN} commands are available to help you with the ST2000
+environment:
-@example
-C:\> G:
+@table @code
+@item st2000 @var{command}
+@kindex st2000 @var{cmd}
+@cindex STDBUG commands (ST2000)
+@cindex commands to STDBUG (ST2000)
+Send a @var{command} to the STDBUG monitor. See the manufacturer's
+manual for available commands.
-G:\> CD \usr\joe\work29k
+@item connect
+@cindex connect (to STDBUG)
+Connect the controlling terminal to the STDBUG command monitor. When
+you are done interacting with STDBUG, typing either of two character
+sequences gets you back to the @value{GDBN} command prompt:
+@kbd{@key{RET}~.} (Return, followed by tilde and period) or
+@kbd{@key{RET}~@key{C-d}} (Return, followed by tilde and control-D).
+@end table
-G:\USR\JOE\WORK29K> EBMON
-Am29000 PC Coprocessor Board Monitor, version 3.0-18
-Copyright 1990 Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
-Written by Gibbons and Associates, Inc.
+@node Z8000
+@subsection Zilog Z8000
-Enter '?' or 'H' for help
+@cindex Z8000
+@cindex simulator, Z8000
+@cindex Zilog Z8000 simulator
-PC Coprocessor Type = EB29K
-I/O Base = 0x208
-Memory Base = 0xd0000
+When configured for debugging Zilog Z8000 targets, @value{GDBN} includes
+a Z8000 simulator.
-Data Memory Size = 2048KB
-Available I-RAM Range = 0x8000 to 0x1fffff
-Available D-RAM Range = 0x80002000 to 0x801fffff
+For the Z8000 family, @samp{target sim} simulates either the Z8002 (the
+unsegmented variant of the Z8000 architecture) or the Z8001 (the
+segmented variant). The simulator recognizes which architecture is
+appropriate by inspecting the object code.
-PageSize = 0x400
-Register Stack Size = 0x800
-Memory Stack Size = 0x1800
+@table @code
+@item target sim @var{args}
+@kindex sim
+@kindex target sim@r{, with Z8000}
+Debug programs on a simulated CPU. If the simulator supports setup
+options, specify them via @var{args}.
+@end table
-CPU PRL = 0x3
-Am29027 Available = No
-Byte Write Available = Yes
+@noindent
+After specifying this target, you can debug programs for the simulated
+CPU in the same style as programs for your host computer; use the
+@code{file} command to load a new program image, the @code{run} command
+to run your program, and so on.
-# ~.
-@end example
+As well as making available all the usual machine registers
+(@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}), the Z8000 simulator provides three
+additional items of information as specially named registers:
-Then exit the @code{cu} or @code{tip} program (done in the example by
-typing @code{~.} at the @code{EBMON} prompt). @code{EBMON} keeps
-running, ready for @value{GDBN} to take over.
+@table @code
-For this example, we've assumed what is probably the most convenient
-way to make sure the same 29K program is on both the PC and the Unix
-system: a PC/NFS connection that establishes ``drive @file{G:}'' on the
-PC as a file system on the Unix host. If you do not have PC/NFS or
-something similar connecting the two systems, you must arrange some
-other way---perhaps floppy-disk transfer---of getting the 29K program
-from the Unix system to the PC; @value{GDBN} does @emph{not} download it over the
-serial line.
+@item cycles
+Counts clock-ticks in the simulator.
-@node gdb-EB29K
-@subsubsection EB29K cross-debugging
+@item insts
+Counts instructions run in the simulator.
-Finally, @code{cd} to the directory containing an image of your 29K
-program on the Unix system, and start @value{GDBN}---specifying as argument the
-name of your 29K program:
+@item time
+Execution time in 60ths of a second.
-@example
-cd /usr/joe/work29k
-@value{GDBP} myfoo
-@end example
+@end table
-@need 500
-Now you can use the @code{target} command:
+You can refer to these values in @value{GDBN} expressions with the usual
+conventions; for example, @w{@samp{b fputc if $cycles>5000}} sets a
+conditional breakpoint that suspends only after at least 5000
+simulated clock ticks.
-@example
-target amd-eb /dev/ttya 9600 MYFOO
-@c FIXME: test above 'target amd-eb' as spelled, with caps! caps are meant to
-@c emphasize that this is the name as seen by DOS (since I think DOS is
-@c single-minded about case of letters). ---doc@cygnus.com, 25feb91
-@end example
+@node Architectures
+@section Architectures
-@noindent
-In this example, we've assumed your program is in a file called
-@file{myfoo}. Note that the filename given as the last argument to
-@code{target amd-eb} should be the name of the program as it appears to DOS.
-In our example this is simply @code{MYFOO}, but in general it can include
-a DOS path, and depending on your transfer mechanism may not resemble
-the name on the Unix side.
-
-At this point, you can set any breakpoints you wish; when you are ready
-to see your program run on the 29K board, use the @value{GDBN} command
-@code{run}.
-
-To stop debugging the remote program, use the @value{GDBN} @code{detach}
-command.
+This section describes characteristics of architectures that affect
+all uses of @value{GDBN} with the architecture, both native and cross.
-To return control of the PC to its console, use @code{tip} or @code{cu}
-once again, after your @value{GDBN} session has concluded, to attach to
-@code{EBMON}. You can then type the command @code{q} to shut down
-@code{EBMON}, returning control to the DOS command-line interpreter.
-Type @kbd{CTTY con} to return command input to the main DOS console,
-and type @kbd{~.} to leave @code{tip} or @code{cu}.
-
-@node Remote Log
-@subsubsection Remote log
-@kindex eb.log
-@cindex log file for EB29K
-
-The @code{target amd-eb} command creates a file @file{eb.log} in the
-current working directory, to help debug problems with the connection.
-@file{eb.log} records all the output from @code{EBMON}, including echoes
-of the commands sent to it. Running @samp{tail -f} on this file in
-another window often helps to understand trouble with @code{EBMON}, or
-unexpected events on the PC side of the connection.
+@menu
+* A29K::
+* Alpha::
+* MIPS::
+@end menu
-@node ARM
-@subsection ARM
+@node A29K
+@subsection A29K
@table @code
-@kindex target rdi
-@item target rdi @var{dev}
-ARM Angel monitor, via RDI library interface to ADP protocol. You may
-use this target to communicate with both boards running the Angel
-monitor, or with the EmbeddedICE JTAG debug device.
-
-@kindex target rdp
-@item target rdp @var{dev}
-ARM Demon monitor.
+@kindex set rstack_high_address
+@cindex AMD 29K register stack
+@cindex register stack, AMD29K
+@item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
+On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
+@dfn{register stack}. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the
+extent of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the
+stack is ``large enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing
+memory locations that do not exist. If necessary, you can get around
+this problem by specifying the ending address of the register stack with
+the @code{set rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an
+address, which you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
+hexadecimal.
+
+@kindex show rstack_high_address
+@item show rstack_high_address
+Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
+processors.
@end table
-@node H8/300
-@subsection Hitachi H8/300
+@node Alpha
+@subsection Alpha
-@table @code
+See the following section.
-@kindex target hms@r{, with H8/300}
-@item target hms @var{dev}
-A Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500 board, attached via serial line to your host.
-Use special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
-line and the communications speed used.
+@node MIPS
+@subsection MIPS
-@kindex target e7000@r{, with H8/300}
-@item target e7000 @var{dev}
-E7000 emulator for Hitachi H8 and SH.
+@cindex stack on Alpha
+@cindex stack on MIPS
+@cindex Alpha stack
+@cindex MIPS stack
+Alpha- and MIPS-based computers use an unusual stack frame, which
+sometimes requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to
+find the beginning of a function.
-@kindex target sh3@r{, with H8/300}
-@kindex target sh3e@r{, with H8/300}
-@item target sh3 @var{dev}
-@item target sh3e @var{dev}
-Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
+@cindex response time, MIPS debugging
+To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
+@value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
+you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
+commands:
-@end table
+@table @code
+@cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (Alpha, MIPS)
+@item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
+Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its
+search for the beginning of a function. A value of @var{0} (the
+default) means there is no limit. However, except for @var{0}, the
+larger the limit the more bytes @code{heuristic-fence-post} must search
+and therefore the longer it takes to run.
-@cindex download to H8/300 or H8/500
-@cindex H8/300 or H8/500 download
-@cindex download to Hitachi SH
-@cindex Hitachi SH download
-When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500
-board, the @code{load} command downloads your program to the Hitachi
-board and also opens it as the current executable target for
-@value{GDBN} on your host (like the @code{file} command).
+@item show heuristic-fence-post
+Display the current limit.
+@end table
-@value{GDBN} needs to know these things to talk to your
-Hitachi SH, H8/300, or H8/500:
+@noindent
+These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
+for debugging programs on Alpha or MIPS processors.
-@enumerate
-@item
-that you want to use @samp{target hms}, the remote debugging interface
-for Hitachi microprocessors, or @samp{target e7000}, the in-circuit
-emulator for the Hitachi SH and the Hitachi 300H. (@samp{target hms} is
-the default when GDB is configured specifically for the Hitachi SH,
-H8/300, or H8/500.)
-@item
-what serial device connects your host to your Hitachi board (the first
-serial device available on your host is the default).
+@node Controlling GDB
+@chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
-@item
-what speed to use over the serial device.
-@end enumerate
+You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using the
+@code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
+data, see @ref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}. Other settings are
+described here.
@menu
-* Hitachi Boards:: Connecting to Hitachi boards.
-* Hitachi ICE:: Using the E7000 In-Circuit Emulator.
-* Hitachi Special:: Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros.
+* Prompt:: Prompt
+* Editing:: Command editing
+* History:: Command history
+* Screen Size:: Screen size
+* Numbers:: Numbers
+* Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
+* Debugging Output:: Optional messages about internal happenings
@end menu
-@node Hitachi Boards
-@subsubsection Connecting to Hitachi boards
+@node Prompt
+@section Prompt
-@c only for Unix hosts
-@kindex device
-@cindex serial device, Hitachi micros
-Use the special @code{@value{GDBP}} command @samp{device @var{port}} if you
-need to explicitly set the serial device. The default @var{port} is the
-first available port on your host. This is only necessary on Unix
-hosts, where it is typically something like @file{/dev/ttya}.
+@cindex prompt
-@kindex speed
-@cindex serial line speed, Hitachi micros
-@code{@value{GDBP}} has another special command to set the communications
-speed: @samp{speed @var{bps}}. This command also is only used from Unix
-hosts; on DOS hosts, set the line speed as usual from outside GDB with
-the DOS @code{mode} command (for instance,
-@w{@kbd{mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p}} for a 9600@dmn{bps} connection).
+@value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
+called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
+can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
+instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
+the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell
+which one you are talking to.
-The @samp{device} and @samp{speed} commands are available only when you
-use a Unix host to debug your Hitachi microprocessor programs. If you
-use a DOS host,
-@value{GDBN} depends on an auxiliary terminate-and-stay-resident program
-called @code{asynctsr} to communicate with the development board
-through a PC serial port. You must also use the DOS @code{mode} command
-to set up the serial port on the DOS side.
+@emph{Note:} @code{set prompt} does not add a space for you after the
+prompt you set. This allows you to set a prompt which ends in a space
+or a prompt that does not.
-The following sample session illustrates the steps needed to start a
-program under @value{GDBN} control on an H8/300. The example uses a
-sample H8/300 program called @file{t.x}. The procedure is the same for
-the Hitachi SH and the H8/500.
+@table @code
+@kindex set prompt
+@item set prompt @var{newprompt}
+Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
-First hook up your development board. In this example, we use a
-board attached to serial port @code{COM2}; if you use a different serial
-port, substitute its name in the argument of the @code{mode} command.
-When you call @code{asynctsr}, the auxiliary comms program used by the
-debugger, you give it just the numeric part of the serial port's name;
-for example, @samp{asyncstr 2} below runs @code{asyncstr} on
-@code{COM2}.
+@kindex show prompt
+@item show prompt
+Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
+@end table
-@example
-C:\H8300\TEST> asynctsr 2
-C:\H8300\TEST> mode com2:9600,n,8,1,p
+@node Editing
+@section Command editing
+@cindex readline
+@cindex command line editing
-Resident portion of MODE loaded
+@value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
+@sc{gnu} library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
+command line interface to the user. Advantages are @sc{gnu} Emacs-style
+or @dfn{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
+substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
+debugging sessions.
-COM2: 9600, n, 8, 1, p
+You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
+command @code{set}.
-@end example
+@table @code
+@kindex set editing
+@cindex editing
+@item set editing
+@itemx set editing on
+Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} We have noticed a bug in PC-NFS that conflicts with
-@code{asynctsr}. If you also run PC-NFS on your DOS host, you may need to
-disable it, or even boot without it, to use @code{asynctsr} to control
-your development board.
-@end quotation
+@item set editing off
+Disable command line editing.
-@kindex target hms@r{, and serial protocol}
-Now that serial communications are set up, and the development board is
-connected, you can start up @value{GDBN}. Call @code{@value{GDBP}} with
-the name of your program as the argument. @code{@value{GDBP}} prompts
-you, as usual, with the prompt @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. Use two special
-commands to begin your debugging session: @samp{target hms} to specify
-cross-debugging to the Hitachi board, and the @code{load} command to
-download your program to the board. @code{load} displays the names of
-the program's sections, and a @samp{*} for each 2K of data downloaded.
-(If you want to refresh @value{GDBN} data on symbols or on the
-executable file without downloading, use the @value{GDBN} commands
-@code{file} or @code{symbol-file}. These commands, and @code{load}
-itself, are described in @ref{Files,,Commands to specify files}.)
+@kindex show editing
+@item show editing
+Show whether command line editing is enabled.
+@end table
-@smallexample
-(eg-C:\H8300\TEST) @value{GDBP} t.x
-GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
- of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
- the conditions.
-There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
-for details.
-GDB @value{GDBVN}, Copyright 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
-(gdb) target hms
-Connected to remote H8/300 HMS system.
-(gdb) load t.x
-.text : 0x8000 .. 0xabde ***********
-.data : 0xabde .. 0xad30 *
-.stack : 0xf000 .. 0xf014 *
-@end smallexample
+@node History
+@section Command history
-At this point, you're ready to run or debug your program. From here on,
-you can use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands. The @code{break} command
-sets breakpoints; the @code{run} command starts your program;
-@code{print} or @code{x} display data; the @code{continue} command
-resumes execution after stopping at a breakpoint. You can use the
-@code{help} command at any time to find out more about @value{GDBN} commands.
+@value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
+debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
+happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
+history facility.
-Remember, however, that @emph{operating system} facilities aren't
-available on your development board; for example, if your program hangs,
-you can't send an interrupt---but you can press the @sc{reset} switch!
+@table @code
+@cindex history substitution
+@cindex history file
+@kindex set history filename
+@kindex GDBHISTFILE
+@item set history filename @var{fname}
+Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
+This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
+list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
+exits. You can access this list through history expansion or through
+the history command editing characters listed below. This file defaults
+to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
+@file{./.gdb_history} (@file{./_gdb_history} on MS-DOS) if this variable
+is not set.
-Use the @sc{reset} button on the development board
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-to interrupt your program (don't use @kbd{ctl-C} on the DOS host---it has
-no way to pass an interrupt signal to the development board); and
+@cindex history save
+@kindex set history save
+@item set history save
+@itemx set history save on
+Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
+@code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
-@item
-to return to the @value{GDBN} command prompt after your program finishes
-normally. The communications protocol provides no other way for @value{GDBN}
-to detect program completion.
-@end itemize
+@item set history save off
+Stop recording command history in a file.
-In either case, @value{GDBN} sees the effect of a @sc{reset} on the
-development board as a ``normal exit'' of your program.
+@cindex history size
+@kindex set history size
+@item set history size @var{size}
+Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
+This defaults to the value of the environment variable
+@code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
+@end table
-@node Hitachi ICE
-@subsubsection Using the E7000 in-circuit emulator
+@cindex history expansion
+History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
+@ifset have-readline-appendices
+@xref{Event Designators}.
+@end ifset
-@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi ICE}
-You can use the E7000 in-circuit emulator to develop code for either the
-Hitachi SH or the H8/300H. Use one of these forms of the @samp{target
-e7000} command to connect @value{GDBN} to your E7000:
+Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
+is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
+@code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
+follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
+a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
+history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
+@kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
+
+The commands to control history expansion are:
@table @code
-@item target e7000 @var{port} @var{speed}
-Use this form if your E7000 is connected to a serial port. The
-@var{port} argument identifies what serial port to use (for example,
-@samp{com2}). The third argument is the line speed in bits per second
-(for example, @samp{9600}).
+@kindex set history expansion
+@item set history expansion on
+@itemx set history expansion
+Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
-@item target e7000 @var{hostname}
-If your E7000 is installed as a host on a TCP/IP network, you can just
-specify its hostname; @value{GDBN} uses @code{telnet} to connect.
-@end table
+@item set history expansion off
+Disable history expansion.
-@node Hitachi Special
-@subsubsection Special @value{GDBN} commands for Hitachi micros
+The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
+editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @sc{gnu} Emacs
+or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
+@ifset have-readline-appendices
+@xref{Command Line Editing}.
+@end ifset
-Some @value{GDBN} commands are available only for the H8/300:
+@c @group
+@kindex show history
+@item show history
+@itemx show history filename
+@itemx show history save
+@itemx show history size
+@itemx show history expansion
+These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
+@code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
+@c @end group
+@end table
@table @code
+@kindex shows
+@item show commands
+Display the last ten commands in the command history.
-@kindex set machine
-@kindex show machine
-@item set machine h8300
-@itemx set machine h8300h
-Condition @value{GDBN} for one of the two variants of the H8/300
-architecture with @samp{set machine}. You can use @samp{show machine}
-to check which variant is currently in effect.
+@item show commands @var{n}
+Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
+@item show commands +
+Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
@end table
-@node H8/500
-@subsection H8/500
+@node Screen Size
+@section Screen size
+@cindex size of screen
+@cindex pauses in output
+
+Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
+information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
+@value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
+output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
+to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
+determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
+printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
+rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
+
+Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the terminal
+driver software. For example, on Unix @value{GDBN} uses the termcap data base
+together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
+@code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
+you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
+width} commands:
@table @code
+@kindex set height
+@kindex set width
+@kindex show width
+@kindex show height
+@item set height @var{lpp}
+@itemx show height
+@itemx set width @var{cpl}
+@itemx show width
+These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
+a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
+commands display the current settings.
-@kindex set memory @var{mod}
-@cindex memory models, H8/500
-@item set memory @var{mod}
-@itemx show memory
-Specify which H8/500 memory model (@var{mod}) you are using with
-@samp{set memory}; check which memory model is in effect with @samp{show
-memory}. The accepted values for @var{mod} are @code{small},
-@code{big}, @code{medium}, and @code{compact}.
+If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during
+output no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a
+file or to an editor buffer.
+Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
+from wrapping its output.
@end table
-@node i960
-@subsection Intel i960
+@node Numbers
+@section Numbers
+@cindex number representation
+@cindex entering numbers
+
+You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in
+@value{GDBN} by the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with
+@samp{0}, decimal numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers
+begin with @samp{0x}. Numbers that begin with none of these are, by
+default, entered in base 10; likewise, the default display for
+numbers---when no particular format is specified---is base 10. You can
+change the default base for both input and output with the @code{set
+radix} command.
@table @code
+@kindex set input-radix
+@item set input-radix @var{base}
+Set the default base for numeric input. Supported choices
+for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
+specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
+example, any of
-@kindex target mon960
-@item target mon960 @var{dev}
-MON960 monitor for Intel i960.
+@smallexample
+set radix 012
+set radix 10.
+set radix 0xa
+@end smallexample
-@item target nindy @var{devicename}
-An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
-the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
-@file{/dev/ttya}.
+@noindent
+sets the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
+leaves the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
+
+@kindex set output-radix
+@item set output-radix @var{base}
+Set the default base for numeric display. Supported choices
+for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
+specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix.
+
+@kindex show input-radix
+@item show input-radix
+Display the current default base for numeric input.
+@kindex show output-radix
+@item show output-radix
+Display the current default base for numeric display.
@end table
-@cindex Nindy
-@cindex i960
-@dfn{Nindy} is a ROM Monitor program for Intel 960 target systems. When
-@value{GDBN} is configured to control a remote Intel 960 using Nindy, you can
-tell @value{GDBN} how to connect to the 960 in several ways:
+@node Messages/Warnings
+@section Optional warnings and messages
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-Through command line options specifying serial port, version of the
-Nindy protocol, and communications speed;
+By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are
+running on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose}
+command. This makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy
+internal operation, so you will not think it has crashed.
-@item
-By responding to a prompt on startup;
+Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
+which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
+see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
-@item
-By using the @code{target} command at any point during your @value{GDBN}
-session. @xref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}.
+@table @code
+@kindex set verbose
+@item set verbose on
+Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
-@kindex target nindy
-@item target nindy @var{devicename}
-An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
-the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
-@file{/dev/ttya}.
+@item set verbose off
+Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
-@end itemize
+@kindex show verbose
+@item show verbose
+Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
+@end table
-@cindex download to Nindy-960
-With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load}
-downloads @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
-@value{GDBN}.
+By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an
+object file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may
+find this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading
+symbol files}).
-@menu
-* Nindy Startup:: Startup with Nindy
-* Nindy Options:: Options for Nindy
-* Nindy Reset:: Nindy reset command
-@end menu
+@table @code
+
+@kindex set complaints
+@item set complaints @var{limit}
+Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of
+unusual symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set
+@var{limit} to zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number
+to prevent complaints from being suppressed.
-@node Nindy Startup
-@subsubsection Startup with Nindy
+@kindex show complaints
+@item show complaints
+Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
-If you simply start @code{@value{GDBP}} without using any command-line
-options, you are prompted for what serial port to use, @emph{before} you
-reach the ordinary @value{GDBN} prompt:
+@end table
+
+By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
+lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
+you try to run a program which is already running:
@example
-Attach /dev/ttyNN -- specify NN, or "quit" to quit:
+(@value{GDBP}) run
+The program being debugged has been started already.
+Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
@end example
-@noindent
-Respond to the prompt with whatever suffix (after @samp{/dev/tty})
-identifies the serial port you want to use. You can, if you choose,
-simply start up with no Nindy connection by responding to the prompt
-with an empty line. If you do this and later wish to attach to Nindy,
-use @code{target} (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for managing targets}).
-
-@node Nindy Options
-@subsubsection Options for Nindy
-
-These are the startup options for beginning your @value{GDBN} session with a
-Nindy-960 board attached:
+If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
+commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
@table @code
-@item -r @var{port}
-Specify the serial port name of a serial interface to be used to connect
-to the target system. This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is
-configured for the Intel 960 target architecture. You may specify
-@var{port} as any of: a full pathname (e.g. @samp{-r /dev/ttya}), a
-device name in @file{/dev} (e.g. @samp{-r ttya}), or simply the unique
-suffix for a specific @code{tty} (e.g. @samp{-r a}).
-@item -O
-(An uppercase letter ``O'', not a zero.) Specify that @value{GDBN} should use
-the ``old'' Nindy monitor protocol to connect to the target system.
-This option is only available when @value{GDBN} is configured for the Intel 960
-target architecture.
+@kindex set confirm
+@cindex flinching
+@cindex confirmation
+@cindex stupid questions
+@item set confirm off
+Disables confirmation requests.
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} if you specify @samp{-O}, but are actually trying to
-connect to a target system that expects the newer protocol, the connection
-fails, appearing to be a speed mismatch. @value{GDBN} repeatedly
-attempts to reconnect at several different line speeds. You can abort
-this process with an interrupt.
-@end quotation
+@item set confirm on
+Enables confirmation requests (the default).
-@item -brk
-Specify that @value{GDBN} should first send a @code{BREAK} signal to the target
-system, in an attempt to reset it, before connecting to a Nindy target.
+@kindex show confirm
+@item show confirm
+Displays state of confirmation requests.
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} Many target systems do not have the hardware that this
-requires; it only works with a few boards.
-@end quotation
@end table
-The standard @samp{-b} option controls the line speed used on the serial
-port.
+@node Debugging Output
+@section Optional messages about internal happenings
+@table @code
+@kindex set debug arch
+@item set debug arch
+Turns on or off display of gdbarch debugging info. The default is off
+@kindex show debug arch
+@item show debug arch
+Displays the current state of displaying gdbarch debugging info.
+@kindex set debug event
+@item set debug event
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} event debugging info. The
+default is off.
+@kindex show debug event
+@item show debug event
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} event debugging
+info.
+@kindex set debug expression
+@item set debug expression
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} expression debugging info. The
+default is off.
+@kindex show debug expression
+@item show debug expression
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} expression
+debugging info.
+@kindex set debug overload
+@item set debug overload
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload debugging
+info. This includes info such as ranking of functions, etc. The default
+is off.
+@kindex show debug overload
+@item show debug overload
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} C@t{++} overload
+debugging info.
+@kindex set debug remote
+@cindex packets, reporting on stdout
+@cindex serial connections, debugging
+@item set debug remote
+Turns on or off display of reports on all packets sent back and forth across
+the serial line to the remote machine. The info is printed on the
+@value{GDBN} standard output stream. The default is off.
+@kindex show debug remote
+@item show debug remote
+Displays the state of display of remote packets.
+@kindex set debug serial
+@item set debug serial
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} serial debugging info. The
+default is off.
+@kindex show debug serial
+@item show debug serial
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} serial debugging
+info.
+@kindex set debug target
+@item set debug target
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} target debugging info. This info
+includes what is going on at the target level of GDB, as it happens. The
+default is off.
+@kindex show debug target
+@item show debug target
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} target debugging
+info.
+@kindex set debug varobj
+@item set debug varobj
+Turns on or off display of @value{GDBN} variable object debugging
+info. The default is off.
+@kindex show debug varobj
+@item show debug varobj
+Displays the current state of displaying @value{GDBN} variable object
+debugging info.
+@end table
-@c @group
-@node Nindy Reset
-@subsubsection Nindy reset command
+@node Sequences
+@chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
-@table @code
-@item reset
-@kindex reset
-For a Nindy target, this command sends a ``break'' to the remote target
-system; this is only useful if the target has been equipped with a
-circuit to perform a hard reset (or some other interesting action) when
-a break is detected.
-@end table
-@c @end group
+Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
+command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of
+commands for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command
+files.
-@node M32R/D
-@subsection Mitsubishi M32R/D
+@menu
+* Define:: User-defined commands
+* Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
+* Command Files:: Command files
+* Output:: Commands for controlled output
+@end menu
-@table @code
+@node Define
+@section User-defined commands
-@kindex target m32r
-@item target m32r @var{dev}
-Mitsubishi M32R/D ROM monitor.
+@cindex user-defined command
+A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to
+which you assign a new name as a command. This is done with the
+@code{define} command. User commands may accept up to 10 arguments
+separated by whitespace. Arguments are accessed within the user command
+via @var{$arg0@dots{}$arg9}. A trivial example:
-@end table
+@smallexample
+define adder
+ print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
+@end smallexample
-@node M68K
-@subsection M68k
+@noindent
+To execute the command use:
-The Motorola m68k configuration includes ColdFire support, and
-target command for the following ROM monitors.
+@smallexample
+adder 1 2 3
+@end smallexample
+
+@noindent
+This defines the command @code{adder}, which prints the sum of
+its three arguments. Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may
+reference variables, use complex expressions, or even perform inferior
+functions calls.
@table @code
-@kindex target abug
-@item target abug @var{dev}
-ABug ROM monitor for M68K.
+@kindex define
+@item define @var{commandname}
+Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
+by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
-@kindex target cpu32bug
-@item target cpu32bug @var{dev}
-CPU32BUG monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
+The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
+which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
+commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
-@kindex target dbug
-@item target dbug @var{dev}
-dBUG ROM monitor for Motorola ColdFire.
+@kindex if
+@kindex else
+@item if
+Takes a single argument, which is an expression to evaluate.
+It is followed by a series of commands that are executed
+only if the expression is true (nonzero).
+There can then optionally be a line @code{else}, followed
+by a series of commands that are only executed if the expression
+was false. The end of the list is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
-@kindex target est
-@item target est @var{dev}
-EST-300 ICE monitor, running on a CPU32 (M68K) board.
+@kindex while
+@item while
+The syntax is similar to @code{if}: the command takes a single argument,
+which is an expression to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to
+execute, one per line, terminated by an @code{end}.
+The commands are executed repeatedly as long as the expression
+evaluates to true.
-@kindex target rom68k
-@item target rom68k @var{dev}
-ROM 68K monitor, running on an M68K IDP board.
+@kindex document
+@item document @var{commandname}
+Document the user-defined command @var{commandname}, so that it can be
+accessed by @code{help}. The command @var{commandname} must already be
+defined. This command reads lines of documentation just as @code{define}
+reads the lines of the command definition, ending with @code{end}.
+After the @code{document} command is finished, @code{help} on command
+@var{commandname} displays the documentation you have written.
+
+You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
+documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
+does not change the documentation.
+
+@kindex help user-defined
+@item help user-defined
+List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
+(if any) for each.
+
+@kindex show user
+@item show user
+@itemx show user @var{commandname}
+Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but
+not its documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
+definitions for all user-defined commands.
@end table
-If @value{GDBN} is configured with @code{m68*-ericsson-*}, it will
-instead have only a single special target command:
+When user-defined commands are executed, the
+commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
+stops execution of the user-defined command.
-@table @code
+If used interactively, commands that would ask for confirmation proceed
+without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN}
+commands that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the
+messages when used in a user-defined command.
-@kindex target es1800
-@item target es1800 @var{dev}
-ES-1800 emulator for M68K.
+@node Hooks
+@section User-defined command hooks
+@cindex command hooks
+@cindex hooks, for commands
+@cindex hooks, pre-command
-@end table
+@kindex hook
+@kindex hook-
+You may define @dfn{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
+command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
+command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
+before that command.
-[context?]
+@cindex hooks, post-command
+@kindex hookpost
+@kindex hookpost-
+A hook may also be defined which is run after the command you executed.
+Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined command
+@samp{hookpost-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments) after
+that command. Post-execution hooks may exist simultaneously with
+pre-execution hooks, for the same command.
-@table @code
+It is valid for a hook to call the command which it hooks. If this
+occurs, the hook is not re-executed, thereby avoiding infinte recursion.
-@kindex target rombug
-@item target rombug @var{dev}
-ROMBUG ROM monitor for OS/9000.
+@c It would be nice if hookpost could be passed a parameter indicating
+@c if the command it hooks executed properly or not. FIXME!
-@end table
+@kindex stop@r{, a pseudo-command}
+In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
+(@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
+execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
+displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
-@node M88K
-@subsection M88K
+For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
+single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
+you could define:
-@table @code
+@example
+define hook-stop
+handle SIGALRM nopass
+end
-@kindex target bug
-@item target bug @var{dev}
-BUG monitor, running on a MVME187 (m88k) board.
+define hook-run
+handle SIGALRM pass
+end
-@end table
+define hook-continue
+handle SIGLARM pass
+end
+@end example
-@node MIPS Embedded
-@subsection MIPS Embedded
+As a further example, to hook at the begining and end of the @code{echo}
+command, and to add extra text to the beginning and end of the message,
+you could define:
-@cindex MIPS boards
-@value{GDBN} can use the MIPS remote debugging protocol to talk to a
-MIPS board attached to a serial line. This is available when
-you configure @value{GDBN} with @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.
+@example
+define hook-echo
+echo <<<---
+end
-@need 1000
-Use these @value{GDBN} commands to specify the connection to your target board:
+define hookpost-echo
+echo --->>>\n
+end
+
+(@value{GDBP}) echo Hello World
+<<<---Hello World--->>>
+(@value{GDBP})
+
+@end example
+
+You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
+not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
+name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
+@c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
+@c or not?
+If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
+@value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
+(before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
+
+If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
+get a warning from the @code{define} command.
-@table @code
-@item target mips @var{port}
-@kindex target mips @var{port}
-To run a program on the board, start up @code{@value{GDBP}} with the
-name of your program as the argument. To connect to the board, use the
-command @samp{target mips @var{port}}, where @var{port} is the name of
-the serial port connected to the board. If the program has not already
-been downloaded to the board, you may use the @code{load} command to
-download it. You can then use all the usual @value{GDBN} commands.
+@node Command Files
+@section Command files
-For example, this sequence connects to the target board through a serial
-port, and loads and runs a program called @var{prog} through the
-debugger:
+@cindex command files
+A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN}
+commands. Comments (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included.
+An empty line in a command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat
+the last command, as it would from the terminal.
-@example
-host$ @value{GDBP} @var{prog}
-GDB is free software and @dots{}
-(gdb) target mips /dev/ttyb
-(gdb) load @var{prog}
-(gdb) run
-@end example
+@cindex init file
+@cindex @file{.gdbinit}
+@cindex @file{gdb.ini}
+When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
+@dfn{init files}, normally called @file{.gdbinit}@footnote{The DJGPP
+port of @value{GDBN} uses the name @file{gdb.ini} instead, due to the
+limitations of file names imposed by DOS filesystems.}.
+During startup, @value{GDBN} does the following:
-@item target mips @var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}
-On some @value{GDBN} host configurations, you can specify a TCP
-connection (for instance, to a serial line managed by a terminal
-concentrator) instead of a serial port, using the syntax
-@samp{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
+@enumerate
+@item
+Reads the init file (if any) in your home directory@footnote{On
+DOS/Windows systems, the home directory is the one pointed to by the
+@code{HOME} environment variable.}.
-@item target pmon @var{port}
-@kindex target pmon @var{port}
-PMON ROM monitor.
+@item
+Processes command line options and operands.
-@item target ddb @var{port}
-@kindex target ddb @var{port}
-NEC's DDB variant of PMON for Vr4300.
+@item
+Reads the init file (if any) in the current working directory.
-@item target lsi @var{port}
-@kindex target lsi @var{port}
-LSI variant of PMON.
+@item
+Reads command files specified by the @samp{-x} option.
+@end enumerate
-@kindex target r3900
-@item target r3900 @var{dev}
-Densan DVE-R3900 ROM monitor for Toshiba R3900 Mips.
+The init file in your home directory can set options (such as @samp{set
+complaints}) that affect subsequent processing of command line options
+and operands. Init files are not executed if you use the @samp{-nx}
+option (@pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}).
-@kindex target array
-@item target array @var{dev}
-Array Tech LSI33K RAID controller board.
+@cindex init file name
+On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
+different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
+form of @value{GDBN} may need to coexist with other forms, hence a
+different name for the specialized version's init file). These are the
+environments with special init file names:
-@end table
+@cindex @file{.vxgdbinit}
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @file{.vxgdbinit}
+@cindex @file{.os68gdbinit}
+@item
+OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @file{.os68gdbinit}
-@noindent
-@value{GDBN} also supports these special commands for MIPS targets:
+@cindex @file{.esgdbinit}
+@item
+ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @file{.esgdbinit}
+@end itemize
+
+You can also request the execution of a command file with the
+@code{source} command:
@table @code
-@item set processor @var{args}
-@itemx show processor
-@kindex set processor @var{args}
-@kindex show processor
-Use the @code{set processor} command to set the type of MIPS
-processor when you want to access processor-type-specific registers.
-For example, @code{set processor @var{r3041}} tells @value{GDBN}
-to use the CPO registers appropriate for the 3041 chip.
-Use the @code{show processor} command to see what MIPS processor @value{GDBN}
-is using. Use the @code{info reg} command to see what registers
-@value{GDBN} is using.
+@kindex source
+@item source @var{filename}
+Execute the command file @var{filename}.
+@end table
-@item set mipsfpu double
-@itemx set mipsfpu single
-@itemx set mipsfpu none
-@itemx show mipsfpu
-@kindex set mipsfpu
-@kindex show mipsfpu
-@cindex MIPS remote floating point
-@cindex floating point, MIPS remote
-If your target board does not support the MIPS floating point
-coprocessor, you should use the command @samp{set mipsfpu none} (if you
-need this, you may wish to put the command in your @value{GDBINIT}
-file). This tells @value{GDBN} how to find the return value of
-functions which return floating point values. It also allows
-@value{GDBN} to avoid saving the floating point registers when calling
-functions on the board. If you are using a floating point coprocessor
-with only single precision floating point support, as on the @sc{r4650}
-processor, use the command @samp{set mipsfpu single}. The default
-double precision floating point coprocessor may be selected using
-@samp{set mipsfpu double}.
+The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
+printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
+of the command file.
-In previous versions the only choices were double precision or no
-floating point, so @samp{set mipsfpu on} will select double precision
-and @samp{set mipsfpu off} will select no floating point.
+Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
+without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
+normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
+when called from command files.
-As usual, you can inquire about the @code{mipsfpu} variable with
-@samp{show mipsfpu}.
+@value{GDBN} also accepts command input from standard input. In this
+mode, normal output goes to standard output and error output goes to
+standard error. Errors in a command file supplied on standard input do
+not terminate execution of the command file --- execution continues with
+the next command.
-@item set remotedebug @var{n}
-@itemx show remotedebug
-@kindex set remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
-@kindex show remotedebug@r{, MIPS protocol}
-@cindex @code{remotedebug}, MIPS protocol
-@cindex MIPS @code{remotedebug} protocol
-@c FIXME! For this to be useful, you must know something about the MIPS
-@c FIXME...protocol. Where is it described?
-You can see some debugging information about communications with the board
-by setting the @code{remotedebug} variable. If you set it to @code{1} using
-@samp{set remotedebug 1}, every packet is displayed. If you set it
-to @code{2}, every character is displayed. You can check the current value
-at any time with the command @samp{show remotedebug}.
+@example
+gdb < cmds > log 2>&1
+@end example
-@item set timeout @var{seconds}
-@itemx set retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}
-@itemx show timeout
-@itemx show retransmit-timeout
-@cindex @code{timeout}, MIPS protocol
-@cindex @code{retransmit-timeout}, MIPS protocol
-@kindex set timeout
-@kindex show timeout
-@kindex set retransmit-timeout
-@kindex show retransmit-timeout
-You can control the timeout used while waiting for a packet, in the MIPS
-remote protocol, with the @code{set timeout @var{seconds}} command. The
-default is 5 seconds. Similarly, you can control the timeout used while
-waiting for an acknowledgement of a packet with the @code{set
-retransmit-timeout @var{seconds}} command. The default is 3 seconds.
-You can inspect both values with @code{show timeout} and @code{show
-retransmit-timeout}. (These commands are @emph{only} available when
-@value{GDBN} is configured for @samp{--target=mips-idt-ecoff}.)
+(The syntax above will vary depending on the shell used.) This example
+will execute commands from the file @file{cmds}. All output and errors
+would be directed to @file{log}.
-The timeout set by @code{set timeout} does not apply when @value{GDBN}
-is waiting for your program to stop. In that case, @value{GDBN} waits
-forever because it has no way of knowing how long the program is going
-to run before stopping.
-@end table
+@node Output
+@section Commands for controlled output
-@node PowerPC
-@subsection PowerPC
+During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
+@value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
+explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
+describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
+want.
@table @code
+@kindex echo
+@item echo @var{text}
+@c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
+@c because it is not in ANSI.
+Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
+@var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
+newline. @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
+In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
+by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
+string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
+trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
+To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
+@samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
-@kindex target dink32
-@item target dink32 @var{dev}
-DINK32 ROM monitor.
+A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
+the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
-@kindex target ppcbug
-@item target ppcbug @var{dev}
-@kindex target ppcbug1
-@item target ppcbug1 @var{dev}
-PPCBUG ROM monitor for PowerPC.
+@example
+echo This is some text\n\
+which is continued\n\
+onto several lines.\n
+@end example
-@kindex target sds
-@item target sds @var{dev}
-SDS monitor, running on a PowerPC board (such as Motorola's ADS).
+produces the same output as
-@end table
+@example
+echo This is some text\n
+echo which is continued\n
+echo onto several lines.\n
+@end example
-@node PA
-@subsection HP PA Embedded
+@kindex output
+@item output @var{expression}
+Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
+newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
+value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information
+on expressions.
-@table @code
+@item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
+Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
+the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
+formats}, for more information.
-@kindex target op50n
-@item target op50n @var{dev}
-OP50N monitor, running on an OKI HPPA board.
+@kindex printf
+@item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
+Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
+@var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
+either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
+@var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
+subroutine
+@c FIXME: the above implies that at least all ANSI C formats are
+@c supported, but it isn't true: %E and %G don't work (or so it seems).
+@c Either this is a bug, or the manual should document what formats are
+@c supported.
-@kindex target w89k
-@item target w89k @var{dev}
-W89K monitor, running on a Winbond HPPA board.
+@example
+printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
+@end example
+
+For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
+
+@smallexample
+printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
+@end smallexample
+The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
+string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
+letter.
@end table
-@node SH
-@subsection Hitachi SH
+@node TUI
+@chapter @value{GDBN} Text User Interface
+@cindex TUI
-@table @code
+@menu
+* TUI Overview:: TUI overview
+* TUI Keys:: TUI key bindings
+* TUI Commands:: TUI specific commands
+* TUI Configuration:: TUI configuration variables
+@end menu
-@kindex target hms@r{, with Hitachi SH}
-@item target hms @var{dev}
-A Hitachi SH board attached via serial line to your host. Use special
-commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial line and
-the communications speed used.
+The @value{GDBN} Text User Interface, TUI in short,
+is a terminal interface which uses the @code{curses} library
+to show the source file, the assembly output, the program registers
+and @value{GDBN} commands in separate text windows.
+The TUI is available only when @value{GDBN} is configured
+with the @code{--enable-tui} configure option (@pxref{Configure Options}).
-@kindex target e7000@r{, with Hitachi SH}
-@item target e7000 @var{dev}
-E7000 emulator for Hitachi SH.
+@node TUI Overview
+@section TUI overview
-@kindex target sh3@r{, with SH}
-@kindex target sh3e@r{, with SH}
-@item target sh3 @var{dev}
-@item target sh3e @var{dev}
-Hitachi SH-3 and SH-3E target systems.
+The TUI has two display modes that can be switched while
+@value{GDBN} runs:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+A curses (or TUI) mode in which it displays several text
+windows on the terminal.
+
+@item
+A standard mode which corresponds to the @value{GDBN} configured without
+the TUI.
+@end itemize
-@end table
+In the TUI mode, @value{GDBN} can display several text window
+on the terminal:
-@node Sparclet
-@subsection Tsqware Sparclet
+@table @emph
+@item command
+This window is the @value{GDBN} command window with the @value{GDBN}
+prompt and the @value{GDBN} outputs. The @value{GDBN} input is still
+managed using readline but through the TUI. The @emph{command}
+window is always visible.
-@cindex Sparclet
+@item source
+The source window shows the source file of the program. The current
+line as well as active breakpoints are displayed in this window.
+The current program position is shown with the @samp{>} marker and
+active breakpoints are shown with @samp{*} markers.
-@value{GDBN} enables developers to debug tasks running on
-Sparclet targets from a Unix host.
-@value{GDBN} uses code that runs on
-both the Unix host and on the Sparclet target. The program
-@code{@value{GDBP}} is installed and executed on the Unix host.
+@item assembly
+The assembly window shows the disassembly output of the program.
+
+@item register
+This window shows the processor registers. It detects when
+a register is changed and when this is the case, registers that have
+changed are highlighted.
-@table @code
-@item timeout @var{args}
-@kindex remotetimeout
-@value{GDBN} supports the option @code{remotetimeout}.
-This option is set by the user, and @var{args} represents the number of
-seconds @value{GDBN} waits for responses.
@end table
-@kindex Compiling
-When compiling for debugging, include the options @samp{-g} to get debug
-information and @samp{-Ttext} to relocate the program to where you wish to
-load it on the target. You may also want to add the options @samp{-n} or
-@samp{-N} in order to reduce the size of the sections. Example:
+The source, assembly and register windows are attached to the thread
+and the frame position. They are updated when the current thread
+changes, when the frame changes or when the program counter changes.
+These three windows are arranged by the TUI according to several
+layouts. The layout defines which of these three windows are visible.
+The following layouts are available:
-@example
-sparclet-aout-gcc prog.c -Ttext 0x12010000 -g -o prog -N
-@end example
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+source
-You can use @code{objdump} to verify that the addresses are what you intended:
+@item
+assembly
-@example
-sparclet-aout-objdump --headers --syms prog
-@end example
+@item
+source and assembly
-@kindex Running
-Once you have set
-your Unix execution search path to find @value{GDBN}, you are ready to
-run @value{GDBN}. From your Unix host, run @code{@value{GDBP}}
-(or @code{sparclet-aout-gdb}, depending on your installation).
+@item
+source and registers
-@value{GDBN} comes up showing the prompt:
+@item
+assembly and registers
-@example
-(gdbslet)
-@end example
+@end itemize
-@menu
-* Sparclet File:: Setting the file to debug
-* Sparclet Connection:: Connecting to Sparclet
-* Sparclet Download:: Sparclet download
-* Sparclet Execution:: Running and debugging
-@end menu
+@node TUI Keys
+@section TUI Key Bindings
+@cindex TUI key bindings
-@node Sparclet File
-@subsubsection Setting file to debug
+The TUI installs several key bindings in the readline keymaps
+(@pxref{Command Line Editing}).
+They allow to leave or enter in the TUI mode or they operate
+directly on the TUI layout and windows. The following key bindings
+are installed for both TUI mode and the @value{GDBN} standard mode.
-The @value{GDBN} command @code{file} lets you choose with program to debug.
+@table @kbd
+@kindex C-x C-a
+@item C-x C-a
+@kindex C-x a
+@itemx C-x a
+@kindex C-x A
+@itemx C-x A
+Enter or leave the TUI mode. When the TUI mode is left,
+the curses window management is left and @value{GDBN} operates using
+its standard mode writing on the terminal directly. When the TUI
+mode is entered, the control is given back to the curses windows.
+The screen is then refreshed.
-@example
-(gdbslet) file prog
-@end example
+@kindex C-x 1
+@item C-x 1
+Use a TUI layout with only one window. The layout will
+either be @samp{source} or @samp{assembly}. When the TUI mode
+is not active, it will switch to the TUI mode.
-@need 1000
-@value{GDBN} then attempts to read the symbol table of @file{prog}.
-@value{GDBN} locates
-the file by searching the directories listed in the command search
-path.
-If the file was compiled with debug information (option "-g"), source
-files will be searched as well.
-@value{GDBN} locates
-the source files by searching the directories listed in the directory search
-path (@pxref{Environment, ,Your program's environment}).
-If it fails
-to find a file, it displays a message such as:
+Think of this key binding as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 1} binding.
-@example
-prog: No such file or directory.
-@end example
+@kindex C-x 2
+@item C-x 2
+Use a TUI layout with at least two windows. When the current
+layout shows already two windows, a next layout with two windows is used.
+When a new layout is chosen, one window will always be common to the
+previous layout and the new one.
-When this happens, add the appropriate directories to the search paths with
-the @value{GDBN} commands @code{path} and @code{dir}, and execute the
-@code{target} command again.
+Think of it as the Emacs @kbd{C-x 2} binding.
-@node Sparclet Connection
-@subsubsection Connecting to Sparclet
+@end table
-The @value{GDBN} command @code{target} lets you connect to a Sparclet target.
-To connect to a target on serial port ``@code{ttya}'', type:
+The following key bindings are handled only by the TUI mode:
-@example
-(gdbslet) target sparclet /dev/ttya
-Remote target sparclet connected to /dev/ttya
-main () at ../prog.c:3
-@end example
+@table @key
+@kindex PgUp
+@item PgUp
+Scroll the active window one page up.
-@need 750
-@value{GDBN} displays messages like these:
+@kindex PgDn
+@item PgDn
+Scroll the active window one page down.
-@example
-Connected to ttya.
-@end example
+@kindex Up
+@item Up
+Scroll the active window one line up.
-@node Sparclet Download
-@subsubsection Sparclet download
+@kindex Down
+@item Down
+Scroll the active window one line down.
-@cindex download to Sparclet
-Once connected to the Sparclet target,
-you can use the @value{GDBN}
-@code{load} command to download the file from the host to the target.
-The file name and load offset should be given as arguments to the @code{load}
-command.
-Since the file format is aout, the program must be loaded to the starting
-address. You can use @code{objdump} to find out what this value is. The load
-offset is an offset which is added to the VMA (virtual memory address)
-of each of the file's sections.
-For instance, if the program
-@file{prog} was linked to text address 0x1201000, with data at 0x12010160
-and bss at 0x12010170, in @value{GDBN}, type:
+@kindex Left
+@item Left
+Scroll the active window one column left.
-@example
-(gdbslet) load prog 0x12010000
-Loading section .text, size 0xdb0 vma 0x12010000
-@end example
+@kindex Right
+@item Right
+Scroll the active window one column right.
-If the code is loaded at a different address then what the program was linked
-to, you may need to use the @code{section} and @code{add-symbol-file} commands
-to tell @value{GDBN} where to map the symbol table.
+@kindex C-L
+@item C-L
+Refresh the screen.
-@node Sparclet Execution
-@subsubsection Running and debugging
+@end table
-@cindex running and debugging Sparclet programs
-You can now begin debugging the task using @value{GDBN}'s execution control
-commands, @code{b}, @code{step}, @code{run}, etc. See the @value{GDBN}
-manual for the list of commands.
+In the TUI mode, the arrow keys are used by the active window
+for scrolling. This means they are not available for readline. It is
+necessary to use other readline key bindings such as @key{C-p}, @key{C-n},
+@key{C-b} and @key{C-f}.
-@example
-(gdbslet) b main
-Breakpoint 1 at 0x12010000: file prog.c, line 3.
-(gdbslet) run
-Starting program: prog
-Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xeffff21c) at prog.c:3
-3 char *symarg = 0;
-(gdbslet) step
-4 char *execarg = "hello!";
-(gdbslet)
-@end example
+@node TUI Commands
+@section TUI specific commands
+@cindex TUI commands
-@node Sparclite
-@subsection Fujitsu Sparclite
+The TUI has specific commands to control the text windows.
+These commands are always available, that is they do not depend on
+the current terminal mode in which @value{GDBN} runs. When @value{GDBN}
+is in the standard mode, using these commands will automatically switch
+in the TUI mode.
@table @code
+@item layout next
+@kindex layout next
+Display the next layout.
-@kindex target sparclite
-@item target sparclite @var{dev}
-Fujitsu sparclite boards, used only for the purpose of loading.
-You must use an additional command to debug the program.
-For example: target remote @var{dev} using @value{GDBN} standard
-remote protocol.
-
-@end table
+@item layout prev
+@kindex layout prev
+Display the previous layout.
-@node ST2000
-@subsection Tandem ST2000
+@item layout src
+@kindex layout src
+Display the source window only.
-GDB may be used with a Tandem ST2000 phone switch, running Tandem's
-STDBUG protocol.
+@item layout asm
+@kindex layout asm
+Display the assembly window only.
-To connect your ST2000 to the host system, see the manufacturer's
-manual. Once the ST2000 is physically attached, you can run:
+@item layout split
+@kindex layout split
+Display the source and assembly window.
-@example
-target st2000 @var{dev} @var{speed}
-@end example
+@item layout regs
+@kindex layout regs
+Display the register window together with the source or assembly window.
-@noindent
-to establish it as your debugging environment. @var{dev} is normally
-the name of a serial device, such as @file{/dev/ttya}, connected to the
-ST2000 via a serial line. You can instead specify @var{dev} as a TCP
-connection (for example, to a serial line attached via a terminal
-concentrator) using the syntax @code{@var{hostname}:@var{portnumber}}.
+@item focus next | prev | src | asm | regs | split
+@kindex focus
+Set the focus to the named window.
+This command allows to change the active window so that scrolling keys
+can be affected to another window.
-The @code{load} and @code{attach} commands are @emph{not} defined for
-this target; you must load your program into the ST2000 as you normally
-would for standalone operation. @value{GDBN} reads debugging information
-(such as symbols) from a separate, debugging version of the program
-available on your host computer.
-@c FIXME!! This is terribly vague; what little content is here is
-@c basically hearsay.
+@item refresh
+@kindex refresh
+Refresh the screen. This is similar to using @key{C-L} key.
-@cindex ST2000 auxiliary commands
-These auxiliary @value{GDBN} commands are available to help you with the ST2000
-environment:
+@item update
+@kindex update
+Update the source window and the current execution point.
-@table @code
-@item st2000 @var{command}
-@kindex st2000 @var{cmd}
-@cindex STDBUG commands (ST2000)
-@cindex commands to STDBUG (ST2000)
-Send a @var{command} to the STDBUG monitor. See the manufacturer's
-manual for available commands.
+@item winheight @var{name} +@var{count}
+@itemx winheight @var{name} -@var{count}
+@kindex winheight
+Change the height of the window @var{name} by @var{count}
+lines. Positive counts increase the height, while negative counts
+decrease it.
-@item connect
-@cindex connect (to STDBUG)
-Connect the controlling terminal to the STDBUG command monitor. When
-you are done interacting with STDBUG, typing either of two character
-sequences gets you back to the @value{GDBN} command prompt:
-@kbd{@key{RET}~.} (Return, followed by tilde and period) or
-@kbd{@key{RET}~@key{C-d}} (Return, followed by tilde and control-D).
@end table
-@node Z8000
-@subsection Zilog Z8000
+@node TUI Configuration
+@section TUI configuration variables
+@cindex TUI configuration variables
-@cindex Z8000
-@cindex simulator, Z8000
-@cindex Zilog Z8000 simulator
+The TUI has several configuration variables that control the
+appearance of windows on the terminal.
-When configured for debugging Zilog Z8000 targets, @value{GDBN} includes
-a Z8000 simulator.
+@table @code
+@item set tui border-kind @var{kind}
+@kindex set tui border-kind
+Select the border appearance for the source, assembly and register windows.
+The possible values are the following:
+@table @code
+@item space
+Use a space character to draw the border.
-For the Z8000 family, @samp{target sim} simulates either the Z8002 (the
-unsegmented variant of the Z8000 architecture) or the Z8001 (the
-segmented variant). The simulator recognizes which architecture is
-appropriate by inspecting the object code.
+@item ascii
+Use ascii characters + - and | to draw the border.
-@table @code
-@item target sim @var{args}
-@kindex sim
-@kindex target sim@r{, with Z8000}
-Debug programs on a simulated CPU. If the simulator supports setup
-options, specify them via @var{args}.
-@end table
+@item acs
+Use the Alternate Character Set to draw the border. The border is
+drawn using character line graphics if the terminal supports them.
-@noindent
-After specifying this target, you can debug programs for the simulated
-CPU in the same style as programs for your host computer; use the
-@code{file} command to load a new program image, the @code{run} command
-to run your program, and so on.
+@end table
-As well as making available all the usual machine registers
-(@pxref{Registers, ,Registers}), the Z8000 simulator provides three
-additional items of information as specially named registers:
+@item set tui active-border-mode @var{mode}
+@kindex set tui active-border-mode
+Select the attributes to display the border of the active window.
+The possible values are @code{normal}, @code{standout}, @code{reverse},
+@code{half}, @code{half-standout}, @code{bold} and @code{bold-standout}.
+@item set tui border-mode @var{mode}
+@kindex set tui border-mode
+Select the attributes to display the border of other windows.
+The @var{mode} can be one of the following:
@table @code
+@item normal
+Use normal attributes to display the border.
-@item cycles
-Counts clock-ticks in the simulator.
+@item standout
+Use standout mode.
-@item insts
-Counts instructions run in the simulator.
+@item reverse
+Use reverse video mode.
-@item time
-Execution time in 60ths of a second.
+@item half
+Use half bright mode.
-@end table
+@item half-standout
+Use half bright and standout mode.
-You can refer to these values in @value{GDBN} expressions with the usual
-conventions; for example, @w{@samp{b fputc if $cycles>5000}} sets a
-conditional breakpoint that suspends only after at least 5000
-simulated clock ticks.
+@item bold
+Use extra bright or bold mode.
-@node Architectures
-@section Architectures
+@item bold-standout
+Use extra bright or bold and standout mode.
-This section describes characteristics of architectures that affect
-all uses of GDB with this architecture, both native and cross.
+@end table
-@menu
-* A29K::
-* Alpha::
-* MIPS::
-@end menu
+@end table
-@node A29K
-@subsection A29K
+@node Emacs
+@chapter Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
-@table @code
+@cindex Emacs
+@cindex @sc{gnu} Emacs
+A special interface allows you to use @sc{gnu} Emacs to view (and
+edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
+@value{GDBN}.
-@kindex set rstack_high_address
-@cindex AMD 29K register stack
-@cindex register stack, AMD29K
-@item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
-On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
-@dfn{register stack}. There is no way for @value{GDBN} to determine the
-extent of this stack. Normally, @value{GDBN} just assumes that the
-stack is ``large enough''. This may result in @value{GDBN} referencing
-memory locations that do not exist. If necessary, you can get around
-this problem by specifying the ending address of the register stack with
-the @code{set rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an
-address, which you probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
-hexadecimal.
+To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
+executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
+@value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
+created Emacs buffer.
+@c (Do not use the @code{-tui} option to run @value{GDBN} from Emacs.)
-@kindex show rstack_high_address
-@item show rstack_high_address
-Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
-processors.
+Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
+things:
-@end table
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
+@end itemize
-@node Alpha
-@subsection Alpha
+This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
+and output done by the program you are debugging.
+
+This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
+commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
+in this way.
+
+All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
+with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
+way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
+stop.
-See the following section.
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+@value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
+@end itemize
-@node MIPS
-@subsection MIPS
+Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
+source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
+left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
+source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
+and the source.
-@cindex stack on Alpha
-@cindex stack on MIPS
-@cindex Alpha stack
-@cindex MIPS stack
-Alpha- and MIPS-based computers use an unusual stack frame, which
-sometimes requires @value{GDBN} to search backward in the object code to
-find the beginning of a function.
+Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
+usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
-@cindex response time, MIPS debugging
-To improve response time (especially for embedded applications, where
-@value{GDBN} may be restricted to a slow serial line for this search)
-you may want to limit the size of this search, using one of these
-commands:
+@quotation
+@emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
+current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
+the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer does not
+appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
+environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
+session proceeds normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
+back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
+avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
+your program resides, or specify an absolute file name when prompted for the
+@kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
-@table @code
-@cindex @code{heuristic-fence-post} (Alpha,MIPS)
-@item set heuristic-fence-post @var{limit}
-Restrict @value{GDBN} to examining at most @var{limit} bytes in its
-search for the beginning of a function. A value of @var{0} (the
-default) means there is no limit. However, except for @var{0}, the
-larger the limit the more bytes @code{heuristic-fence-post} must search
-and therefore the longer it takes to run.
+A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
+switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
+@value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
+@end quotation
-@item show heuristic-fence-post
-Display the current limit.
-@end table
+By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
+you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
+several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
+Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
-@noindent
-These commands are available @emph{only} when @value{GDBN} is configured
-for debugging programs on Alpha or MIPS processors.
+@example
+(setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
+@end example
+@noindent
+(preceded by @kbd{M-:} or @kbd{ESC :}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
+in your @file{.emacs} file) makes Emacs call the program named
+``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
-@node Controlling GDB
-@chapter Controlling @value{GDBN}
+In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
+addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
-You can alter the way @value{GDBN} interacts with you by using the
-@code{set} command. For commands controlling how @value{GDBN} displays
-data, see @ref{Print Settings, ,Print settings}. Other settings are
-described here.
+@table @kbd
+@item C-h m
+Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
-@menu
-* Prompt:: Prompt
-* Editing:: Command editing
-* History:: Command history
-* Screen Size:: Screen size
-* Numbers:: Numbers
-* Messages/Warnings:: Optional warnings and messages
-@end menu
+@item M-s
+Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
+update the display window to show the current file and location.
-@node Prompt
-@section Prompt
+@item M-n
+Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
+calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
+to show the current file and location.
-@cindex prompt
+@item M-i
+Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
+display window accordingly.
-@value{GDBN} indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
-called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(@value{GDBP})}. You
-can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
-instance, when debugging @value{GDBN} with @value{GDBN}, it is useful to change
-the prompt in one of the @value{GDBN} sessions so that you can always tell
-which one you are talking to.
+@item M-x gdb-nexti
+Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
+display window accordingly.
-@emph{Note:} @code{set prompt} does not add a space for you after the
-prompt you set. This allows you to set a prompt which ends in a space
-or a prompt that does not.
+@item C-c C-f
+Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
+@code{finish} command.
-@table @code
-@kindex set prompt
-@item set prompt @var{newprompt}
-Directs @value{GDBN} to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
+@item M-c
+Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
+command.
-@kindex show prompt
-@item show prompt
-Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
-@end table
+@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
-@node Editing
-@section Command editing
-@cindex readline
-@cindex command line editing
+@item M-u
+Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
+(@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, Emacs, The @sc{gnu} Emacs Manual}),
+like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
-@value{GDBN} reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
-@sc{gnu} library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
-command line interface to the user. Advantages are @sc{gnu} Emacs-style
-or @dfn{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
-substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
-debugging sessions.
+@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
-You may control the behavior of command line editing in @value{GDBN} with the
-command @code{set}.
+@item M-d
+Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
+@value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
-@table @code
-@kindex set editing
-@cindex editing
-@item set editing
-@itemx set editing on
-Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
+@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
-@item set editing off
-Disable command line editing.
+@item C-x &
+Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
+of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
+around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
+then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
+argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
-@kindex show editing
-@item show editing
-Show whether command line editing is enabled.
+You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
+@code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
+otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
+inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} indicates that you
+wish special formatting, and also acts as an index to pick an element of the
+list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
+formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
+is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
@end table
-@node History
-@section Command history
-
-@value{GDBN} can keep track of the commands you type during your
-debugging sessions, so that you can be certain of precisely what
-happened. Use these commands to manage the @value{GDBN} command
-history facility.
+In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
+tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
-@table @code
-@cindex history substitution
-@cindex history file
-@kindex set history filename
-@kindex GDBHISTFILE
-@item set history filename @var{fname}
-Set the name of the @value{GDBN} command history file to @var{fname}.
-This is the file where @value{GDBN} reads an initial command history
-list, and where it writes the command history from this session when it
-exits. You can access this list through history expansion or through
-the history command editing characters listed below. This file defaults
-to the value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
-@file{./.gdb_history} (@file{./_gdb_history} on MS-DOS) if this variable
-is not set.
+If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
+it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
+request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
+the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
+frame.
-@cindex history save
-@kindex set history save
-@item set history save
-@itemx set history save on
-Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
-@code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
+The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
+which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
+the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
+communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
+delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
+to correspond properly with the code.
-@item set history save off
-Stop recording command history in a file.
+@c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
+@c if/when v19 does something similar. ---doc@cygnus.com 19dec1990
+@ignore
+@kindex Emacs Epoch environment
+@kindex Epoch
+@kindex inspect
-@cindex history size
-@kindex set history size
-@item set history size @var{size}
-Set the number of commands which @value{GDBN} keeps in its history list.
-This defaults to the value of the environment variable
-@code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
-@end table
+Version 18 of @sc{gnu} Emacs has a built-in window system
+called the @code{epoch}
+environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
+@code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
+each value is printed in its own window.
+@end ignore
-@cindex history expansion
-History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
-@ifset have-readline-appendices
-@xref{Event Designators}.
-@end ifset
+@include annotate.texi
+@include gdbmi.texinfo
-Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
-is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
-@code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
-follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
-a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
-history facilities do not attempt substitution on the strings
-@kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
+@node GDB Bugs
+@chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
+@cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
+@cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
-The commands to control history expansion are:
+Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
-@table @code
-@kindex set history expansion
-@item set history expansion on
-@itemx set history expansion
-Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
+Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
+may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
+the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
+reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
-@item set history expansion off
-Disable history expansion.
+In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
+information that enables us to fix the bug.
-The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
-editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @sc{gnu} Emacs
-or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
-@ifset have-readline-appendices
-@xref{Command Line Editing}.
-@end ifset
+@menu
+* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
+* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
+@end menu
-@c @group
-@kindex show history
-@item show history
-@itemx show history filename
-@itemx show history save
-@itemx show history size
-@itemx show history expansion
-These commands display the state of the @value{GDBN} history parameters.
-@code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
-@c @end group
-@end table
+@node Bug Criteria
+@section Have you found a bug?
+@cindex bug criteria
-@table @code
-@kindex show commands
-@item show commands
-Display the last ten commands in the command history.
+If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
-@item show commands @var{n}
-Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
+@itemize @bullet
+@cindex fatal signal
+@cindex debugger crash
+@cindex crash of debugger
+@item
+If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
+@value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
-@item show commands +
-Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
-@end table
+@cindex error on valid input
+@item
+If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a
+bug. (Note that if you're cross debugging, the problem may also be
+somewhere in the connection to the target.)
-@node Screen Size
-@section Screen size
-@cindex size of screen
-@cindex pauses in output
+@cindex invalid input
+@item
+If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
+that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
+``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
+for traditional practice''.
-Certain commands to @value{GDBN} may produce large amounts of
-information output to the screen. To help you read all of it,
-@value{GDBN} pauses and asks you for input at the end of each page of
-output. Type @key{RET} when you want to continue the output, or @kbd{q}
-to discard the remaining output. Also, the screen width setting
-determines when to wrap lines of output. Depending on what is being
-printed, @value{GDBN} tries to break the line at a readable place,
-rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
+@item
+If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
+for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
+@end itemize
-Normally @value{GDBN} knows the size of the screen from the terminal
-driver software. For example, on Unix @value{GDBN} uses the termcap data base
-together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
-@code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
-you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
-width} commands:
+@node Bug Reporting
+@section How to report bugs
+@cindex bug reports
+@cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
-@table @code
-@kindex set height
-@kindex set width
-@kindex show width
-@kindex show height
-@item set height @var{lpp}
-@itemx show height
-@itemx set width @var{cpl}
-@itemx show width
-These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
-a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
-commands display the current settings.
+A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.
+If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
+contact that organization first.
-If you specify a height of zero lines, @value{GDBN} does not pause during
-output no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a
-file or to an editor buffer.
+You can find contact information for many support companies and
+individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
+distribution.
+@c should add a web page ref...
-Likewise, you can specify @samp{set width 0} to prevent @value{GDBN}
-from wrapping its output.
-@end table
+In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for
+@value{GDBN} to this addresses:
-@node Numbers
-@section Numbers
-@cindex number representation
-@cindex entering numbers
+@example
+bug-gdb@@gnu.org
+@end example
-You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in @value{GDBN} by
-the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
-numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
-Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
-10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
-format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
-both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
+@strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
+@samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do
+not want to receive bug reports. Those that do have arranged to receive
+@samp{bug-gdb}.
-@table @code
-@kindex set input-radix
-@item set input-radix @var{base}
-Set the default base for numeric input. Supported choices
-for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
-specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
-example, any of
+The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
+serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
+the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
+newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
+problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
+path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
+we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
+bug reports to the mailing list.
-@smallexample
-set radix 012
-set radix 10.
-set radix 0xa
-@end smallexample
+As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
-@noindent
-sets the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
-leaves the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
+@example
+@sc{gnu} Debugger Bugs
+Free Software Foundation Inc.
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330
+Boston, MA 02111-1307
+USA
+@end example
-@kindex set output-radix
-@item set output-radix @var{base}
-Set the default base for numeric display. Supported choices
-for @var{base} are decimal 8, 10, or 16. @var{base} must itself be
-specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix.
+The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
+@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
+fact or leave it out, state it!
-@kindex show input-radix
-@item show input-radix
-Display the current default base for numeric input.
+Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
+problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
+assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
+Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
+stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
+name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
+of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
+the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
+easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
-@kindex show output-radix
-@item show output-radix
-Display the current default base for numeric display.
-@end table
+Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the
+bug. It may be that the bug has been reported previously, but neither
+you nor we can know that unless your bug report is complete and
+self-contained.
-@node Messages/Warnings
-@section Optional warnings and messages
+Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
+bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
+@emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
+bugs properly.
-By default, @value{GDBN} is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
-on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
-This makes @value{GDBN} tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
-you will not think it has crashed.
+To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
-Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
-which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read;
-see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to specify files}.
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start
+with no arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show
+version}.
-@table @code
-@kindex set verbose
-@item set verbose on
-Enables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
+Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
+the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
-@item set verbose off
-Disables @value{GDBN} output of certain informational messages.
+@item
+The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
+version number.
-@kindex show verbose
-@item show verbose
-Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
-@end table
+@item
+What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
+``@value{GCC}--2.8.1''.
-By default, if @value{GDBN} encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
-file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
-this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors reading symbol files}).
+@item
+What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you are
+debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.8.1'', or ``HP92453-01 A.10.32.03 HP
+C Compiler''. For GCC, you can say @code{gcc --version} to get this
+information; for other compilers, see the documentation for those
+compilers.
-@table @code
-@kindex set complaints
-@item set complaints @var{limit}
-Permits @value{GDBN} to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
-symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
-zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
-complaints from being suppressed.
+@item
+The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
+observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
+you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
+Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
-@kindex show complaints
-@item show complaints
-Displays how many symbol complaints @value{GDBN} is permitted to produce.
-@end table
+If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
+and then we might not encounter the bug.
-By default, @value{GDBN} is cautious, and asks what sometimes seems to be a
-lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
-you try to run a program which is already running:
+@item
+A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
+reproduce the bug.
-@example
-(@value{GDBP}) run
-The program being debugged has been started already.
-Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
-@end example
+@item
+A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
+incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
+
+Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we
+will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
+not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
+a chance to make a mistake.
+
+Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
+say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
+copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in
+the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might
+crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when
+ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for
+us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able
+to draw any conclusion from our observations.
-If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
-commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
+@item
+If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
+diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
+it by context, not by line number.
-@table @code
-@kindex set confirm
-@cindex flinching
-@cindex confirmation
-@cindex stupid questions
-@item set confirm off
-Disables confirmation requests.
+The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
+sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
-@item set confirm on
-Enables confirmation requests (the default).
+@end itemize
-@kindex show confirm
-@item show confirm
-Displays state of confirmation requests.
-@end table
+Here are some things that are not necessary:
-@node Sequences
-@chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
+@itemize @bullet
+@item
+A description of the envelope of the bug.
-Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
-command lists}), @value{GDBN} provides two ways to store sequences of commands
-for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
+Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
+which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
+changes will not affect it.
-@menu
-* Define:: User-defined commands
-* Hooks:: User-defined command hooks
-* Command Files:: Command files
-* Output:: Commands for controlled output
-@end menu
+This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
+will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
+with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
+We recommend that you save your time for something else.
-@node Define
-@section User-defined commands
+Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
+of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
+output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
+less time, and so on.
-@cindex user-defined command
-A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of @value{GDBN} commands to which
-you assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
-command. User commands may accept up to 10 arguments separated by whitespace.
-Arguments are accessed within the user command via @var{$arg0@dots{}$arg9}.
-A trivial example:
+However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
+report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
-@smallexample
-define adder
- print $arg0 + $arg1 + $arg2
-@end smallexample
+@item
+A patch for the bug.
-@noindent
-To execute the command use:
+A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
+the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
+a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
+to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
-@smallexample
-adder 1 2 3
-@end smallexample
+Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
+construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
+through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
+to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
-@noindent
-This defines the command @code{adder}, which prints the sum of
-its three arguments. Note the arguments are text substitutions, so they may
-reference variables, use complex expressions, or even perform inferior
-functions calls.
+And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
+patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
+help us to understand.
-@table @code
-@kindex define
-@item define @var{commandname}
-Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
-by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
+@item
+A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
-The definition of the command is made up of other @value{GDBN} command lines,
-which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
-commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
+Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
+things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
+@end itemize
-@kindex if
-@kindex else
-@item if
-Takes a single argument, which is an expression to evaluate.
-It is followed by a series of commands that are executed
-only if the expression is true (nonzero).
-There can then optionally be a line @code{else}, followed
-by a series of commands that are only executed if the expression
-was false. The end of the list is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
+@c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
+@c and consists of the two following files:
+@c rluser.texinfo
+@c inc-hist.texinfo
+@c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
+@c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
+@include rluser.texinfo
+@include inc-hist.texinfo
-@kindex while
-@item while
-The syntax is similar to @code{if}: the command takes a single argument,
-which is an expression to evaluate, and must be followed by the commands to
-execute, one per line, terminated by an @code{end}.
-The commands are executed repeatedly as long as the expression
-evaluates to true.
-@kindex document
-@item document @var{commandname}
-Document the user-defined command @var{commandname}, so that it can be
-accessed by @code{help}. The command @var{commandname} must already be
-defined. This command reads lines of documentation just as @code{define}
-reads the lines of the command definition, ending with @code{end}.
-After the @code{document} command is finished, @code{help} on command
-@var{commandname} displays the documentation you have written.
+@node Formatting Documentation
+@appendix Formatting Documentation
-You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
-documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
-does not change the documentation.
+@cindex @value{GDBN} reference card
+@cindex reference card
+The @value{GDBN} 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
+for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
+subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
+@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
+release.}. If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
+you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
-@kindex help user-defined
-@item help user-defined
-List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
-(if any) for each.
+The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
+can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
-@kindex show user
-@item show user
-@itemx show user @var{commandname}
-Display the @value{GDBN} commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
-documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
-definitions for all user-defined commands.
-@end table
+@example
+make refcard.dvi
+@end example
-When user-defined commands are executed, the
-commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
-stops execution of the user-defined command.
+The @value{GDBN} reference card is designed to print in @dfn{landscape}
+mode on US ``letter'' size paper;
+that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
+high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
+your @sc{dvi} output program.
-If used interactively, commands that would ask for confirmation proceed
-without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many @value{GDBN}
-commands that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the
-messages when used in a user-defined command.
+@cindex documentation
-@node Hooks
-@section User-defined command hooks
-@cindex command hooks
-@cindex hooks, for commands
+All the documentation for @value{GDBN} comes as part of the machine-readable
+distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
+a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
+on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
+formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
+and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
-You may define @emph{hooks}, which are a special kind of user-defined
-command. Whenever you run the command @samp{foo}, if the user-defined
-command @samp{hook-foo} exists, it is executed (with no arguments)
-before that command.
+@value{GDBN} includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info
+version of this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info
+file is @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
+subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
+necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
+but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in @sc{gnu}
+Emacs or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the
+@sc{gnu} Texinfo distribution.
-@kindex stop@r{, a pseudo-command}
-In addition, a pseudo-command, @samp{stop} exists. Defining
-(@samp{hook-stop}) makes the associated commands execute every time
-execution stops in your program: before breakpoint commands are run,
-displays are printed, or the stack frame is printed.
+If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
+Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
+@code{makeinfo}.
-For example, to ignore @code{SIGALRM} signals while
-single-stepping, but treat them normally during normal execution,
-you could define:
+If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level
+@value{GDBN} source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of
+version @value{GDBVN}), you can make the Info file by typing:
@example
-define hook-stop
-handle SIGALRM nopass
-end
+cd gdb
+make gdb.info
+@end example
-define hook-run
-handle SIGALRM pass
-end
+If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
+a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
+Texinfo definitions file.
-define hook-continue
-handle SIGLARM pass
-end
-@end example
+@TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
+produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
+document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
+has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
+command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
+(for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
+require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
-You can define a hook for any single-word command in @value{GDBN}, but
-not for command aliases; you should define a hook for the basic command
-name, e.g. @code{backtrace} rather than @code{bt}.
-@c FIXME! So how does Joe User discover whether a command is an alias
-@c or not?
-If an error occurs during the execution of your hook, execution of
-@value{GDBN} commands stops and @value{GDBN} issues a prompt
-(before the command that you actually typed had a chance to run).
+@TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
+@file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
+written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot either read or
+typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
+and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
+directory.
-If you try to define a hook which does not match any known command, you
-get a warning from the @code{define} command.
+If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
+typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
+subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
+@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and type:
-@node Command Files
-@section Command files
+@example
+make gdb.dvi
+@end example
-@cindex command files
-A command file for @value{GDBN} is a file of lines that are @value{GDBN}
-commands. Comments (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included.
-An empty line in a command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat
-the last command, as it would from the terminal.
+Then give @file{gdb.dvi} to your @sc{dvi} printing program.
-@cindex init file
-@cindex @file{.gdbinit}
-@cindex @file{gdb.ini}
-When you start @value{GDBN}, it automatically executes commands from its
-@dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{.gdbinit} on Unix, or
-@file{gdb.ini} on DOS/Windows. @value{GDBN} reads the init file (if
-any) in your home directory@footnote{On DOS/Windows systems, the home
-directory is the one pointed to by the @code{HOME} environment variable.},
-then processes command line options and
-operands, and then reads the init file (if any) in the current working
-directory. This is so the init file in your home directory can set
-options (such as @code{set complaints}) which affect the processing of
-the command line options and operands. The init files are not executed
-if you use the @samp{-nx} option; @pxref{Mode Options, ,Choosing modes}.
+@node Installing GDB
+@appendix Installing @value{GDBN}
+@cindex configuring @value{GDBN}
+@cindex installation
+
+@value{GDBN} comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
+of preparing @value{GDBN} for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
+build the @code{gdb} program.
+@iftex
+@c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
+@footnote{If you have a more recent version of @value{GDBN} than @value{GDBVN},
+look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
+installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
+@end iftex
-@cindex init file name
-On some configurations of @value{GDBN}, the init file is known by a
-different name (these are typically environments where a specialized
-form of @value{GDBN} may need to coexist with other forms, hence a
-different name for the specialized version's init file). These are the
-environments with special init file names:
+The @value{GDBN} distribution includes all the source code you need for
+@value{GDBN} in a single directory, whose name is usually composed by
+appending the version number to @samp{gdb}.
-@kindex .vxgdbinit
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-VxWorks (Wind River Systems real-time OS): @samp{.vxgdbinit}
+For example, the @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
+@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
-@kindex .os68gdbinit
-@item
-OS68K (Enea Data Systems real-time OS): @samp{.os68gdbinit}
+@table @code
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
+script for configuring @value{GDBN} and all its supporting libraries
-@kindex .esgdbinit
-@item
-ES-1800 (Ericsson Telecom AB M68000 emulator): @samp{.esgdbinit}
-@end itemize
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
+the source specific to @value{GDBN} itself
-You can also request the execution of a command file with the
-@code{source} command:
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
+source for the Binary File Descriptor library
-@table @code
-@kindex source
-@item source @var{filename}
-Execute the command file @var{filename}.
-@end table
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
+@sc{gnu} include files
-The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
-printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
-of the command file.
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
+source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
-Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
-without asking when used in a command file. Many @value{GDBN} commands that
-normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
-when called from command files.
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
+source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
-@node Output
-@section Commands for controlled output
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
+source for the @sc{gnu} command-line interface
-During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
-@value{GDBN} output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
-explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
-describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
-want.
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
+source for the @sc{gnu} filename pattern-matching subroutine
-@table @code
-@kindex echo
-@item echo @var{text}
-@c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
-@c because it is not in ANSI.
-Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
-@var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
-newline. @strong{No newline is printed unless you specify one.}
-In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
-by a space stands for a space. This is useful for displaying a
-string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
-trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
-To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
-@samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
+@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
+source for the @sc{gnu} memory-mapped malloc package
+@end table
-A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
-the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
+The simplest way to configure and build @value{GDBN} is to run @code{configure}
+from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
+this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
-@example
-echo This is some text\n\
-which is continued\n\
-onto several lines.\n
-@end example
+First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
+if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
+identifier for the platform on which @value{GDBN} will run as an
+argument.
-produces the same output as
+For example:
@example
-echo This is some text\n
-echo which is continued\n
-echo onto several lines.\n
+cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
+./configure @var{host}
+make
@end example
-@kindex output
-@item output @var{expression}
-Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
-newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
-value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information
-on expressions.
+@noindent
+where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
+@samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where @value{GDBN} will run.
+(You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
+correct value by examining your system.)
-@item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
-Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
-the same formats as for @code{print}. @xref{Output Formats,,Output
-formats}, for more information.
+Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
+@file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
+libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
+binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
-@kindex printf
-@item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
-Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
-@var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may be
-either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified by
-@var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute the C
-subroutine
-@c FIXME: the above implies that at least all ANSI C formats are
-@c supported, but it isn't true: %E and %G don't work (or so it seems).
-@c Either this is a bug, or the manual should document what formats are
-@c supported.
+@need 750
+@code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
+system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
+shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
@example
-printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
+sh configure @var{host}
@end example
-For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
+If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
+directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
+@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
+creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
+you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
-@smallexample
-printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
-@end smallexample
+You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
+subordinate directories in the @value{GDBN} distribution if you only want to
+configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
-The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
-string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
-letter.
-@end table
+For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
+the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
-@node Emacs
-@chapter Using @value{GDBN} under @sc{gnu} Emacs
+@example
+@group
+cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
+../configure @var{host}
+@end group
+@end example
-@cindex Emacs
-@cindex @sc{gnu} Emacs
-A special interface allows you to use @sc{gnu} Emacs to view (and
-edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
-@value{GDBN}.
+You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
+However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
+the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
+that @value{GDBN} uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
+let @value{GDBN} debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
-To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
-executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
-@value{GDBN} as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
-created Emacs buffer.
-@c (Do not use the @code{-tui} option to run @value{GDBN} from Emacs.)
+@menu
+* Separate Objdir:: Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
+* Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
+* Configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
+@end menu
-Using @value{GDBN} under Emacs is just like using @value{GDBN} normally except for two
-things:
+@node Separate Objdir
+@section Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
-@end itemize
+If you want to run @value{GDBN} versions for several host or target machines,
+you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
+host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
+allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
+rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
+handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (@sc{gnu} @code{make} does), running
+@code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
+program specified there.
-This applies both to @value{GDBN} commands and their output, and to the input
-and output done by the program you are debugging.
+To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
+with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
+(You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
+itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
+would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
+the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
-This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
-commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
-in this way.
+For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build @value{GDBN} in a
+separate directory for a Sun 4 like this:
-All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
-with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
-way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
-stop.
+@example
+@group
+cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
+mkdir ../gdb-sun4
+cd ../gdb-sun4
+../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
+make
+@end group
+@end example
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-@value{GDBN} displays source code through Emacs.
-@end itemize
+When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
+directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
+(and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
+the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
+directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and @value{GDBN} itself in
+@file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
-Each time @value{GDBN} displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
-source file for that frame and puts an arrow (@samp{=>}) at the
-left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
-source display, and splits the screen to show both your @value{GDBN} session
-and the source.
+One popular reason to build several @value{GDBN} configurations in separate
+directories is to configure @value{GDBN} for cross-compiling (where
+@value{GDBN} runs on one machine---the @dfn{host}---while debugging
+programs that run on another machine---the @dfn{target}).
+You specify a cross-debugging target by
+giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
-Explicit @value{GDBN} @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
-usual, but you probably have no reason to use them from Emacs.
+When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
+it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
+called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
-@quotation
-@emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
-current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
-the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer does not
-appear to show your source. @value{GDBN} can find programs by searching your
-environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the @value{GDBN} input and output
-session proceeds normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
-back from @value{GDBN} to locate the source files in this situation. To
-avoid this problem, either start @value{GDBN} mode from the directory where
-your program resides, or specify an absolute file name when prompted for the
-@kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
+The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
+directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
+directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
+directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
+will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
+
+When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
+directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
+if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
+with each other.
-A similar confusion can result if you use the @value{GDBN} @code{file} command to
-switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
-@value{GDBN} buffer in Emacs.
-@end quotation
+@node Config Names
+@section Specifying names for hosts and targets
-By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
-you need to call @value{GDBN} by a different name (for example, if you keep
-several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
-Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
+The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
+script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
+aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
+of information in the following pattern:
@example
-(setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
+@var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
@end example
-@noindent
-(preceded by @kbd{M-:} or @kbd{ESC :}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
-in your @file{.emacs} file) makes Emacs call the program named
-``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
-
-In the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
-addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
+For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
+or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
+option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
-@table @kbd
-@item C-h m
-Describe the features of Emacs' @value{GDBN} Mode.
+The @code{configure} script accompanying @value{GDBN} does not provide
+any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
+aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
+@code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
+script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
+abbreviations---for example:
-@item M-s
-Execute to another source line, like the @value{GDBN} @code{step} command; also
-update the display window to show the current file and location.
+@smallexample
+% sh config.sub i386-linux
+i386-pc-linux-gnu
+% sh config.sub alpha-linux
+alpha-unknown-linux-gnu
+% sh config.sub hp9k700
+hppa1.1-hp-hpux
+% sh config.sub sun4
+sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
+% sh config.sub sun3
+m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
+% sh config.sub i986v
+Invalid configuration `i986v': machine `i986v' not recognized
+@end smallexample
-@item M-n
-Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
-calls, like the @value{GDBN} @code{next} command. Then update the display window
-to show the current file and location.
+@noindent
+@code{config.sub} is also distributed in the @value{GDBN} source
+directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
-@item M-i
-Execute one instruction, like the @value{GDBN} @code{stepi} command; update
-display window accordingly.
+@node Configure Options
+@section @code{configure} options
-@item M-x gdb-nexti
-Execute to next instruction, using the @value{GDBN} @code{nexti} command; update
-display window accordingly.
+Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
+are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
+several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
+Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
-@item C-c C-f
-Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the @value{GDBN}
-@code{finish} command.
+@example
+configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
+ @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
+ @r{[}--exec-prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
+ @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
+ @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
+ @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]}
+ @var{host}
+@end example
-@item M-c
-Continue execution of your program, like the @value{GDBN} @code{continue}
-command.
+@noindent
+You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
+@samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
+@samp{--}.
-@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
+@table @code
+@item --help
+Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
-@item M-u
-Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
-(@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, Emacs, The @sc{gnu} Emacs Manual}),
-like the @value{GDBN} @code{up} command.
+@item --prefix=@var{dir}
+Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
+@file{@var{dir}}.
-@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
+@item --exec-prefix=@var{dir}
+Configure the source to install programs under directory
+@file{@var{dir}}.
-@item M-d
-Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
-@value{GDBN} @code{down} command.
+@c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
+@need 2000
+@item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
+@strong{Warning: using this option requires @sc{gnu} @code{make}, or another
+@code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
+Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
+@value{GDBN} source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
+build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
+directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
+the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
+directory @var{dirname}. @code{configure} creates directories under
+the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
+@var{dirname}.
-@emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
+@item --norecursion
+Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
+propagate configuration to subdirectories.
-@item C-x &
-Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
-of the @value{GDBN} I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
-around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
-then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
-argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
+@item --target=@var{target}
+Configure @value{GDBN} for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
+@var{target}. Without this option, @value{GDBN} is configured to debug
+programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as @value{GDBN} itself.
-You can customize this further by defining elements of the list
-@code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
-otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
-inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} indicates that you
-wish special formatting, and also acts as an index to pick an element of the
-list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
-formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
-is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
-@end table
+There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
-In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
-tells @value{GDBN} to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
+@item @var{host} @dots{}
+Configure @value{GDBN} to run on the specified @var{host}.
-If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
-it back is to type the command @code{f} in the @value{GDBN} buffer, to
-request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this recreates
-the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
-frame.
+There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
+@end table
-The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
-which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
-the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that @value{GDBN}
-communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
-delete lines from the text, the line numbers that @value{GDBN} knows cease
-to correspond properly with the code.
+There are many other options available as well, but they are generally
+needed for special purposes only.
-@c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
-@c if/when v19 does something similar. ---doc@cygnus.com 19dec1990
-@ignore
-@kindex Emacs Epoch environment
-@kindex Epoch
-@kindex inspect
+@node Maintenance Commands
+@appendix Maintenance Commands
+@cindex maintenance commands
+@cindex internal commands
-Version 18 of @sc{gnu} Emacs has a built-in window system
-called the @code{epoch}
-environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
-@code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
-each value is printed in its own window.
-@end ignore
+In addition to commands intended for @value{GDBN} users, @value{GDBN}
+includes a number of commands intended for @value{GDBN} developers.
+These commands are provided here for reference.
-@node GDB Bugs
-@chapter Reporting Bugs in @value{GDBN}
-@cindex bugs in @value{GDBN}
-@cindex reporting bugs in @value{GDBN}
+@table @code
+@kindex maint info breakpoints
+@item @anchor{maint info breakpoints}maint info breakpoints
+Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
+breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those @value{GDBN} is using for
+internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
+breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
+is shown:
-Your bug reports play an essential role in making @value{GDBN} reliable.
+@table @code
+@item breakpoint
+Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
-Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
-may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
-the entire community by making the next version of @value{GDBN} work better. Bug
-reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @value{GDBN}.
+@item watchpoint
+Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
-In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
-information that enables us to fix the bug.
+@item longjmp
+Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
+@code{longjmp} calls.
-@menu
-* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
-* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
-@end menu
+@item longjmp resume
+Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
-@node Bug Criteria
-@section Have you found a bug?
-@cindex bug criteria
+@item until
+Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{until} command.
-If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
+@item finish
+Temporary internal breakpoint used by the @value{GDBN} @code{finish} command.
-@itemize @bullet
-@cindex fatal signal
-@cindex debugger crash
-@cindex crash of debugger
-@item
-If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
-@value{GDBN} bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
+@item shlib events
+Shared library events.
-@cindex error on valid input
-@item
-If @value{GDBN} produces an error message for valid input, that is a
-bug. (Note that if you're cross debugging, the problem may also be
-somewhere in the connection to the target.)
+@end table
-@cindex invalid input
-@item
-If @value{GDBN} does not produce an error message for invalid input,
-that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
-``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
-for traditional practice''.
+@end table
-@item
-If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
-for improvement of @value{GDBN} are welcome in any case.
-@end itemize
-@node Bug Reporting
-@section How to report bugs
-@cindex bug reports
-@cindex @value{GDBN} bugs, reporting
+@node Remove Protocol
+@appendix @value{GDBN} Remote Serial Protocol
-A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.
-If you obtained @value{GDBN} from a support organization, we recommend you
-contact that organization first.
+There may be occasions when you need to know something about the
+protocol---for example, if there is only one serial port to your target
+machine, you might want your program to do something special if it
+recognizes a packet meant for @value{GDBN}.
-You can find contact information for many support companies and
-individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
-distribution.
-@c should add a web page ref...
+In the examples below, @samp{<-} and @samp{->} are used to indicate
+transmitted and received data respectfully.
-In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for
-@value{GDBN} to this addresses:
+@cindex protocol, @value{GDBN} remote serial
+@cindex serial protocol, @value{GDBN} remote
+@cindex remote serial protocol
+All @value{GDBN} commands and responses (other than acknowledgments) are
+sent as a @var{packet}. A @var{packet} is introduced with the character
+@samp{$}, the actual @var{packet-data}, and the terminating character
+@samp{#} followed by a two-digit @var{checksum}:
@example
-bug-gdb@@gnu.org
+@code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
@end example
+@noindent
-@strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
-@samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of @value{GDBN} do
-not want to receive bug reports. Those that do have arranged to receive
-@samp{bug-gdb}.
-
-The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
-serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
-the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
-newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
-problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
-path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
-we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
-bug reports to the mailing list.
+@cindex checksum, for @value{GDBN} remote
+@noindent
+The two-digit @var{checksum} is computed as the modulo 256 sum of all
+characters between the leading @samp{$} and the trailing @samp{#} (an
+eight bit unsigned checksum).
-As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
+Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0 the protocol
+specification also included an optional two-digit @var{sequence-id}:
@example
-@sc{gnu} Debugger Bugs
-Free Software Foundation Inc.
-59 Temple Place - Suite 330
-Boston, MA 02111-1307
-USA
+@code{$}@var{sequence-id}@code{:}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
@end example
-The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
-@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
-fact or leave it out, state it!
-
-Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
-problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
-assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
-Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
-stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
-name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
-of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
-the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
-easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
-
-Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the
-bug. It may be that the bug has been reported previously, but neither
-you nor we can know that unless your bug report is complete and
-self-contained.
+@cindex sequence-id, for @value{GDBN} remote
+@noindent
+That @var{sequence-id} was appended to the acknowledgment. @value{GDBN}
+has never output @var{sequence-id}s. Stubs that handle packets added
+since @value{GDBN} 5.0 must not accept @var{sequence-id}.
-Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
-bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
-@emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
-bugs properly.
+@cindex acknowledgment, for @value{GDBN} remote
+When either the host or the target machine receives a packet, the first
+response expected is an acknowledgment: either @samp{+} (to indicate
+the package was received correctly) or @samp{-} (to request
+retransmission):
-To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
+@example
+<- @code{$}@var{packet-data}@code{#}@var{checksum}
+-> @code{+}
+@end example
+@noindent
-@itemize @bullet
-@item
-The version of @value{GDBN}. @value{GDBN} announces it if you start
-with no arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show
-version}.
+The host (@value{GDBN}) sends @var{command}s, and the target (the
+debugging stub incorporated in your program) sends a @var{response}. In
+the case of step and continue @var{command}s, the response is only sent
+when the operation has completed (the target has again stopped).
-Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
-the bug in the current version of @value{GDBN}.
+@var{packet-data} consists of a sequence of characters with the
+exception of @samp{#} and @samp{$} (see @samp{X} packet for additional
+exceptions).
-@item
-The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
-version number.
+Fields within the packet should be separated using @samp{,} @samp{;} or
+@samp{:}. Except where otherwise noted all numbers are represented in
+HEX with leading zeros suppressed.
-@item
-What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @value{GDBN}---e.g.
-``@value{GCC}--2.8.1''.
+Implementors should note that prior to @value{GDBN} 5.0, the character
+@samp{:} could not appear as the third character in a packet (as it
+would potentially conflict with the @var{sequence-id}).
-@item
-What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you are
-debugging---e.g. ``@value{GCC}--2.8.1'', or ``HP92453-01 A.10.32.03 HP
-C Compiler''. For GCC, you can say @code{gcc --version} to get this
-information; for other compilers, see the documentation for those
-compilers.
+Response @var{data} can be run-length encoded to save space. A @samp{*}
+means that the next character is an @sc{ascii} encoding giving a repeat count
+which stands for that many repetitions of the character preceding the
+@samp{*}. The encoding is @code{n+29}, yielding a printable character
+where @code{n >=3} (which is where rle starts to win). The printable
+characters @samp{$}, @samp{#}, @samp{+} and @samp{-} or with a numeric
+value greater than 126 should not be used.
-@item
-The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
-observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
-you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
-Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
+Some remote systems have used a different run-length encoding mechanism
+loosely refered to as the cisco encoding. Following the @samp{*}
+character are two hex digits that indicate the size of the packet.
-If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
-and then we might not encounter the bug.
+So:
+@example
+"@code{0* }"
+@end example
+@noindent
+means the same as "0000".
-@item
-A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
-reproduce the bug.
+The error response returned for some packets includes a two character
+error number. That number is not well defined.
-@item
-A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
-incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
+For any @var{command} not supported by the stub, an empty response
+(@samp{$#00}) should be returned. That way it is possible to extend the
+protocol. A newer @value{GDBN} can tell if a packet is supported based
+on that response.
-Of course, if the bug is that @value{GDBN} gets a fatal signal, then we
-will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
-not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
-a chance to make a mistake.
+A stub is required to support the @samp{g}, @samp{G}, @samp{m}, @samp{M},
+@samp{c}, and @samp{s} @var{command}s. All other @var{command}s are
+optional.
-Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
-say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
-copy of @value{GDBN} is out of synch, or you have encountered a bug in
-the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might
-crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when
-ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for
-us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able
-to draw any conclusion from our observations.
+Below is a complete list of all currently defined @var{command}s and
+their corresponding response @var{data}:
+@page
+@multitable @columnfractions .30 .30 .40
+@item Packet
+@tab Request
+@tab Description
+@item extended mode
+@tab @code{!}
+@tab
+Enable extended mode. In extended mode, the remote server is made
+persistent. The @samp{R} packet is used to restart the program being
+debugged.
@item
-If you wish to suggest changes to the @value{GDBN} source, send us context
-diffs. If you even discuss something in the @value{GDBN} source, refer to
-it by context, not by line number.
+@tab reply @samp{OK}
+@tab
+The remote target both supports and has enabled extended mode.
-The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
-sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
+@item last signal
+@tab @code{?}
+@tab
+Indicate the reason the target halted. The reply is the same as for step
+and continue.
+@item
+@tab reply
+@tab see below
-@end itemize
-Here are some things that are not necessary:
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{a}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@itemize @bullet
+@item set program arguments @strong{(reserved)}
+@tab @code{A}@var{arglen}@code{,}@var{argnum}@code{,}@var{arg}@code{,...}
+@tab
@item
-A description of the envelope of the bug.
-
-Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
-which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
-changes will not affect it.
+@tab
+@tab
+Initialized @samp{argv[]} array passed into program. @var{arglen}
+specifies the number of bytes in the hex encoded byte stream @var{arg}.
+See @file{gdbserver} for more details.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
-This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
-will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
-with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
-We recommend that you save your time for something else.
+@item set baud @strong{(deprecated)}
+@tab @code{b}@var{baud}
+@tab
+Change the serial line speed to @var{baud}. JTC: @emph{When does the
+transport layer state change? When it's received, or after the ACK is
+transmitted. In either case, there are problems if the command or the
+acknowledgment packet is dropped.} Stan: @emph{If people really wanted
+to add something like this, and get it working for the first time, they
+ought to modify ser-unix.c to send some kind of out-of-band message to a
+specially-setup stub and have the switch happen "in between" packets, so
+that from remote protocol's point of view, nothing actually
+happened.}
-Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
-of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
-output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
-less time, and so on.
+@item set breakpoint @strong{(deprecated)}
+@tab @code{B}@var{addr},@var{mode}
+@tab
+Set (@var{mode} is @samp{S}) or clear (@var{mode} is @samp{C}) a
+breakpoint at @var{addr}. @emph{This has been replaced by the @samp{Z} and
+@samp{z} packets.}
-However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
-report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
+@item continue
+@tab @code{c}@var{addr}
+@tab
+@var{addr} is address to resume. If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
+current address.
+@item
+@tab reply
+@tab see below
+@item continue with signal
+@tab @code{C}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr}
+@tab
+Continue with signal @var{sig} (hex signal number). If
+@code{;}@var{addr} is omitted, resume at same address.
@item
-A patch for the bug.
+@tab reply
+@tab see below
-A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
-the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
-a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
-to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
+@item toggle debug @strong{(deprecated)}
+@tab @code{d}
+@tab
+toggle debug flag.
-Sometimes with a program as complicated as @value{GDBN} it is very hard to
-construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
-through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
-to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
+@item detach
+@tab @code{D}
+@tab
+Detach @value{GDBN} from the remote system. Sent to the remote target before
+@value{GDBN} disconnects.
+@item
+@tab reply @emph{no response}
+@tab
+@value{GDBN} does not check for any response after sending this packet.
-And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
-patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
-help us to understand.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{e}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@item
-A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{E}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
-things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
-@end itemize
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{f}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@c The readline documentation is distributed with the readline code
-@c and consists of the two following files:
-@c rluser.texinfo
-@c inc-hist.texinfo
-@c Use -I with makeinfo to point to the appropriate directory,
-@c environment var TEXINPUTS with TeX.
-@include rluser.texinfo
-@include inc-hist.texinfo
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{F}
+@tab Reserved for future use
+@item read registers
+@tab @code{g}
+@tab Read general registers.
+@item
+@tab reply @var{XX...}
+@tab
+Each byte of register data is described by two hex digits. The bytes
+with the register are transmitted in target byte order. The size of
+each register and their position within the @samp{g} @var{packet} are
+determined by the @value{GDBN} internal macros @var{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE} and
+@var{REGISTER_NAME} macros. The specification of several standard
+@code{g} packets is specified below.
+@item
+@tab @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error.
-@node Formatting Documentation
-@appendix Formatting Documentation
+@item write regs
+@tab @code{G}@var{XX...}
+@tab
+See @samp{g} for a description of the @var{XX...} data.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error
-@cindex @value{GDBN} reference card
-@cindex reference card
-The @value{GDBN} 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
-for printing with PostScript or Ghostscript, in the @file{gdb}
-subdirectory of the main source directory@footnote{In
-@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version @value{GDBVN}
-release.}. If you can use PostScript or Ghostscript with your printer,
-you can print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{h}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
-can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
+@item set thread
+@tab @code{H}@var{c}@var{t...}
+@tab
+Set thread for subsequent operations (@samp{m}, @samp{M}, @samp{g},
+@samp{G}, et.al.). @var{c} = @samp{c} for thread used in step and
+continue; @var{t...} can be -1 for all threads. @var{c} = @samp{g} for
+thread used in other operations. If zero, pick a thread, any thread.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error
-@example
-make refcard.dvi
-@end example
+@c FIXME: JTC:
+@c 'H': How restrictive (or permissive) is the thread model. If a
+@c thread is selected and stopped, are other threads allowed
+@c to continue to execute? As I mentioned above, I think the
+@c semantics of each command when a thread is selected must be
+@c described. For example:
+@c
+@c 'g': If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
+@c selected, returns the register block from that thread;
+@c otherwise returns current registers.
+@c
+@c 'G' If the stub supports threads and a specific thread is
+@c selected, sets the registers of the register block of
+@c that thread; otherwise sets current registers.
-The @value{GDBN} reference card is designed to print in @dfn{landscape}
-mode on US ``letter'' size paper;
-that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
-high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
-your @sc{dvi} output program.
+@item cycle step @strong{(draft)}
+@tab @code{i}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{nnn}
+@tab
+Step the remote target by a single clock cycle. If @code{,}@var{nnn} is
+present, cycle step @var{nnn} cycles. If @var{addr} is present, cycle
+step starting at that address.
-@cindex documentation
+@item signal then cycle step @strong{(reserved)}
+@tab @code{I}
+@tab
+See @samp{i} and @samp{S} for likely syntax and semantics.
-All the documentation for @value{GDBN} comes as part of the machine-readable
-distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
-a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
-on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
-formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
-and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{j}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@value{GDBN} includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info
-version of this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info
-file is @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
-subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
-necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
-but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in @sc{gnu}
-Emacs or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the
-@sc{gnu} Texinfo distribution.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{J}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
-Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
-@code{makeinfo}.
+@item kill request
+@tab @code{k}
+@tab
+FIXME: @emph{There is no description of how operate when a specific
+thread context has been selected (ie. does 'k' kill only that thread?)}.
-If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level
-@value{GDBN} source directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, in the case of
-version @value{GDBVN}), you can make the Info file by typing:
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{l}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@example
-cd gdb
-make gdb.info
-@end example
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{L}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need @TeX{},
-a program to print its @sc{dvi} output files, and @file{texinfo.tex}, the
-Texinfo definitions file.
+@item read memory
+@tab @code{m}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
+@tab
+Read @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
+Neither @value{GDBN} nor the stub assume that sized memory transfers are assumed
+using word alligned accesses. FIXME: @emph{A word aligned memory
+transfer mechanism is needed.}
+@item
+@tab reply @var{XX...}
+@tab
+@var{XX...} is mem contents. Can be fewer bytes than requested if able
+to read only part of the data. Neither @value{GDBN} nor the stub assume that
+sized memory transfers are assumed using word alligned accesses. FIXME:
+@emph{A word aligned memory transfer mechanism is needed.}
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab @var{NN} is errno
-@TeX{} is a typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
-produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
-document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
-has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
-command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
-(for PostScript devices) is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may
-require a file name without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
+@item write mem
+@tab @code{M}@var{addr},@var{length}@code{:}@var{XX...}
+@tab
+Write @var{length} bytes of memory starting at address @var{addr}.
+@var{XX...} is the data.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab
+for an error (this includes the case where only part of the data was
+written).
-@TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
-@file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
-written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot either read or
-typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
-and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
-directory.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{n}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
-typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
-subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
-@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb}) and type:
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{N}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@example
-make gdb.dvi
-@end example
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{o}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-Then give @file{gdb.dvi} to your @sc{dvi} printing program.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{O}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@node Installing GDB
-@appendix Installing @value{GDBN}
-@cindex configuring @value{GDBN}
-@cindex installation
+@item read reg @strong{(reserved)}
+@tab @code{p}@var{n...}
+@tab
+See write register.
+@item
+@tab return @var{r....}
+@tab The hex encoded value of the register in target byte order.
-@value{GDBN} comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
-of preparing @value{GDBN} for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
-build the @code{gdb} program.
-@iftex
-@c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
-@footnote{If you have a more recent version of @value{GDBN} than @value{GDBVN},
-look at the @file{README} file in the sources; we may have improved the
-installation procedures since publishing this manual.}
-@end iftex
+@item write reg
+@tab @code{P}@var{n...}@code{=}@var{r...}
+@tab
+Write register @var{n...} with value @var{r...}, which contains two hex
+digits for each byte in the register (target byte order).
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error
-The @value{GDBN} distribution includes all the source code you need for
-@value{GDBN} in a single directory, whose name is usually composed by
-appending the version number to @samp{gdb}.
+@item general query
+@tab @code{q}@var{query}
+@tab
+Request info about @var{query}. In general @value{GDBN} queries
+have a leading upper case letter. Custom vendor queries should use a
+company prefix (in lower case) ex: @samp{qfsf.var}. @var{query} may
+optionally be followed by a @samp{,} or @samp{;} separated list. Stubs
+must ensure that they match the full @var{query} name.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{XX...}
+@tab Hex encoded data from query. The reply can not be empty.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab error reply
+@item
+@tab reply @samp{}
+@tab Indicating an unrecognized @var{query}.
-For example, the @value{GDBN} version @value{GDBVN} distribution is in the
-@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory. That directory contains:
+@item general set
+@tab @code{Q}@var{var}@code{=}@var{val}
+@tab
+Set value of @var{var} to @var{val}. See @samp{q} for a discussing of
+naming conventions.
-@table @code
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
-script for configuring @value{GDBN} and all its supporting libraries
+@item reset @strong{(deprecated)}
+@tab @code{r}
+@tab
+Reset the entire system.
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/gdb
-the source specific to @value{GDBN} itself
+@item remote restart
+@tab @code{R}@var{XX}
+@tab
+Restart the program being debugged. @var{XX}, while needed, is ignored.
+This packet is only available in extended mode.
+@item
+@tab
+no reply
+@tab
+The @samp{R} packet has no reply.
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
-source for the Binary File Descriptor library
+@item step
+@tab @code{s}@var{addr}
+@tab
+@var{addr} is address to resume. If @var{addr} is omitted, resume at
+same address.
+@item
+@tab reply
+@tab see below
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/include
-@sc{gnu} include files
+@item step with signal
+@tab @code{S}@var{sig}@code{;}@var{addr}
+@tab
+Like @samp{C} but step not continue.
+@item
+@tab reply
+@tab see below
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/libiberty
-source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
+@item search
+@tab @code{t}@var{addr}@code{:}@var{PP}@code{,}@var{MM}
+@tab
+Search backwards starting at address @var{addr} for a match with pattern
+@var{PP} and mask @var{MM}. @var{PP} and @var{MM} are 4
+bytes. @var{addr} must be at least 3 digits.
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/opcodes
-source for the library of opcode tables and disassemblers
+@item thread alive
+@tab @code{T}@var{XX}
+@tab Find out if the thread XX is alive.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab thread is still alive
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab thread is dead
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/readline
-source for the @sc{gnu} command-line interface
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{u}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/glob
-source for the @sc{gnu} filename pattern-matching subroutine
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{U}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@item gdb-@value{GDBVN}/mmalloc
-source for the @sc{gnu} memory-mapped malloc package
-@end table
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{v}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-The simplest way to configure and build @value{GDBN} is to run @code{configure}
-from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
-this example is the @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} directory.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{V}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
-if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
-identifier for the platform on which @value{GDBN} will run as an
-argument.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{w}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-For example:
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{W}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@example
-cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
-./configure @var{host}
-make
-@end example
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{x}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@noindent
-where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
-@samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where @value{GDBN} will run.
-(You can often leave off @var{host}; @code{configure} tries to guess the
-correct value by examining your system.)
+@item write mem (binary)
+@tab @code{X}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}@var{:}@var{XX...}
+@tab
+@var{addr} is address, @var{length} is number of bytes, @var{XX...} is
+binary data. The characters @code{$}, @code{#}, and @code{0x7d} are
+escaped using @code{0x7d}.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error
-Running @samp{configure @var{host}} and then running @code{make} builds the
-@file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
-libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
-binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{y}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@need 750
-@code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
-system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
-shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
+@item reserved
+@tab @code{Y}
+@tab Reserved for future use
-@example
-sh configure @var{host}
-@end example
+@item remove break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)}
+@tab @code{z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
+@tab
+See @samp{Z}.
-If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
-directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
-@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} source directory for version @value{GDBVN}, @code{configure}
-creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
-you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
+@item insert break or watchpoint @strong{(draft)}
+@tab @code{Z}@var{t}@code{,}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
+@tab
+@var{t} is type: @samp{0} - software breakpoint, @samp{1} - hardware
+breakpoint, @samp{2} - write watchpoint, @samp{3} - read watchpoint,
+@samp{4} - access watchpoint; @var{addr} is address; @var{length} is in
+bytes. For a software breakpoint, @var{length} specifies the size of
+the instruction to be patched. For hardware breakpoints and watchpoints
+@var{length} specifies the memory region to be monitored. To avoid
+potential problems with duplicate packets, the operations should be
+implemented in an idempotent way.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab for an error
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab for success
+@item
+@tab @samp{}
+@tab If not supported.
-You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
-subordinate directories in the @value{GDBN} distribution if you only want to
-configure that subdirectory, but be sure to specify a path to it.
+@item reserved
+@tab <other>
+@tab Reserved for future use
-For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, type the following to configure only
-the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
+@end multitable
-@example
-@group
-cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}/bfd
-../configure @var{host}
-@end group
-@end example
+The @samp{C}, @samp{c}, @samp{S}, @samp{s} and @samp{?} packets can
+receive any of the below as a reply. In the case of the @samp{C},
+@samp{c}, @samp{S} and @samp{s} packets, that reply is only returned
+when the target halts. In the below the exact meaning of @samp{signal
+number} is poorly defined. In general one of the UNIX signal numbering
+conventions is used.
-You can install @code{@value{GDBP}} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
-However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
-the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
-that @value{GDBN} uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
-let @value{GDBN} debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
+@multitable @columnfractions .4 .6
-@menu
-* Separate Objdir:: Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
-* Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
-* Configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
-@end menu
+@item @code{S}@var{AA}
+@tab @var{AA} is the signal number
-@node Separate Objdir
-@section Compiling @value{GDBN} in another directory
+@item @code{T}@var{AA}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}@var{n...}@code{:}@var{r...}@code{;}
+@tab
+@var{AA} = two hex digit signal number; @var{n...} = register number
+(hex), @var{r...} = target byte ordered register contents, size defined
+by @code{REGISTER_RAW_SIZE}; @var{n...} = @samp{thread}, @var{r...} =
+thread process ID, this is a hex integer; @var{n...} = other string not
+starting with valid hex digit. @value{GDBN} should ignore this
+@var{n...}, @var{r...} pair and go on to the next. This way we can
+extend the protocol.
-If you want to run @value{GDBN} versions for several host or target machines,
-you need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
-host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
-allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
-rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
-handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (@sc{gnu} @code{make} does), running
-@code{make} in each of these directories builds the @code{gdb}
-program specified there.
+@item @code{W}@var{AA}
+@tab
+The process exited, and @var{AA} is the exit status. This is only
+applicable for certains sorts of targets.
-To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
-with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
-(You also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
-itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
-would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
-the @samp{--srcdir} option; it is assumed.)
+@item @code{X}@var{AA}
+@tab
+The process terminated with signal @var{AA}.
-For example, with version @value{GDBVN}, you can build @value{GDBN} in a
-separate directory for a Sun 4 like this:
+@item @code{N}@var{AA}@code{;}@var{t...}@code{;}@var{d...}@code{;}@var{b...} @strong{(obsolete)}
+@tab
+@var{AA} = signal number; @var{t...} = address of symbol "_start";
+@var{d...} = base of data section; @var{b...} = base of bss section.
+@emph{Note: only used by Cisco Systems targets. The difference between
+this reply and the "qOffsets" query is that the 'N' packet may arrive
+spontaneously whereas the 'qOffsets' is a query initiated by the host
+debugger.}
-@example
-@group
-cd gdb-@value{GDBVN}
-mkdir ../gdb-sun4
-cd ../gdb-sun4
-../gdb-@value{GDBVN}/configure sun4
-make
-@end group
-@end example
+@item @code{O}@var{XX...}
+@tab
+@var{XX...} is hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data. This can happen at any time
+while the program is running and the debugger should continue to wait
+for 'W', 'T', etc.
-When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
-directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
-(and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
-the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
-directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and @value{GDBN} itself in
-@file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
+@end multitable
-One popular reason to build several @value{GDBN} configurations in separate
-directories is to configure @value{GDBN} for cross-compiling (where
-@value{GDBN} runs on one machine---the @dfn{host}---while debugging
-programs that run on another machine---the @dfn{target}).
-You specify a cross-debugging target by
-giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
+The following set and query packets have already been defined.
-When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
-it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
-called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
+@multitable @columnfractions .2 .2 .6
-The @code{Makefile} that @code{configure} generates in each source
-directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
-directory such as @file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}} (or in a separate configured
-directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{dirname}/gdb-@value{GDBVN}}), you
-will build all the required libraries, and then build GDB.
+@item current thread
+@tab @code{q}@code{C}
+@tab Return the current thread id.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{QC}@var{pid}
+@tab
+Where @var{pid} is a HEX encoded 16 bit process id.
+@item
+@tab reply *
+@tab Any other reply implies the old pid.
-When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
-directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
-if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
-with each other.
+@item all thread ids
+@tab @code{q}@code{fThreadInfo}
+@item
+@tab @code{q}@code{sThreadInfo}
+@tab
+Obtain a list of active thread ids from the target (OS). Since there
+may be too many active threads to fit into one reply packet, this query
+works iteratively: it may require more than one query/reply sequence to
+obtain the entire list of threads. The first query of the sequence will
+be the @code{qf}@code{ThreadInfo} query; subsequent queries in the
+sequence will be the @code{qs}@code{ThreadInfo} query.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab NOTE: replaces the @code{qL} query (see below).
+@item
+@tab reply @code{m}@var{<id>}
+@tab A single thread id
+@item
+@tab reply @code{m}@var{<id>},@var{<id>...}
+@tab a comma-separated list of thread ids
+@item
+@tab reply @code{l}
+@tab (lower case 'el') denotes end of list.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+In response to each query, the target will reply with a list of one
+or more thread ids, in big-endian hex, separated by commas. GDB will
+respond to each reply with a request for more thread ids (using the
+@code{qs} form of the query), until the target responds with @code{l}
+(lower-case el, for @code{'last'}).
+
+@item extra thread info
+@tab @code{q}@code{ThreadExtraInfo}@code{,}@var{id}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+Where @var{<id>} is a thread-id in big-endian hex.
+Obtain a printable string description of a thread's attributes from
+the target OS. This string may contain anything that the target OS
+thinks is interesting for @value{GDBN} to tell the user about the thread.
+The string is displayed in @value{GDBN}'s @samp{info threads} display.
+Some examples of possible thread extra info strings are "Runnable", or
+"Blocked on Mutex".
+@item
+@tab reply @var{XX...}
+@tab
+Where @var{XX...} is a hex encoding of @sc{ascii} data, comprising the
+printable string containing the extra information about the thread's
+attributes.
-@node Config Names
-@section Specifying names for hosts and targets
+@item query @var{LIST} or @var{threadLIST} @strong{(deprecated)}
+@tab @code{q}@code{L}@var{startflag}@var{threadcount}@var{nextthread}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+Obtain thread information from RTOS. Where: @var{startflag} (one hex
+digit) is one to indicate the first query and zero to indicate a
+subsequent query; @var{threadcount} (two hex digits) is the maximum
+number of threads the response packet can contain; and @var{nextthread}
+(eight hex digits), for subsequent queries (@var{startflag} is zero), is
+returned in the response as @var{argthread}.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab NOTE: this query is replaced by the @code{q}@code{fThreadInfo}
+query (see above).
+@item
+@tab reply @code{q}@code{M}@var{count}@var{done}@var{argthread}@var{thread...}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+Where: @var{count} (two hex digits) is the number of threads being
+returned; @var{done} (one hex digit) is zero to indicate more threads
+and one indicates no further threads; @var{argthreadid} (eight hex
+digits) is @var{nextthread} from the request packet; @var{thread...} is
+a sequence of thread IDs from the target. @var{threadid} (eight hex
+digits). See @code{remote.c:parse_threadlist_response()}.
-The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
-script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
-aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
-of information in the following pattern:
+@item compute CRC of memory block
+@tab @code{q}@code{CRC:}@var{addr}@code{,}@var{length}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab An error (such as memory fault)
+@item
+@tab reply @code{C}@var{CRC32}
+@tab A 32 bit cyclic redundancy check of the specified memory region.
-@example
-@var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
-@end example
+@item query sect offs
+@tab @code{q}@code{Offsets}
+@tab
+Get section offsets that the target used when re-locating the downloaded
+image. @emph{Note: while a @code{Bss} offset is included in the
+response, @value{GDBN} ignores this and instead applies the @code{Data}
+offset to the @code{Bss} section.}
+@item
+@tab reply @code{Text=}@var{xxx}@code{;Data=}@var{yyy}@code{;Bss=}@var{zzz}
-For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument,
-or as the value for @var{target} in a @code{--target=@var{target}}
-option. The equivalent full name is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
+@item thread info request
+@tab @code{q}@code{P}@var{mode}@var{threadid}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+Returns information on @var{threadid}. Where: @var{mode} is a hex
+encoded 32 bit mode; @var{threadid} is a hex encoded 64 bit thread ID.
+@item
+@tab reply *
+@tab
+See @code{remote.c:remote_unpack_thread_info_response()}.
-The @code{configure} script accompanying @value{GDBN} does not provide
-any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
-aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
-@code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
-script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
-abbreviations---for example:
+@item remote command
+@tab @code{q}@code{Rcmd,}@var{COMMAND}
+@tab
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+@var{COMMAND} (hex encoded) is passed to the local interpreter for
+execution. Invalid commands should be reported using the output string.
+Before the final result packet, the target may also respond with a
+number of intermediate @code{O}@var{OUTPUT} console output
+packets. @emph{Implementors should note that providing access to a
+stubs's interpreter may have security implications}.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab
+A command response with no output.
+@item
+@tab reply @var{OUTPUT}
+@tab
+A command response with the hex encoded output string @var{OUTPUT}.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{E}@var{NN}
+@tab
+Indicate a badly formed request.
-@smallexample
-% sh config.sub i386-linux
-i386-pc-linux-gnu
-% sh config.sub alpha-linux
-alpha-unknown-linux-gnu
-% sh config.sub hp9k700
-hppa1.1-hp-hpux
-% sh config.sub sun4
-sparc-sun-sunos4.1.1
-% sh config.sub sun3
-m68k-sun-sunos4.1.1
-% sh config.sub i986v
-Invalid configuration `i986v': machine `i986v' not recognized
-@end smallexample
+@item
+@tab reply @samp{}
+@tab
+When @samp{q}@samp{Rcmd} is not recognized.
+@item symbol lookup
+@tab @code{qSymbol::}
+@tab
+Notify the target that @value{GDBN} is prepared to serve symbol lookup
+requests. Accept requests from the target for the values of symbols.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab
+The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_name}
+@tab
+@sp 2
@noindent
-@code{config.sub} is also distributed in the @value{GDBN} source
-directory (@file{gdb-@value{GDBVN}}, for version @value{GDBVN}).
+The target requests the value of symbol @var{sym_name} (hex encoded).
+@value{GDBN} may provide the value by using the
+@code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name}
+message, described below.
-@node Configure Options
-@section @code{configure} options
+@item symbol value
+@tab @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_value}:@var{sym_name}
+@tab
+@sp 1
+@noindent
+Set the value of SYM_NAME to SYM_VALUE.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+@var{sym_name} (hex encoded) is the name of a symbol whose value
+the target has previously requested.
+@item
+@tab
+@tab
+@var{sym_value} (hex) is the value for symbol @var{sym_name}.
+If @value{GDBN} cannot supply a value for @var{sym_name}, then this
+field will be empty.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{OK}
+@tab
+The target does not need to look up any (more) symbols.
+@item
+@tab reply @code{qSymbol:}@var{sym_name}
+@tab
+@sp 2
+@noindent
+The target requests the value of a new symbol @var{sym_name} (hex encoded).
+@value{GDBN} will continue to supply the values of symbols (if available),
+until the target ceases to request them.
-Here is a summary of the @code{configure} options and arguments that
-are most often useful for building @value{GDBN}. @code{configure} also has
-several other options not listed here. @inforef{What Configure
-Does,,configure.info}, for a full explanation of @code{configure}.
+@end multitable
-@example
-configure @r{[}--help@r{]}
- @r{[}--prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
- @r{[}--exec-prefix=@var{dir}@r{]}
- @r{[}--srcdir=@var{dirname}@r{]}
- @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
- @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]}
- @var{host}
-@end example
+The following @samp{g}/@samp{G} packets have previously been defined.
+In the below, some thirty-two bit registers are transferred as sixty-four
+bits. Those registers should be zero/sign extended (which?) to fill the
+space allocated. Register bytes are transfered in target byte order.
+The two nibbles within a register byte are transfered most-significant -
+least-significant.
-@noindent
-You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
-@samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
-@samp{--}.
+@multitable @columnfractions .5 .5
-@table @code
-@item --help
-Display a quick summary of how to invoke @code{configure}.
+@item MIPS32
+@tab
+All registers are transfered as thirty-two bit quantities in the order:
+32 general-purpose; sr; lo; hi; bad; cause; pc; 32 floating-point
+registers; fsr; fir; fp.
-@item --prefix=@var{dir}
-Configure the source to install programs and files under directory
-@file{@var{dir}}.
+@item MIPS64
+@tab
+All registers are transfered as sixty-four bit quantities (including
+thirty-two bit registers such as @code{sr}). The ordering is the same
+as @code{MIPS32}.
-@item --exec-prefix=@var{dir}
-Configure the source to install programs under directory
-@file{@var{dir}}.
+@end multitable
-@c avoid splitting the warning from the explanation:
-@need 2000
-@item --srcdir=@var{dirname}
-@strong{Warning: using this option requires @sc{gnu} @code{make}, or another
-@code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
-Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
-@value{GDBN} source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
-build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
-directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
-the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
-directory @var{dirname}. @code{configure} creates directories under
-the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
-@var{dirname}.
+Example sequence of a target being re-started. Notice how the restart
+does not get any direct output:
-@item --norecursion
-Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
-propagate configuration to subdirectories.
+@example
+<- @code{R00}
+-> @code{+}
+@emph{target restarts}
+<- @code{?}
+-> @code{+}
+-> @code{T001:1234123412341234}
+<- @code{+}
+@end example
-@item --target=@var{target}
-Configure @value{GDBN} for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
-@var{target}. Without this option, @value{GDBN} is configured to debug
-programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as @value{GDBN} itself.
+Example sequence of a target being stepped by a single instruction:
-There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
+@example
+<- @code{G1445...}
+-> @code{+}
+<- @code{s}
+-> @code{+}
+@emph{time passes}
+-> @code{T001:1234123412341234}
+<- @code{+}
+<- @code{g}
+-> @code{+}
+-> @code{1455...}
+<- @code{+}
+@end example
-@item @var{host} @dots{}
-Configure @value{GDBN} to run on the specified @var{host}.
-There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
-@end table
+@include fdl.texi
-There are many other options available as well, but they are generally
-needed for special purposes only.
-
@node Index
@unnumbered Index
% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 1991.
@end tex
+@c TeX can handle the contents at the start but makeinfo 3.12 can not
+@ifinfo
+@contents
+@end ifinfo
+@ifhtml
@contents
+@end ifhtml
+
@bye
projects / deliverable / binutils-gdb.git / blobdiff